Difference between revisions of "Module:Citation/CS1"

From Crews Genealogy Wiki: focusing on the Wiregrass south, and related families
Jump to navigation Jump to search
m (1 revision: family tree template)
 
m (1 revision imported)
 
(One intermediate revision by one other user not shown)
Line 1: Line 1:
  
local z = {
+
local cs1 ={};
error_categories = {}; -- for categorizing citations that contain errors
 
error_ids = {};
 
message_tail = {};
 
maintenance_cats = {}; -- for categorizing citations that aren't erroneous per se, but could use a little work
 
properties_cats = {}; -- for categorizing citations based on certain properties, language of source for instance
 
}
 
  
 
--[[--------------------------< F O R W A R D  D E C L A R A T I O N S >--------------------------------------
 
--[[--------------------------< F O R W A R D  D E C L A R A T I O N S >--------------------------------------
 
]]
 
]]
local dates, year_date_check -- functions in Module:Citation/CS1/Date_validation
 
  
local cfg = {}; -- table of configuration tables that are defined in Module:Citation/CS1/Configuration
+
local dates, year_date_check, reformat_dates, date_hyphen_to_dash, -- functions in Module:Citation/CS1/Date_validation
local whitelist = {}; -- table of tables listing valid template parameter names; defined in Module:Citation/CS1/Whitelist
+
date_name_xlate
  
--[[--------------------------< I S _ S E T >------------------------------------------------------------------
+
local is_set, in_array, substitute, error_comment, set_error, select_one, -- functions in Module:Citation/CS1/Utilities
 +
add_maint_cat, wrap_style, safe_for_italics, is_wikilink, make_wikilink;
  
Returns true if argument is set; false otherwise. Argument is 'set' when it exists (not nil) or when it is not an empty string.
+
local z ={}; -- tables in Module:Citation/CS1/Utilities
This function is global because it is called from both this module and from Date validation
+
 
 +
local extract_ids, extract_id_access_levels, build_id_list, is_embargoed; -- functions in Module:Citation/CS1/Identifiers
 +
 
 +
local make_coins_title, get_coins_pages, COinS; -- functions in Module:Citation/CS1/COinS
 +
 
 +
local cfg = {}; -- table of configuration tables that are defined in Module:Citation/CS1/Configuration
 +
local whitelist = {}; -- table of tables listing valid template parameter names; defined in Module:Citation/CS1/Whitelist
 +
 
 +
 
 +
--[[--------------------------< P A G E  S C O P E  V A R I A B L E S >--------------------------------------
 +
 
 +
delare variables here that have page-wide scope that are not brought in from other modules; thatare created here
 +
and used here
  
 
]]
 
]]
function is_set( var )
+
 
return not (var == nil or var == '');
+
local added_deprecated_cat; -- boolean flag so that the category is added only once
end
+
local added_prop_cats = {}; -- list of property categories that have been added to z.properties_cats
 +
local added_vanc_errs; -- boolean flag so we only emit one Vancouver error / category
 +
 
 +
local Frame; -- holds the module's frame table
 +
 
  
 
--[[--------------------------< F I R S T _ S E T >------------------------------------------------------------
 
--[[--------------------------< F I R S T _ S E T >------------------------------------------------------------
Line 46: Line 56:
 
end
 
end
  
--[[--------------------------< I N _ A R R A Y >--------------------------------------------------------------
 
  
Whether needle is in haystack
+
--[[--------------------------< A D D _ P R O P _ C A T >--------------------------------------------------------
 +
 
 +
Adds a category to z.properties_cats using names from the configuration file with additional text if any.
 +
 
 +
foreign_lang_source and foreign_lang_source_2 keys have a language code appended to them so that multiple languages
 +
may be categorized but multiples of the same language are not categorized.
 +
 
 +
added_prop_cats is a table declared in page scope variables above
  
 
]]
 
]]
  
local function in_array( needle, haystack )
+
local function add_prop_cat (key, arguments)
if needle == nil then
+
if not added_prop_cats [key] then
return false;
+
added_prop_cats [key] = true; -- note that we've added this category
 +
key = key:gsub ('(foreign_lang_source_?2?)%a%a%a?', '%1'); -- strip lang code from keyname
 +
table.insert( z.properties_cats, substitute (cfg.prop_cats [key], arguments)); -- make name then add to table
 
end
 
end
for n,v in ipairs( haystack ) do
 
if v == needle then
 
return n;
 
end
 
end
 
return false;
 
 
end
 
end
  
--[[--------------------------< S U B S T I T U T E >----------------------------------------------------------
 
  
Populates numbered arguments in a message string using an argument table.
+
--[[--------------------------< A D D _ V A N C _ E R R O R >----------------------------------------------------
  
]]
+
Adds a single Vancouver system error message to the template's output regardless of how many error actually exist.
 +
To prevent duplication, added_vanc_errs is nil until an error message is emitted.
  
local function substitute( msg, args )
+
added_vanc_errs is a boolean declared in page scope variables above
return args and mw.message.newRawMessage( msg, args ):plain() or msg;
 
end
 
  
--[[--------------------------< E R R O R _ C O M M E N T >----------------------------------------------------
+
]]
  
Wraps error messages with css markup according to the state of hidden.
+
local function add_vanc_error (source)
 
+
if not added_vanc_errs then
]]
+
added_vanc_errs = true; -- note that we've added this category
local function error_comment( content, hidden )
+
table.insert( z.message_tail, { set_error( 'vancouver', {source}, true ) } );
return substitute( hidden and cfg.presentation['hidden-error'] or cfg.presentation['visible-error'], content );
+
end
 
end
 
end
  
--[[--------------------------< S E T _ E R R O R >--------------------------------------------------------------
 
  
Sets an error condition and returns the appropriate error message.  The actual placement of the error message in the output is
+
--[[--------------------------< I S _ S C H E M E >------------------------------------------------------------
the responsibility of the calling function.
 
  
]]
+
does this thing that purports to be a uri scheme seem to be a valid scheme?  The scheme is checked to see if it
local function set_error( error_id, arguments, raw, prefix, suffix )
+
is in agreement with http://tools.ietf.org/html/std66#section-3.1 which says:
local error_state = cfg.error_conditions[ error_id ];
+
Scheme names consist of a sequence of characters beginning with a
+
  letter and followed by any combination of letters, digits, plus
prefix = prefix or "";
+
  ("+"), period ("."), or hyphen ("-").
suffix = suffix or "";
 
 
if error_state == nil then
 
error( cfg.messages['undefined_error'] );
 
elseif is_set( error_state.category ) then
 
table.insert( z.error_categories, error_state.category );
 
end
 
 
local message = substitute( error_state.message, arguments );
 
 
message = message .. " ([[" .. cfg.messages['help page link'] ..
 
"#" .. error_state.anchor .. "|" ..
 
cfg.messages['help page label'] .. "]])";
 
 
z.error_ids[ error_id ] = true;
 
if in_array( error_id, { 'bare_url_missing_title', 'trans_missing_title' } )
 
and z.error_ids['citation_missing_title'] then
 
return '', false;
 
end
 
 
message = table.concat({ prefix, message, suffix });
 
 
if raw == true then
 
return message, error_state.hidden;
 
end
 
 
return error_comment( message, error_state.hidden );
 
end
 
  
--[[--------------------------< A D D _ M A I N T _ C A T >------------------------------------------------------
+
returns true if it does, else false
 
 
Adds a category to z.maintenance_cats using names from the configuration file with additional text if any.
 
To prevent duplication, the added_maint_cats table lists the categories by key that have been added to z.maintenance_cats.
 
  
 
]]
 
]]
  
local added_maint_cats = {} -- list of maintenance categories that have been added to z.maintenance_cats
+
local function is_scheme (scheme)
local function add_maint_cat (key, arguments)
+
return scheme and scheme:match ('^%a[%a%d%+%.%-]*:'); -- true if scheme is set and matches the pattern
if not added_maint_cats [key] then
 
added_maint_cats [key] = true; -- note that we've added this category
 
table.insert( z.maintenance_cats, substitute (cfg.maint_cats [key], arguments)); -- make name then add to table
 
end
 
 
end
 
end
  
--[[--------------------------< A D D _ P R O P _ C A T >--------------------------------------------------------
 
  
Adds a category to z.properties_cats using names from the configuration file with additional text if any.
+
--[=[-------------------------< I S _ D O M A I N _ N A M E >--------------------------------------------------
  
]]
+
Does this thing that purports to be a domain name seem to be a valid domain name?
  
local added_prop_cats = {} -- list of property categories that have been added to z.properties_cats
+
Syntax defined here: http://tools.ietf.org/html/rfc1034#section-3.5
local function add_prop_cat (key, arguments)
+
BNF defined here: https://tools.ietf.org/html/rfc4234
if not added_prop_cats [key] then
+
Single character names are generally reserved; see https://tools.ietf.org/html/draft-ietf-dnsind-iana-dns-01#page-15;
added_prop_cats [key] = true; -- note that we've added this category
+
see also [[Single-letter second-level domain]]
table.insert( z.properties_cats, substitute (cfg.prop_cats [key], arguments)); -- make name then add to table
+
list of tlds: https://www.iana.org/domains/root/db
end
 
end
 
  
--[[--------------------------< A D D _ V A N C _ E R R O R >----------------------------------------------------
+
rfc952 (modified by rfc 1123) requires the first and last character of a hostname to be a letter or a digit.  Between
 +
the first and last characters the name may use letters, digits, and the hyphen.
  
Adds a single Vancouver system error message to the template's output regardless of how many error actually exist.
+
Also allowed are IPv4 addresses. IPv6 not supported
To prevent duplication, added_vanc_errs is nil until an error message is emitted.
 
  
]]
+
domain is expected to be stripped of any path so that the last character in the last character of the tld.  tld
 +
is two or more alpha characters.  Any preceding '//' (from splitting a url with a scheme) will be stripped
 +
here.  Perhaps not necessary but retained incase it is necessary for IPv4 dot decimal.
  
local added_vanc_errs; -- flag so we only emit one Vancouver error / category
+
There are several tests:
local function add_vanc_error ()
+
the first character of the whole domain name including subdomains must be a letter or a digit
if not added_vanc_errs then
+
internationalized domain name (ascii characters with .xn-- ASCII Compatible Encoding (ACE) prefix xn-- in the tld) see https://tools.ietf.org/html/rfc3490
added_vanc_errs = true; -- note that we've added this category
+
single-letter/digit second-level domains in the .org and .cash TLDs
table.insert( z.message_tail, { set_error( 'vancouver', {}, true ) } );
+
q, x, and z SL domains in the .com TLD
end
+
i and q SL domains in the .net TLD
end
+
single-letter SL domains in the ccTLDs (where the ccTLD is two letters)
 +
two-character SL domains in gTLDs (where the gTLD is two or more letters)
 +
three-plus-character SL domains in gTLDs (where the gTLD is two or more letters)
 +
IPv4 dot-decimal address format; TLD not allowed
  
 +
returns true if domain appears to be a proper name and tld or IPv4 address, else false
  
--[[--------------------------< I S _ S C H E M E >------------------------------------------------------------
+
]=]
  
does this thing that purports to be a uri scheme seem to be a valid scheme?  The scheme is checked to see if it
+
local function is_domain_name (domain)
is in agreement with http://tools.ietf.org/html/std66#section-3.1 which says:
+
if not domain then
Scheme names consist of a sequence of characters beginning with a
+
return false; -- if not set, abandon
  letter and followed by any combination of letters, digits, plus
+
end
  ("+"), period ("."), or hyphen ("-").
+
 +
domain = domain:gsub ('^//', ''); -- strip '//' from domain name if present; done here so we only have to do it once
 +
 +
if not domain:match ('^[%a%d]') then -- first character must be letter or digit
 +
return false;
 +
end
 +
-- Do most common case first
 +
if domain:match ('%f[%a%d][%a%d][%a%d%-]+[%a%d]%.%a%a+$') then -- three or more character hostname.hostname or hostname.tld
 +
return true;
 +
elseif domain:match ('%f[%a%d][%a%d][%a%d%-]+[%a%d]%.xn%-%-[%a%d]+$') then -- internationalized domain name with ACE prefix
 +
return true;
 +
elseif domain:match ('%f[%a%d][%a%d]%.cash$') then -- one character/digit .cash hostname
 +
return true;
 +
elseif domain:match ('%f[%a%d][%a%d]%.org$') then -- one character/digit .org hostname
 +
return true;
 +
elseif domain:match ('%f[%a][qxz]%.com$') then -- assigned one character .com hostname (x.com times out 2015-12-10)
 +
return true;
 +
elseif domain:match ('%f[%a][iq]%.net$') then -- assigned one character .net hostname (q.net registered but not active 2015-12-10)
 +
return true;
 +
elseif domain:match ('%f[%a%d][%a%d]%.%a%a$') then -- one character hostname and cctld (2 chars)
 +
return true;
 +
elseif domain:match ('%f[%a%d][%a%d][%a%d]%.%a%a+$') then -- two character hostname and tld
 +
return true;
 +
elseif domain:match ('^%d%d?%d?%.%d%d?%d?%.%d%d?%d?%.%d%d?%d?') then -- IPv4 address
 +
return true;
 +
else
 +
return false;
 +
end
 +
end
  
returns true if it does, else false
 
  
]]
+
--[[--------------------------< I S _ U R L >------------------------------------------------------------------
  
local function is_scheme (scheme)
+
returns true if the scheme and domain parts of a url appear to be a valid url; else false.
return scheme and scheme:match ('^%a[%a%d%+%.%-]*:'); -- true if scheme is set and matches the pattern
 
end
 
  
 +
This function is the last step in the validation process.  This function is separate because there are cases that
 +
are not covered by split_url(), for example is_parameter_ext_wikilink() which is looking for bracketted external
 +
wikilinks.
  
--[=[-------------------------< I S _ D O M A I N _ N A M E >--------------------------------------------------
+
]]
 
 
Does this thing that purports to be a domain name seem to be a valid domain name?
 
  
Syntax defined here: http://tools.ietf.org/html/rfc1034#section-3.5
+
local function is_url (scheme, domain)
BNF defined here: https://tools.ietf.org/html/rfc4234
+
if is_set (scheme) then -- if scheme is set check it and domain
Single character names are generally reserved; see https://tools.ietf.org/html/draft-ietf-dnsind-iana-dns-01#page-15;
+
return is_scheme (scheme) and is_domain_name (domain);
see also [[Single-letter second-level domain]]
+
else
list of tlds: https://www.iana.org/domains/root/db
+
return is_domain_name (domain); -- scheme not set when url is protocol relative
 +
end
 +
end
  
rfc952 (modified by rfc 1123) requires the first and last character of a hostname to be a letter or a digit.  Between
 
the first and last characters the name may use letters, digits, and the hyphen.
 
  
Also allowed are IPv4 addresses. IPv6 not supported
+
--[[--------------------------< S P L I T _ U R L >------------------------------------------------------------
  
domain is expected to be stripped of any path so that the last character in the last character of the tld.  tld
+
Split a url into a scheme, authority indicator, and domain.
is two or more alpha characters.  Any preceding '//' (from splitting a url with a scheme) will be stripped
 
here.  Perhaps not necessary but retained incase it is necessary for IPv4 dot decimal.
 
  
There are several tests:
+
First remove Fully Qualified Domain Name terminator (a dot following tld) (if any) and any path(/), query(?) or fragment(#).
the first character of the whole domain name including subdomains must be a letter or a digit
 
single-letter/digit second-level domains in the .org TLD
 
q, x, and z SL domains in the .com TLD
 
i and q SL domains in the .net TLD
 
single-letter SL domains in the ccTLDs (where the ccTLD is two letters)
 
two-character SL domains in gTLDs (where the gTLD is two or more letters)
 
three-plus-character SL domains in gTLDs (where the gTLD is two or more letters)
 
IPv4 dot-decimal address format; TLD not allowed
 
  
returns true if domain appears to be a proper name and tld or IPv4 address, else false
+
If protocol relative url, return nil scheme and domain else return nil for both scheme and domain.
 +
 
 +
When not protocol relative, get scheme, authority indicator, and domain.  If there is an authority indicator (one
 +
or more '/' characters immediately following the scheme's colon), make sure that there are only 2.
 +
 
 +
Strip off any port and path;
  
]=]
+
]]
  
local function is_domain_name (domain)
+
local function split_url (url_str)
if not domain then
+
local scheme, authority, domain;
return false; -- if not set, abandon
 
end
 
 
 
domain = domain:gsub ('^//', ''); -- strip '//' from domain name if present; done here so we only have to do it once
+
url_str = url_str:gsub ('([%a%d])%.?[/%?#].*$', '%1'); -- strip FQDN terminator and path(/), query(?), fragment (#) (the capture prevents false replacement of '//')
+
 
if not domain:match ('^[%a%d]') then -- first character must be letter or digit
+
if url_str:match ('^//%S*') then -- if there is what appears to be a protocol relative url
return false;
+
domain = url_str:match ('^//(%S*)')
 +
elseif url_str:match ('%S-:/*%S+') then -- if there is what appears to be a scheme, optional authority indicator, and domain name
 +
scheme, authority, domain = url_str:match ('(%S-:)(/*)(%S+)'); -- extract the scheme, authority indicator, and domain portions
 +
authority = authority:gsub ('//', '', 1); -- replace place 1 pair of '/' with nothing;
 +
if is_set(authority) then -- if anything left (1 or 3+ '/' where authority should be) then
 +
return scheme; -- return scheme only making domain nil which will cause an error message
 +
end
 +
domain = domain:gsub ('(%a):%d+', '%1'); -- strip port number if present
 
end
 
end
 
 
if domain:match ('%f[%a%d][%a%d]%.org$') then -- one character .org hostname
+
return scheme, domain;
return true;
+
end
elseif domain:match ('%f[%a][qxz]%.com$') then -- assigned one character .com hostname (x.com times out 2015-12-10)
+
 
return true;
+
 
elseif domain:match ('%f[%a][iq]%.net$') then -- assigned one character .net hostname (q.net registered but not active 2015-12-10)
+
--[[--------------------------< L I N K _ P A R A M _ O K >---------------------------------------------------
return true;
 
elseif domain:match ('%f[%a%d][%a%d]%.%a%a$') then -- one character hostname and cctld (2 chars)
 
return true;
 
elseif domain:match ('%f[%a%d][%a%d][%a%d]%.%a%a+$') then -- two character hostname and tld
 
return true;
 
elseif domain:match ('%f[%a%d][%a%d][%a%d%-]+[%a%d]%.%a%a+$') then -- three or more character hostname.hostname or hostname.tld
 
return true;
 
elseif domain:match ('^%d%d?%d?%.%d%d?%d?%.%d%d?%d?%.%d%d?%d?') then -- IPv4 address
 
return true;
 
else
 
return false;
 
end
 
end
 
  
 +
checks the content of |title-link=, |series-link=, |author-link= etc for properly formatted content: no wikilinks, no urls
  
--[[--------------------------< I S _ U R L >------------------------------------------------------------------
+
Link parameters are to hold the title of a wikipedia article so none of the WP:TITLESPECIALCHARACTERS are allowed:
 +
# < > [ ] | { } _
 +
except the underscore which is used as a space in wiki urls and # which is used for section links
  
returns true if the scheme and domain parts of a url appear to be a valid url; else false.
+
returns false when the value contains any of these characters.
  
This function is the last step in the validation process.  This function is separate because there are cases that
+
When there are no illegal characters, this function returns TRUE if value DOES NOT appear to be a valid url (the
are not covered by split_url(), for example is_parameter_ext_wikilink() which is looking for bracketted external
+
|<param>-link= parameter is ok); else false when value appears to be a valid url (the |<param>-link= parameter is NOT ok).
wikilinks.
 
  
 
]]
 
]]
  
local function is_url (scheme, domain)
+
local function link_param_ok (value)
if is_set (scheme) then -- if scheme is set check it and domain
+
local scheme, domain;
return is_scheme (scheme) and is_domain_name (domain);
+
if value:find ('[<>%[%]|{}]') then -- if any prohibited characters
else
+
return false;
return is_domain_name (domain); -- scheme not set when url is protocol relative
 
 
end
 
end
 +
 +
scheme, domain = split_url (value); -- get scheme or nil and domain or nil from url;
 +
return not is_url (scheme, domain); -- return true if value DOES NOT appear to be a valid url
 
end
 
end
  
  
--[[--------------------------< S P L I T _ U R L >------------------------------------------------------------
+
--[[--------------------------< L I N K _ T I T L E _ O K >---------------------------------------------------
  
Split a url into a scheme, authority indicator, and domain.
+
Use link_param_ok() to validate |<param>-link= value and its matching |<title>= value.
If protocol relative url, return nil scheme and domain else return nil for both scheme and domain.
 
  
When not protocol relative, get scheme, authority indicator, and domainIf there is an authority indicator (one
+
|<title>= may be wikilinked but not when |<param>-link= has a valueThis function emits an error message when
or more '/' characters following the scheme's colon), make sure that there are only 2.
+
that condition exists
  
 
]]
 
]]
  
local function split_url (url_str)
+
local function link_title_ok (link, lorig, title, torig)
local scheme, authority, domain;
+
local orig;
 
url_str = url_str:gsub ('(%a)/.*', '%1'); -- strip path information (the capture prevents false replacement of '//')
 
  
if url_str:match ('^//%S*') then -- if there is what appears to be a protocol relative url
+
if is_set (link) then -- don't bother if <param>-link doesn't have a value
domain = url_str:match ('^//(%S*)')
+
if not link_param_ok (link) then -- check |<param>-link= markup
elseif url_str:match ('%S-:/*%S+') then -- if there is what appears to be a scheme, optional authority indicator, and domain name
+
orig = lorig; -- identify the failing link parameter
scheme, authority, domain = url_str:match ('(%S-:)(/*)(%S+)'); -- extract the scheme, authority indicator, and domain portions
+
elseif title:find ('%[%[') then -- check |title= for wikilink markup
authority = authority:gsub ('//', '', 1); -- replace place 1 pair of '/' with nothing;
+
orig = torig; -- identify the failing |title= parameter
if is_set(authority) then -- if anything left (1 or 3+ '/' where authority should be) then
 
domain = nil; -- set to nil which will cause an error message
 
 
end
 
end
 
end
 
end
+
 
return scheme, domain;
+
if is_set (orig) then
 +
table.insert( z.message_tail, { set_error( 'bad_paramlink', orig)}); -- url or wikilink in |title= with |title-link=;
 +
end
 
end
 
end
  
  
--[[--------------------------< L I N K _ P A R A M _ O K >---------------------------------------------------
+
--[[--------------------------< C H E C K _ U R L >------------------------------------------------------------
  
checks the content of |title-link=, |series-link=, |author-link= etc for properly formatted content: no wikilinks, no urls
+
Determines whether a URL string appears to be valid.
  
Link parameters are to hold the title of a wikipedia article so none of the WP:TITLESPECIALCHARACTERS are allowed:
+
First we test for space characters.  If any are found, return false.  Then split the url into scheme and domain
# < > [ ] | { } _
+
portions, or for protocol relative (//example.com) urls, just the domain.  Use is_url() to validate the two
except the underscore which is used as a space in wiki urls and # which is used for section links
+
portions of the url.  If both are valid, or for protocol relative if domain is valid, return true, else false.
  
returns false when the value contains any of these characters.
+
Because it is different from a standard url, and because this module used external_link() to make external links
 
+
that work for standard and news: links, we validate newsgroup names here.  The specification for a newsgroup name
When there are no illegal characters, this function returns TRUE if value DOES NOT appear to be a valid url (the
+
is at https://tools.ietf.org/html/rfc5536#section-3.1.4
|<param>-link= parameter is ok); else false when value appears to be a valid url (the |<param>-link= parameter is NOT ok).
 
  
 
]]
 
]]
  
local function link_param_ok (value)
+
local function check_url( url_str )
local scheme, domain;
+
if nil == url_str:match ("^%S+$") then -- if there are any spaces in |url=value it can't be a proper url
if value:find ('[<>%[%]|{}]') then -- if any prohibited characters
 
 
return false;
 
return false;
 
end
 
end
 +
local scheme, domain;
  
scheme, domain = split_url (value); -- get scheme or nil and domain or nil from url;  
+
scheme, domain = split_url (url_str); -- get scheme or nil and domain or nil from url;
return not is_url (scheme, domain); -- return true if value DOES NOT appear to be a valid url
+
end
+
if 'news:' == scheme then -- special case for newsgroups
 
+
return domain:match('^[%a%d%+%-_]+%.[%a%d%+%-_%.]*[%a%d%+%-_]$');
 
 
--[[--------------------------< C H E C K _ U R L >------------------------------------------------------------
 
 
 
Determines whether a URL string appears to be valid.
 
 
 
First we test for space characters.  If any are found, return false.  Then split the url into scheme and domain
 
portions, or for protocol relative (//example.com) urls, just the domain. Use is_url() to validate the two
 
portions of the url.  If both are valid, or for protocol relative if domain is valid, return true, else false.
 
 
 
]]
 
 
 
local function check_url( url_str )
 
if nil == url_str:match ("^%S+$") then -- if there are any spaces in |url=value it can't be a proper url
 
return false;
 
 
end
 
end
local scheme, domain;
+
 
 
scheme, domain = split_url (url_str); -- get scheme or nil and domain or nil from url;
 
 
return is_url (scheme, domain); -- return true if value appears to be a valid url
 
return is_url (scheme, domain); -- return true if value appears to be a valid url
 
end
 
end
Line 358: Line 331:
 
local function is_parameter_ext_wikilink (value)
 
local function is_parameter_ext_wikilink (value)
 
local scheme, domain;
 
local scheme, domain;
 
value = value:gsub ('([^%s/])/[%a%d].*', '%1'); -- strip path information (the capture prevents false replacement of '//')
 
  
 
if value:match ('%f[%[]%[%a%S*:%S+.*%]') then -- if ext wikilink with scheme and domain: [xxxx://yyyyy.zzz]
 
if value:match ('%f[%[]%[%a%S*:%S+.*%]') then -- if ext wikilink with scheme and domain: [xxxx://yyyyy.zzz]
scheme, domain = value:match ('%f[%[]%[(%a%S*:)(%S+).*%]')
+
scheme, domain = split_url (value:match ('%f[%[]%[(%a%S*:%S+).*%]'));
elseif value:match ('%f[%[]%[//%S*%.%S+.*%]') then -- if protocol relative ext wikilink: [//yyyyy.zzz]
+
elseif value:match ('%f[%[]%[//%S+.*%]') then -- if protocol relative ext wikilink: [//yyyyy.zzz]
domain = value:match ('%f[%[]%[//(%S*%.%S+).*%]');
+
scheme, domain = split_url (value:match ('%f[%[]%[(//%S+).*%]'));
 
elseif value:match ('%a%S*:%S+') then -- if bare url with scheme; may have leading or trailing plain text
 
elseif value:match ('%a%S*:%S+') then -- if bare url with scheme; may have leading or trailing plain text
scheme, domain = value:match ('(%a%S*:)(%S+)');
+
scheme, domain = split_url (value:match ('(%a%S*:%S+)'));
elseif value:match ('//%S*%.%S+') then -- if protocol relative bare url: //yyyyy.zzz; may have leading or trailing plain text
+
elseif value:match ('//%S+') then -- if protocol relative bare url: //yyyyy.zzz; may have leading or trailing plain text
domain = value:match ('//(%S*%.%S+)'); -- what is left should be the domain
+
scheme, domain = split_url (value:match ('(//%S+)')); -- what is left should be the domain
 
else
 
else
 
return false; -- didn't find anything that is obviously a url
 
return false; -- didn't find anything that is obviously a url
Line 398: Line 369:
 
end
 
end
  
 
--[[--------------------------< S A F E _ F O R _ I T A L I C S >----------------------------------------------
 
 
Protects a string that will be wrapped in wiki italic markup '' ... ''
 
 
Note: We cannot use <i> for italics, as the expected behavior for italics specified by ''...'' in the title is that
 
they will be inverted (i.e. unitalicized) in the resulting references.  In addition, <i> and '' tend to interact
 
poorly under Mediawiki's HTML tidy.
 
 
]]
 
 
local function safe_for_italics( str )
 
if not is_set(str) then
 
return str;
 
else
 
if str:sub(1,1) == "'" then str = "<span />" .. str; end
 
if str:sub(-1,-1) == "'" then str = str .. "<span />"; end
 
 
-- Remove newlines as they break italics.
 
return str:gsub( '\n', ' ' );
 
end
 
end
 
  
 
--[[--------------------------< S A F E _ F O R _ U R L >------------------------------------------------------
 
--[[--------------------------< S A F E _ F O R _ U R L >------------------------------------------------------
Line 438: Line 387:
 
end
 
end
  
--[[--------------------------< W R A P _ S T Y L E >----------------------------------------------------------
 
 
Applies styling to various parameters.  Supplied string is wrapped using a message_list configuration taking one
 
argument; protects italic styled parameters.  Additional text taken from citation_config.presentation - the reason
 
this function is similar to but separate from wrap_msg().
 
 
]]
 
 
local function wrap_style (key, str)
 
if not is_set( str ) then
 
return "";
 
elseif in_array( key, { 'italic-title', 'trans-italic-title' } ) then
 
str = safe_for_italics( str );
 
end
 
 
return substitute( cfg.presentation[key], {str} );
 
end
 
  
 
--[[--------------------------< E X T E R N A L _ L I N K >----------------------------------------------------
 
--[[--------------------------< E X T E R N A L _ L I N K >----------------------------------------------------
Line 462: Line 394:
 
]]
 
]]
  
local function external_link( URL, label, source )
+
local function external_link( URL, label, source, access)
 
local error_str = "";
 
local error_str = "";
 +
local domain;
 +
local path;
 +
local base_url;
 +
 
if not is_set( label ) then
 
if not is_set( label ) then
 
label = URL;
 
label = URL;
Line 475: Line 411:
 
error_str = set_error( 'bad_url', {wrap_style ('parameter', source)}, false, " " ) .. error_str;
 
error_str = set_error( 'bad_url', {wrap_style ('parameter', source)}, false, " " ) .. error_str;
 
end
 
end
return table.concat({ "[", URL, " ", safe_for_url( label ), "]", error_str });
+
end
+
domain, path = URL:match ('^([/%.%-%+:%a%d]+)([/%?#].*)$'); -- split the url into scheme plus domain and path
 +
if path then -- if there is a path portion
 +
path = path:gsub ('[%[%]]', {['[']='%5b',[']']='%5d'}); -- replace '[' and ']' with their percent encoded values
 +
URL = table.concat ({domain, path}); -- and reassemble
 +
end
  
--[[--------------------------< E X T E R N A L _ L I N K _ I D >----------------------------------------------
+
base_url = table.concat({ "[", URL, " ", safe_for_url (label), "]" }); -- assemble a wikimarkup url
 
+
Formats a wiki style external link
+
if is_set (access) then -- access level (subscription, registration, limited)
 
+
base_url = substitute (cfg.presentation['ext-link-access-signal'], {cfg.presentation[access].class, cfg.presentation[access].title, base_url}); -- add the appropriate icon
]]
 
 
 
local function external_link_id(options)
 
local url_string = options.id;
 
if options.encode == true or options.encode == nil then
 
url_string = mw.uri.encode( url_string );
 
 
end
 
end
return mw.ustring.format( '[[%s|%s]]%s[%s%s%s %s]',
+
options.link, options.label, options.separator or "&nbsp;",
+
return table.concat ({base_url, error_str});
options.prefix, url_string, options.suffix or "",
 
mw.text.nowiki(options.id)
 
);
 
 
end
 
end
 +
  
 
--[[--------------------------< D E P R E C A T E D _ P A R A M E T E R >--------------------------------------
 
--[[--------------------------< D E P R E C A T E D _ P A R A M E T E R >--------------------------------------
Line 501: Line 433:
 
offending parameter name to the error message.  Only one error message is emitted regardless of the number of deprecated
 
offending parameter name to the error message.  Only one error message is emitted regardless of the number of deprecated
 
parameters in the citation.
 
parameters in the citation.
 +
 +
added_deprecated_cat is a boolean declared in page scope variables above
  
 
]]
 
]]
  
local page_in_deprecated_cat; -- sticky flag so that the category is added only once
 
 
local function deprecated_parameter(name)
 
local function deprecated_parameter(name)
if not page_in_deprecated_cat then
+
if not added_deprecated_cat then
page_in_deprecated_cat = true; -- note that we've added this category
+
added_deprecated_cat = true; -- note that we've added this category
 
table.insert( z.message_tail, { set_error( 'deprecated_params', {name}, true ) } ); -- add error message
 
table.insert( z.message_tail, { set_error( 'deprecated_params', {name}, true ) } ); -- add error message
 
end
 
end
 
end
 
end
  
--[[--------------------------< K E R N _ Q U O T E S >--------------------------------------------------------
 
  
Apply kerning to open the space between the quote mark provided by the Module and a leading or trailing quote mark contained in a |title= or |chapter= parameter's value.
+
--[=[-------------------------< K E R N _ Q U O T E S >--------------------------------------------------------
 +
 
 +
Apply kerning to open the space between the quote mark provided by the Module and a leading or trailing quote
 +
mark contained in a |title= or |chapter= parameter's value.
 +
 
 
This function will positive kern either single or double quotes:
 
This function will positive kern either single or double quotes:
 
"'Unkerned title with leading and trailing single quote marks'"
 
"'Unkerned title with leading and trailing single quote marks'"
 
" 'Kerned title with leading and trailing single quote marks' " (in real life the kerning isn't as wide as this example)
 
" 'Kerned title with leading and trailing single quote marks' " (in real life the kerning isn't as wide as this example)
 
Double single quotes (italic or bold wikimarkup) are not kerned.
 
Double single quotes (italic or bold wikimarkup) are not kerned.
 +
 +
Replaces unicode quotemarks in plain text or in the label portion of a [[L|D]] style wikilink with typewriter
 +
quote marks regardless of the need for kerning.  Unicode quote marks are not replaced in simple [[D]] wikilinks.
  
 
Call this function for chapter titles, for website titles, etc; not for book titles.
 
Call this function for chapter titles, for website titles, etc; not for book titles.
  
]]
+
]=]
  
 
local function kern_quotes (str)
 
local function kern_quotes (str)
 
local cap='';
 
local cap='';
 
local cap2='';
 
local cap2='';
 +
local wl_type, label, link;
 +
 +
wl_type, label, link = is_wikilink (str); -- wl_type is: 0, no wl (text in label variable); 1, [[D]]; 2, [[L|D]]
 
 
cap, cap2 = str:match ("^([\"\'])([^\'].+)"); -- match leading double or single quote but not double single quotes
+
if 1 == wl_type then -- [[D]] simple wikilink with or without quote marks
if is_set (cap) then
+
if mw.ustring.match (str, '%[%[[\"“”\'‘’].+[\"“”\'‘’]%]%]') then -- leading and trailing quote marks
str = substitute (cfg.presentation['kern-left'], {cap, cap2});
+
str = substitute (cfg.presentation['kern-wl-both'], str);
end
+
elseif mw.ustring.match (str, '%[%[[\"“”\'‘’].+%]%]') then -- leading quote marks
 +
str = substitute (cfg.presentation['kern-wl-left'], str);
 +
elseif mw.ustring.match (str, '%[%[.+[\"“”\'‘’]%]%]') then -- trailing quote marks
 +
str = substitute (cfg.presentation['kern-wl-right'], str);
 +
end
  
cap, cap2 = str:match ("^(.+[^\'])([\"\'])$")
+
else -- plain text or [[L|D]]; text in label variable
if is_set (cap) then
+
label= mw.ustring.gsub (label, '[“”]', '\"'); -- replace “” (U+201C & U+201D) with " (typewriter double quote mark)
str = substitute (cfg.presentation['kern-right'], {cap, cap2});
+
label= mw.ustring.gsub (label, '[‘’]', '\''); -- replace ‘’ (U+2018 & U+2019) with ' (typewriter single quote mark)
end
 
return str;
 
end
 
  
--[[--------------------------< F O R M A T _ S C R I P T _ V A L U E >----------------------------------------
+
cap, cap2 = mw.ustring.match (label, "^([\"\'])([^\'].+)"); -- match leading double or single quote but not doubled single quotes (italic markup)
 +
if is_set (cap) then
 +
label = substitute (cfg.presentation['kern-left'], {cap, cap2});
 +
end
 +
 +
cap, cap2 = mw.ustring.match (label, "^(.+[^\'])([\"\'])$") -- match trailing double or single quote but not doubled single quotes (italic markup)
 +
if is_set (cap) then
 +
label = substitute (cfg.presentation['kern-right'], {cap, cap2});
 +
end
 +
 +
if 2 == wl_type then
 +
str = make_wikilink (link, label); -- reassemble the wikilink
 +
else
 +
str = label;
 +
end
 +
end
 +
return str;
 +
end
 +
 
 +
 
 +
--[[--------------------------< F O R M A T _ S C R I P T _ V A L U E >----------------------------------------
  
 
|script-title= holds title parameters that are not written in Latin based scripts: Chinese, Japanese, Arabic, Hebrew, etc. These scripts should
 
|script-title= holds title parameters that are not written in Latin based scripts: Chinese, Japanese, Arabic, Hebrew, etc. These scripts should
Line 574: Line 537:
 
end
 
end
 
-- if we get this far we have prefix and script
 
-- if we get this far we have prefix and script
name = mw.language.fetchLanguageName( lang, "en" ); -- get language name so that we can use it to categorize
+
name = cfg.lang_code_remap[lang] or mw.language.fetchLanguageName( lang, "en" ); -- get language name so that we can use it to categorize
 
if is_set (name) then -- is prefix a proper ISO 639-1 language code?
 
if is_set (name) then -- is prefix a proper ISO 639-1 language code?
 
script_value = script_value:gsub ('^%l%l%s*:%s*', ''); -- strip prefix from script
 
script_value = script_value:gsub ('^%l%l%s*:%s*', ''); -- strip prefix from script
 
-- is prefix one of these language codes?
 
-- is prefix one of these language codes?
if in_array (lang, {'ar', 'bg', 'bs', 'dv', 'el', 'fa', 'he', 'hy', 'ja', 'ka', 'ko', 'ku', 'mk', 'ps', 'ru', 'sd', 'sr', 'th', 'uk', 'ug', 'yi', 'zh'}) then
+
if in_array (lang, cfg.script_lang_codes) then
 
add_prop_cat ('script_with_name', {name, lang})
 
add_prop_cat ('script_with_name', {name, lang})
 
else
 
else
Line 592: Line 555:
 
return script_value;
 
return script_value;
 
end
 
end
 +
  
 
--[[--------------------------< S C R I P T _ C O N C A T E N A T E >------------------------------------------
 
--[[--------------------------< S C R I P T _ C O N C A T E N A T E >------------------------------------------
Line 632: Line 596:
  
  
--[[-------------------------< I S _ A L I A S _ U S E D >-----------------------------------------------------
+
--[[--------------------------< F O R M A T _ C H A P T E R _ T I T L E >--------------------------------------
  
This function is used by select_one() to determine if one of a list of alias parameters is in the argument list
+
Format the four chapter parameters: |script-chapter=, |chapter=, |trans-chapter=, and |chapter-url= into a single Chapter meta-
provided by the template.
+
parameter (chapter_url_source used for error messages).
 
 
Input:
 
args – pointer to the arguments table from calling template
 
alias – one of the list of possible aliases in the aliases lists from Module:Citation/CS1/Configuration
 
index – for enumerated parameters, identifies which one
 
enumerated – true/false flag used choose how enumerated aliases are examined
 
value – value associated with an alias that has previously been selected; nil if not yet selected
 
selected – the alias that has previously been selected; nil if not yet selected
 
error_list – list of aliases that are duplicates of the alias already selected
 
 
 
Returns:
 
value – value associated with alias we selected or that was previously selected or nil if an alias not yet selected
 
selected – the alias we selected or the alias that was previously selected or nil if an alias not yet selected
 
  
 
]]
 
]]
  
local function is_alias_used (args, alias, index, enumerated, value, selected, error_list)
+
local function format_chapter_title (scriptchapter, chapter, transchapter, chapterurl, chapter_url_source, no_quotes, access)
if enumerated then -- is this a test for an enumerated parameters?
+
local chapter_error = '';
alias = alias:gsub ('#', index); -- replace '#' with the value in index
+
 +
if not is_set (chapter) then
 +
chapter = ''; -- to be safe for concatenation
 
else
 
else
alias = alias:gsub ('#', ''); -- remove '#' if it exists
+
if false == no_quotes then
end
+
chapter = kern_quotes (chapter); -- if necessary, separate chapter title's leading and trailing quote marks from Module provided quote marks
 
+
chapter = wrap_style ('quoted-title', chapter);
if is_set(args[alias]) then -- alias is in the template's argument list
 
if value ~= nil and selected ~= alias then -- if we have already selected one of the aliases
 
local skip;
 
for _, v in ipairs(error_list) do -- spin through the error list to see if we've added this alias
 
if v == alias then
 
skip = true;
 
break; -- has been added so stop looking
 
end
 
end
 
if not skip then -- has not been added so
 
table.insert( error_list, alias ); -- add error alias to the error list
 
end
 
else
 
value = args[alias]; -- not yet selected an alias, so select this one
 
selected = alias;
 
 
end
 
end
 
end
 
end
return value, selected; -- return newly selected alias, or previously selected alias
 
end
 
  
 +
chapter = script_concatenate (chapter, scriptchapter) -- <bdi> tags, lang atribute, categorization, etc; must be done after title is wrapped
  
--[[--------------------------< S E L E C T _ O N E >----------------------------------------------------------
+
if is_set (chapterurl) then
 +
chapter = external_link (chapterurl, chapter, chapter_url_source, access); -- adds bare_url_missing_title error if appropriate
 +
end
  
Chooses one matching parameter from a list of parameters to consider. The list of parameters to consider is just
+
if is_set (transchapter) then
namesFor parameters that may be enumerated, the position of the numerator in the parameter name is identified
+
transchapter = wrap_style ('trans-quoted-title', transchapter);
by the '#' so |author-last1= and |author1-last= are represented as 'author-last#' and 'author#-last'.
+
if is_set (chapter) then
 
+
chapter = chapter ..  ' ' .. transchapter;
Because enumerated parameter |<param>1= is an alias of |<param>= we must test for both possibilities.
+
else -- here when transchapter without chapter or script-chapter
 +
chapter = transchapter; --  
 +
chapter_error = ' ' .. set_error ('trans_missing_title', {'chapter'});
 +
end
 +
end
  
 +
-- if is_set (chapterurl) then
 +
-- chapter = external_link (chapterurl, chapter, chapter_url_source, access); -- adds bare_url_missing_title error if appropriate
 +
-- end
  
Generates an error if more than one match is present.
+
return chapter .. chapter_error;
 +
end
  
]]
 
  
local function select_one( args, aliases_list, error_condition, index )
+
--[[--------------------------< H A S _ I N V I S I B L E _ C H A R S >----------------------------------------
local value = nil; -- the value assigned to the selected parameter
 
local selected = ''; -- the name of the parameter we have chosen
 
local error_list = {};
 
  
if index ~= nil then index = tostring(index); end
+
This function searches a parameter's value for nonprintable or invisible characters.  The search stops at the
 +
first match.
  
for _, alias in ipairs( aliases_list ) do -- for each alias in the aliases list
+
This function will detect the visible replacement character when it is part of the wikisource.
if alias:match ('#') then -- if this alias can be enumerated
 
if '1' == index then -- when index is 1 test for enumerated and non-enumerated aliases
 
value, selected = is_alias_used (args, alias, index, false, value, selected, error_list); -- first test for non-enumerated alias
 
end
 
value, selected = is_alias_used (args, alias, index, true, value, selected, error_list); -- test for enumerated alias
 
else
 
value, selected = is_alias_used (args, alias, index, false, value, selected, error_list); --test for non-enumerated alias
 
end
 
end
 
  
if #error_list > 0 and 'none' ~= error_condition then -- for cases where this code is used outside of extract_names()
+
Detects but ignores nowiki and math stripmarkers.  Also detects other named stripmarkers (gallery, math, pre, ref)
local error_str = "";
+
and identifies them with a slightly different error message. See also coins_cleanup().
for _, k in ipairs( error_list ) do
 
if error_str ~= "" then error_str = error_str .. cfg.messages['parameter-separator'] end
 
error_str = error_str .. wrap_style ('parameter', k);
 
end
 
if #error_list > 1 then
 
error_str = error_str .. cfg.messages['parameter-final-separator'];
 
else
 
error_str = error_str .. cfg.messages['parameter-pair-separator'];
 
end
 
error_str = error_str .. wrap_style ('parameter', selected);
 
table.insert( z.message_tail, { set_error( error_condition, {error_str}, true ) } );
 
end
 
 
return value, selected;
 
end
 
  
 +
Detects but ignores the character pattern that results from the transclusion of {{'}} templates.
  
--[[--------------------------< F O R M A T _ C H A P T E R _ T I T L E >--------------------------------------
+
Output of this function is an error message that identifies the character or the Unicode group, or the stripmarker
 
+
that was detected along with its position (or, for multi-byte characters, the position of its first byte) in the
Format the four chapter parameters: |script-chapter=, |chapter=, |trans-chapter=, and |chapter-url= into a single Chapter meta-
+
parameter value.
parameter (chapter_url_source used for error messages).
 
  
 
]]
 
]]
  
local function format_chapter_title (scriptchapter, chapter, transchapter, chapterurl, chapter_url_source, no_quotes)
+
local function has_invisible_chars (param, v)
local chapter_error = '';
+
local position = ''; -- position of invisible char or starting position of stripmarker
 +
local dummy; -- end of matching string; not used but required to hold end position when a capture is returned
 +
local capture; -- used by stripmarker detection to hold name of the stripmarker
 +
local i=1;
 +
local stripmarker, apostrophe;
 
 
if not is_set (chapter) then
+
capture = string.match (v, '[%w%p ]*'); -- Test for values that are simple ASCII text and bypass other tests if true
chapter = ''; -- to be safe for concatenation
+
if capture == v then -- if same there are no unicode characters
else
+
return;
if false == no_quotes then
 
chapter = kern_quotes (chapter); -- if necessary, separate chapter title's leading and trailing quote marks from Module provided quote marks
 
chapter = wrap_style ('quoted-title', chapter);
 
end
 
 
end
 
end
  
chapter = script_concatenate (chapter, scriptchapter) -- <bdi> tags, lang atribute, categorization, etc; must be done after title is wrapped
+
while cfg.invisible_chars[i] do
 
+
local char=cfg.invisible_chars[i][1] -- the character or group name
if is_set (transchapter) then
+
local pattern=cfg.invisible_chars[i][2] -- the pattern used to find it
transchapter = wrap_style ('trans-quoted-title', transchapter);
+
position, dummy, capture = mw.ustring.find (v, pattern) -- see if the parameter value contains characters that match the pattern
if is_set (chapter) then
+
chapter = chapter .. ' ' .. transchapter;
+
if position and (char == 'zero width joiner') then -- if we found a zero width joiner character
else -- here when transchapter without chapter or script-chapter
+
if mw.ustring.find (v, cfg.indic_script) then -- its ok if one of the indic scripts
chapter = transchapter; --  
+
position = nil; -- unset position
chapter_error = ' ' .. set_error ('trans_missing_title', {'chapter'});
+
end
 
end
 
end
end
+
 +
if position then
 +
if 'nowiki' == capture or 'math' == capture or -- nowiki and math stripmarkers (not an error condition)
 +
('templatestyles' == capture and in_array (param, {'id', 'quote'})) then -- templatestyles stripmarker allowed in these parameters
 +
stripmarker = true; -- set a flag
 +
elseif true == stripmarker and 'delete' == char then -- because stripmakers begin and end with the delete char, assume that we've found one end of a stripmarker
 +
position = nil; -- unset
 +
else
 +
local err_msg;
 +
if capture then
 +
err_msg = capture .. ' ' .. char;
 +
else
 +
err_msg = char .. ' ' .. 'character';
 +
end
  
if is_set (chapterurl) then
+
table.insert( z.message_tail, { set_error( 'invisible_char', {err_msg, wrap_style ('parameter', param), position}, true ) } ); -- add error message
chapter = external_link (chapterurl, chapter, chapter_url_source); -- adds bare_url_missing_title error if appropriate
+
return; -- and done with this parameter
 +
end
 +
end
 +
i=i+1; -- bump our index
 
end
 
end
 
return chapter .. chapter_error;
 
 
end
 
end
  
--[[--------------------------< H A S _ I N V I S I B L E _ C H A R S >----------------------------------------
 
  
This function searches a parameter's value for nonprintable or invisible characters.  The search stops at the
+
--[[--------------------------< A R G U M E N T _ W R A P P E R >----------------------------------------------
first match.
 
  
This function will detect the visible replacement character when it is part of the wikisource.
+
Argument wrapperThis function provides support for argument mapping defined in the configuration file so that
 
+
multiple names can be transparently aliased to single internal variable.
Detects but ignores nowiki and math stripmarkersAlso detects other named stripmarkers (gallery, math, pre, ref)
 
and identifies them with a slightly different error message.  See also coins_cleanup().
 
 
 
Detects but ignores the character pattern that results from the transclusion of {{'}} templates.
 
 
 
Output of this function is an error message that identifies the character or the Unicode group, or the stripmarker
 
that was detected along with its position (or, for multi-byte characters, the position of its first byte) in the
 
parameter value.
 
  
 
]]
 
]]
  
local function has_invisible_chars (param, v)
+
local function argument_wrapper( args )
local position = ''; -- position of invisible char or starting position of stripmarker
+
local origin = {};
local dummy; -- end of matching string; not used but required to hold end position when a capture is returned
+
local capture; -- used by stripmarker detection to hold name of the stripmarker
+
return setmetatable({
local i=1;
+
ORIGIN = function( self, k )
local stripmarker, apostrophe;
+
local dummy = self[k]; --force the variable to be loaded.
 
+
return origin[k];
while cfg.invisible_chars[i] do
+
end
local char=cfg.invisible_chars[i][1] -- the character or group name
+
},
local pattern=cfg.invisible_chars[i][2] -- the pattern used to find it
+
{
position, dummy, capture = mw.ustring.find (v, pattern) -- see if the parameter value contains characters that match the pattern
+
__index = function ( tbl, k )
+
if origin[k] ~= nil then
if position then
+
return nil;
-- if 'nowiki' == capture or 'math' == capture or ('ref' == capture and 'quote' == param) then -- nowiki, math, or quote param and ref stripmarker (not an error condition)
 
if 'nowiki' == capture or 'math' == capture then -- nowiki, math stripmarker (not an error condition)
 
stripmarker = true; -- set a flag
 
elseif true == stripmarker and 'delete' == char then -- because stripmakers begin and end with the delete char, assume that we've found one end of a stripmarker
 
position = nil; -- unset
 
elseif 'apostrophe' == char then -- apostrophe template uses &zwj;, hair space and zero-width space
 
apostrophe = true;
 
elseif true == apostrophe and in_array (char, {'zero width joiner', 'zero width space', 'hair space'}) then
 
position = nil; -- unset
 
else
 
local err_msg;
 
if capture then
 
err_msg = capture .. ' ' .. char;
 
else
 
err_msg = char .. ' ' .. 'character';
 
end
 
 
 
table.insert( z.message_tail, { set_error( 'invisible_char', {err_msg, wrap_style ('parameter', param), position}, true ) } ); -- add error message
 
return; -- and done with this parameter
 
end
 
end
 
i=i+1; -- bump our index
 
end
 
end
 
 
 
 
 
--[[--------------------------< A R G U M E N T _ W R A P P E R >----------------------------------------------
 
 
 
Argument wrapper.  This function provides support for argument mapping defined in the configuration file so that
 
multiple names can be transparently aliased to single internal variable.
 
 
 
]]
 
 
 
local function argument_wrapper( args )
 
local origin = {};
 
 
return setmetatable({
 
ORIGIN = function( self, k )
 
local dummy = self[k]; --force the variable to be loaded.
 
return origin[k];
 
end
 
},
 
{
 
__index = function ( tbl, k )
 
if origin[k] ~= nil then
 
return nil;
 
 
end
 
end
 
 
Line 874: Line 752:
 
end
 
end
  
--[[--------------------------< V A L I D A T E >--------------------------------------------------------------
 
Looks for a parameter's name in the whitelist.
 
  
Parameters in the whitelist can have three values:
+
--[[--------------------------< N O W R A P _ D A T E >--------------------------------------------------------
true - active, supported parameters
 
false - deprecated, supported parameters
 
nil - unsupported parameters
 
 
]]
 
 
 
local function validate( name )
 
local name = tostring( name );
 
local state = whitelist.basic_arguments[ name ];
 
 
-- Normal arguments
 
if true == state then return true; end -- valid actively supported parameter
 
if false == state then
 
deprecated_parameter (name); -- parameter is deprecated but still supported
 
return true;
 
end
 
 
-- Arguments with numbers in them
 
name = name:gsub( "%d+", "#" ); -- replace digit(s) with # (last25 becomes last#
 
state = whitelist.numbered_arguments[ name ];
 
if true == state then return true; end -- valid actively supported parameter
 
if false == state then
 
deprecated_parameter (name); -- parameter is deprecated but still supported
 
return true;
 
end
 
 
return false; -- Not supported because not found or name is set to nil
 
end
 
  
 
+
When date is YYYY-MM-DD format wrap in nowrap span: <span ...>YYYY-MM-DD</span>.  When date is DD MMMM YYYY or is
-- Formats a wiki style internal link
+
MMMM DD, YYYY then wrap in nowrap span: <span ...>DD MMMM</span> YYYY or <span ...>MMMM DD,</span> YYYY
local function internal_link_id(options)
 
return mw.ustring.format( '[[%s|%s]]%s[[%s%s%s|%s]]',
 
options.link, options.label, options.separator or "&nbsp;",
 
options.prefix, options.id, options.suffix or "",
 
mw.text.nowiki(options.id)
 
);
 
end
 
 
 
 
 
--[[--------------------------< N O W R A P _ D A T E >--------------------------------------------------------
 
 
 
When date is YYYY-MM-DD format wrap in nowrap span: <span ...>YYYY-MM-DD</span>.  When date is DD MMMM YYYY or is
 
MMMM DD, YYYY then wrap in nowrap span: <span ...>DD MMMM</span> YYYY or <span ...>MMMM DD,</span> YYYY
 
  
 
DOES NOT yet support MMMM YYYY or any of the date ranges.
 
DOES NOT yet support MMMM YYYY or any of the date ranges.
Line 942: Line 777:
 
end
 
end
  
--[[--------------------------< IS _ V A L I D _ I S X N >-----------------------------------------------------
 
  
ISBN-10 and ISSN validator code calculates checksum across all isbn/issn digits including the check digit. ISBN-13 is checked in check_isbn().
+
--[[--------------------------< S E T _ T I T L E T Y P E >----------------------------------------------------
If the number is valid the result will be 0. Before calling this function, issbn/issn must be checked for length and stripped of dashes,
+
 
spaces and other non-isxn characters.
+
This function sets default title types (equivalent to the citation including |type=<default value>) for those templates that have defaults.
 +
Also handles the special case where it is desirable to omit the title type from the rendered citation (|type=none).
  
 
]]
 
]]
  
local function is_valid_isxn (isxn_str, len)
+
local function set_titletype (cite_class, title_type)
local temp = 0;
+
if is_set(title_type) then
isxn_str = { isxn_str:byte(1, len) }; -- make a table of byte values '0' → 0x30 .. '9'  → 0x39, 'X' → 0x58
+
if "none" == title_type then
len = len+1; -- adjust to be a loop counter
+
title_type = ""; -- if |type=none then type parameter not displayed
for i, v in ipairs( isxn_str ) do -- loop through all of the bytes and calculate the checksum
 
if v == string.byte( "X" ) then -- if checkdigit is X (compares the byte value of 'X' which is 0x58)
 
temp = temp + 10*( len - i ); -- it represents 10 decimal
 
else
 
temp = temp + tonumber( string.char(v) )*(len-i);
 
 
end
 
end
 +
return title_type; -- if |type= has been set to any other value use that value
 
end
 
end
return temp % 11 == 0; -- returns true if calculation result is zero
+
 
 +
return cfg.title_types [cite_class] or ''; -- set template's default title type; else empty string for concatenation
 
end
 
end
  
  
--[[--------------------------< IS _ V A L I D _ I S X N  _ 1 3 >----------------------------------------------
+
--[[--------------------------< H Y P H E N _ T O _ D A S H >--------------------------------------------------
 +
 
 +
Converts a hyphen to a dash under certain conditions.  The hyphen must separate like items; unlike items are
 +
returned unmodified.  These forms are modified:
 +
letter - letter (A - B)
 +
digit - digit (4-5)
 +
digit separator digit - digit separator digit (4.1-4.5 or 4-1-4-5)
 +
letterdigit - letterdigit (A1-A5) (an optional separator between letter and digit is supported – a.1-a.5 or a-1-a-5)
 +
digitletter - digitletter (5a - 5d) (an optional separator between letter and digit is supported – 5.a-5.d or 5-a-5-d)
 +
 
 +
any other forms are returned unmodified.
  
ISBN-13 and ISMN validator code calculates checksum across all 13 isbn/ismn digits including the check digit.
+
str may be a comma- or semicolon-separated list
If the number is valid, the result will be 0. Before calling this function, isbn-13/ismn must be checked for length
 
and stripped of dashes, spaces and other non-isxn-13 characters.
 
  
 
]]
 
]]
  
local function is_valid_isxn_13 (isxn_str)
+
local function hyphen_to_dash( str )
local temp=0;
+
if not is_set (str) then
 +
return str;
 +
end
 
 
isxn_str = { isxn_str:byte(1, 13) }; -- make a table of byte values '0' → 0x30 .. '9'  → 0x39
+
str, count = str:gsub ('^%(%((.+)%)%)$', '%1'); -- remove accept-this-as-written markup when it wraps all of str
for i, v in ipairs( isxn_str ) do
+
if 0 ~= count then -- non-zero when markup removed; zero else
temp = temp + (3 - 2*(i % 2)) * tonumber( string.char(v) ); -- multiply odd index digits by 1, even index digits by 3 and sum; includes check digit
+
return str; -- nothing to do, we're done
 
end
 
end
return temp % 10 == 0; -- sum modulo 10 is zero when isbn-13/ismn is correct
+
end
+
local out = {};
 +
local list = mw.text.split (str, '%s*[,;]%s*'); -- split str at comma or semicolon separators if there are any
  
--[[--------------------------< C H E C K _ I S B N >------------------------------------------------------------
+
for _, item in ipairs (list) do -- for each item in the list
 
+
if mw.ustring.match (item, '^%w*[%.%-]?%w+%s*[%-–—]%s*%w*[%.%-]?%w+$') then -- if a hyphenated range or has endash or emdash separators
Determines whether an ISBN string is valid
+
if item:match ('%a+[%.%-]?%d+%s*%-%s*%a+[%.%-]?%d+') or -- letterdigit hyphen letterdigit (optional separator between letter and digit)
 
+
item:match ('%d+[%.%-]?%a+%s*%-%s*%d+[%.%-]?%a+') or -- digitletter hyphen digitletter (optional separator between digit and letter)
]]
+
item:match ('%d+[%.%-]%d+%s*%-%s*%d+[%.%-]%d+') or -- digit separator digit hyphen digit separator digit
 
+
item:match ('%d+%s*%-%s*%d+') or -- digit hyphen digit
local function check_isbn( isbn_str )
+
item:match ('%a+%s*%-%s*%a+') then -- letter hyphen letter
if nil ~= isbn_str:match("[^%s-0-9X]") then return false; end -- fail if isbn_str contains anything but digits, hyphens, or the uppercase X
+
item = item:gsub ('(%w*[%.%-]?%w+)%s*%-%s*(%w*[%.%-]?%w+)', '%1–%2'); -- replace hyphen, remove extraneous space characters
isbn_str = isbn_str:gsub( "-", "" ):gsub( " ", "" ); -- remove hyphens and spaces
+
else
local len = isbn_str:len();
+
item = mw.ustring.gsub (item, '%s*[–—]%s*', '–'); -- for endash or emdash separated ranges, replace em with en, remove extraneous white space
+
end
if len ~= 10 and len ~= 13 then
+
end
return false;
+
item = item:gsub ('^%(%((.+)%)%)$', '%1'); -- remove the accept-this-as-written markup
 +
table.insert (out, item); -- add the (possibly modified) item to the output table
 
end
 
end
  
if len == 10 then
+
return table.concat (out, ', '); -- concatenate the output table into a comma separated string
if isbn_str:match( "^%d*X?$" ) == nil then return false; end
 
return is_valid_isxn(isbn_str, 10);
 
else
 
local temp = 0;
 
if isbn_str:match( "^97[89]%d*$" ) == nil then return false; end -- isbn13 begins with 978 or 979; ismn begins with 979
 
return is_valid_isxn_13 (isbn_str);
 
end
 
 
end
 
end
  
--[[--------------------------< C H E C K _ I S M N >------------------------------------------------------------
 
  
Determines whether an ISMN string is valid.  Similar to isbn-13, ismn is 13 digits begining 979-0-... and uses the
+
--[[--------------------------< S A F E _ J O I N >------------------------------------------------------------
same check digit calculations.  See http://www.ismn-international.org/download/Web_ISMN_Users_Manual_2008-6.pdf
 
section 2, pages 9–12.
 
  
]]
+
Joins a sequence of strings together while checking for duplicate separation characters.
 
 
local function ismn (id)
 
local handler = cfg.id_handlers['ISMN'];
 
local text;
 
local valid_ismn = true;
 
 
 
id=id:gsub( "[%s-–]", "" ); -- strip spaces, hyphens, and endashes from the ismn
 
 
 
if 13 ~= id:len() or id:match( "^9790%d*$" ) == nil then -- ismn must be 13 digits and begin 9790
 
valid_ismn = false;
 
else
 
valid_ismn=is_valid_isxn_13 (id); -- validate ismn
 
end
 
 
 
-- text = internal_link_id({link = handler.link, label = handler.label, -- use this (or external version) when there is some place to link to
 
-- prefix=handler.prefix,id=id,separator=handler.separator, encode=handler.encode})
 
 
text="[[" .. handler.link .. "|" .. handler.label .. "]]" .. handler.separator .. id; -- because no place to link to yet
 
 
 
if false == valid_ismn then
 
text = text .. ' ' .. set_error( 'bad_ismn' ) -- add an error message if the issn is invalid
 
end
 
 
return text;
 
end
 
 
 
--[[--------------------------< I S S N >----------------------------------------------------------------------
 
 
 
Validate and format an issn.  This code fixes the case where an editor has included an ISSN in the citation but has separated the two groups of four
 
digits with a space.  When that condition occurred, the resulting link looked like this:
 
 
 
|issn=0819 4327 gives: [http://www.worldcat.org/issn/0819 4327 0819 4327]  -- can't have spaces in an external link
 
 
This code now prevents that by inserting a hyphen at the issn midpoint.  It also validates the issn for length and makes sure that the checkdigit agrees
 
with the calculated value.  Incorrect length (8 digits), characters other than 0-9 and X, or checkdigit / calculated value mismatch will all cause a check issn
 
error message.  The issn is always displayed with a hyphen, even if the issn was given as a single group of 8 digits.
 
  
 
]]
 
]]
  
local function issn(id)
+
local function safe_join( tbl, duplicate_char )
local issn_copy = id; -- save a copy of unadulterated issn; use this version for display if issn does not validate
+
local f = {}; -- create a function table appropriate to type of 'dupicate character'
local handler = cfg.id_handlers['ISSN'];
+
if 1 == #duplicate_char then -- for single byte ascii characters use the string library functions
local text;
+
f.gsub=string.gsub
local valid_issn = true;
+
f.match=string.match
 +
f.sub=string.sub
 +
else -- for multi-byte characters use the ustring library functions
 +
f.gsub=mw.ustring.gsub
 +
f.match=mw.ustring.match
 +
f.sub=mw.ustring.sub
 +
end
  
id=id:gsub( "[%s-–]", "" ); -- strip spaces, hyphens, and endashes from the issn
+
local str = ''; -- the output string
 
+
local comp = ''; -- what does 'comp' mean?
if 8 ~= id:len() or nil == id:match( "^%d*X?$" ) then -- validate the issn: 8 digits long, containing only 0-9 or X in the last position
+
local end_chr = '';
valid_issn=false; -- wrong length or improper character
+
local trim;
else
+
for _, value in ipairs( tbl ) do
valid_issn=is_valid_isxn(id, 8); -- validate issn
+
if value == nil then value = ''; end
end
+
 
+
if str == '' then -- if output string is empty
if true == valid_issn then
+
str = value; -- assign value to it (first time through the loop)
id = string.sub( id, 1, 4 ) .. "-" .. string.sub( id, 5 ); -- if valid, display correctly formatted version
+
elseif value ~= '' then
else
+
if value:sub(1,1) == '<' then -- Special case of values enclosed in spans and other markup.
id = issn_copy; -- if not valid, use the show the invalid issn with error message
+
comp = value:gsub( "%b<>", "" ); -- remove html markup (<span>string</span> -> string)
end
+
else
+
comp = value;
text = external_link_id({link = handler.link, label = handler.label,
 
prefix=handler.prefix,id=id,separator=handler.separator, encode=handler.encode})
 
 
if false == valid_issn then
 
text = text .. ' ' .. set_error( 'bad_issn' ) -- add an error message if the issn is invalid
 
end
 
 
return text
 
end
 
 
 
--[[--------------------------< A M A Z O N >------------------------------------------------------------------
 
 
 
Formats a link to Amazon.  Do simple error checking: asin must be mix of 10 numeric or uppercase alpha
 
characters.  If a mix, first character must be uppercase alpha; if all numeric, asins must be 10-digit
 
isbn. If 10-digit isbn, add a maintenance category so a bot or awb script can replace |asin= with |isbn=.
 
Error message if not 10 characters, if not isbn10, if mixed and first character is a digit.
 
 
 
]]
 
 
 
local function amazon(id, domain)
 
local err_cat = ""
 
 
 
if not id:match("^[%d%u][%d%u][%d%u][%d%u][%d%u][%d%u][%d%u][%d%u][%d%u][%d%u]$") then
 
err_cat = ' ' .. set_error ('bad_asin'); -- asin is not a mix of 10 uppercase alpha and numeric characters
 
else
 
if id:match("^%d%d%d%d%d%d%d%d%d[%dX]$") then -- if 10-digit numeric (or 9 digits with terminal X)
 
if check_isbn( id ) then -- see if asin value is isbn10
 
add_maint_cat ('ASIN');
 
elseif not is_set (err_cat) then
 
err_cat = ' ' .. set_error ('bad_asin'); -- asin is not isbn10
 
 
end
 
end
elseif not id:match("^%u[%d%u]+$") then
+
-- typically duplicate_char is sepc
err_cat =  ' ' .. set_error ('bad_asin'); -- asin doesn't begin with uppercase alpha
+
if f.sub(comp, 1,1) == duplicate_char then -- is first character same as duplicate_char? why test first character?
end
+
--  Because individual string segments often (always?) begin with terminal punct for the
end
+
--  preceding segment: 'First element' .. 'sepc next element' .. etc?
if not is_set(domain) then  
+
trim = false;
domain = "com";
+
end_chr = f.sub(str, -1,-1); -- get the last character of the output string
elseif in_array (domain, {'jp', 'uk'}) then -- Japan, United Kingdom
+
-- str = str .. "<HERE(enchr=" .. end_chr.. ")" -- debug stuff?
domain = "co." .. domain;
+
if end_chr == duplicate_char then -- if same as separator
elseif in_array (domain, {'au', 'br', 'mx'}) then -- Australia, Brazil, Mexico
+
str = f.sub(str, 1,-2); -- remove it
domain = "com." .. domain;
+
elseif end_chr == "'" then -- if it might be wikimarkup
 +
if f.sub(str, -3,-1) == duplicate_char .. "''" then -- if last three chars of str are sepc''
 +
str = f.sub(str, 1, -4) .. "''"; -- remove them and add back ''
 +
elseif f.sub(str, -5,-1) == duplicate_char .. "]]''" then -- if last five chars of str are sepc]]''  
 +
trim = true; -- why? why do this and next differently from previous?
 +
elseif f.sub(str, -4,-1) == duplicate_char .. "]''" then -- if last four chars of str are sepc]''  
 +
trim = true; -- same question
 +
end
 +
elseif end_chr == "]" then -- if it might be wikimarkup
 +
if f.sub(str, -3,-1) == duplicate_char .. "]]" then -- if last three chars of str are sepc]] wikilink
 +
trim = true;
 +
elseif f.sub(str, -3,-1) == duplicate_char .. '"]' then -- if last three chars of str are sepc"] quoted external link
 +
trim = true;
 +
elseif  f.sub(str, -2,-1) == duplicate_char .. "]" then -- if last two chars of str are sepc] external link
 +
trim = true;
 +
elseif f.sub(str, -4,-1) == duplicate_char .. "'']" then -- normal case when |url=something & |title=Title.
 +
trim = true;
 +
end
 +
elseif end_chr == " " then -- if last char of output string is a space
 +
if f.sub(str, -2,-1) == duplicate_char .. " " then -- if last two chars of str are <sepc><space>
 +
str = f.sub(str, 1,-3); -- remove them both
 +
end
 +
end
 +
 
 +
if trim then
 +
if value ~= comp then -- value does not equal comp when value contains html markup
 +
local dup2 = duplicate_char;
 +
if f.match(dup2, "%A" ) then dup2 = "%" .. dup2; end -- if duplicate_char not a letter then escape it
 +
 +
value = f.gsub(value, "(%b<>)" .. dup2, "%1", 1 ) -- remove duplicate_char if it follows html markup
 +
else
 +
value = f.sub(value, 2, -1 ); -- remove duplicate_char when it is first character
 +
end
 +
end
 +
end
 +
str = str .. value; --add it to the output string
 +
end
 
end
 
end
local handler = cfg.id_handlers['ASIN'];
+
return str;
return external_link_id({link=handler.link,
 
label=handler.label, prefix=handler.prefix .. domain .. "/dp/",
 
id=id, encode=handler.encode, separator = handler.separator}) .. err_cat;
 
 
end
 
end
  
--[[--------------------------< A R X I V >--------------------------------------------------------------------
 
  
See: http://arxiv.org/help/arxiv_identifier
+
--[[--------------------------< I S _ S U F F I X >------------------------------------------------------------
  
format and error check arXiv identifier.  There are three valid forms of the identifier:
+
returns true is suffix is properly formed Jr, Sr, or ordinal in the range 2–9.  Puncutation not allowed.
the first form, valid only between date codes 9108 and 0703 is:
 
arXiv:<archive>.<class>/<date code><number><version>
 
where:
 
<archive> is a string of alpha characters - may be hyphenated; no other punctuation
 
<class> is a string of alpha characters - may be hyphenated; no other punctuation
 
<date code> is four digits in the form YYMM where YY is the last two digits of the four-digit year and MM is the month number January = 01
 
first digit of YY for this form can only 9 and 0
 
<number> is a three-digit number
 
<version> is a 1 or more digit number preceded with a lowercase v; no spaces (undocumented)
 
 
the second form, valid from April 2007 through December 2014 is:
 
arXiv:<date code>.<number><version>
 
where:
 
<date code> is four digits in the form YYMM where YY is the last two digits of the four-digit year and MM is the month number January = 01
 
<number> is a four-digit number
 
<version> is a 1 or more digit number preceded with a lowercase v; no spaces
 
  
the third form, valid from January 2015 is:
 
arXiv:<date code>.<number><version>
 
where:
 
<date code> and <version> are as defined for 0704-1412
 
<number> is a five-digit number
 
 
]]
 
]]
  
local function arxiv (id, class)
+
local function is_suffix (suffix)
local handler = cfg.id_handlers['ARXIV'];
+
if in_array (suffix, {'Jr', 'Sr', '2nd', '3rd'}) or suffix:match ('^%dth$') then
local year, month, version;
+
return true;
local err_cat = '';
 
local text;
 
 
if id:match("^%a[%a%.%-]+/[90]%d[01]%d%d%d%d$") or id:match("^%a[%a%.%-]+/[90]%d[01]%d%d%d%dv%d+$") then -- test for the 9108-0703 format w/ & w/o version
 
year, month = id:match("^%a[%a%.%-]+/([90]%d)([01]%d)%d%d%d[v%d]*$");
 
year = tonumber(year);
 
month = tonumber(month);
 
if ((not (90 < year or 8 > year)) or (1 > month or 12 < month)) or -- if invalid year or invalid month
 
((91 == year and 7 > month) or (7 == year and 3 < month)) then -- if years ok, are starting and ending months ok?
 
err_cat = ' ' .. set_error( 'bad_arxiv' ); -- set error message
 
end
 
elseif id:match("^%d%d[01]%d%.%d%d%d%d$") or id:match("^%d%d[01]%d%.%d%d%d%dv%d+$") then -- test for the 0704-1412 w/ & w/o version
 
year, month = id:match("^(%d%d)([01]%d)%.%d%d%d%d[v%d]*$");
 
year = tonumber(year);
 
month = tonumber(month);
 
if ((7 > year) or (14 < year) or (1 > month or 12 < month)) or -- is year invalid or is month invalid? (doesn't test for future years)
 
((7 == year) and (4 > month)) then --or -- when year is 07, is month invalid (before April)?
 
err_cat = ' ' .. set_error( 'bad_arxiv' ); -- set error message
 
end
 
elseif id:match("^%d%d[01]%d%.%d%d%d%d%d$") or id:match("^%d%d[01]%d%.%d%d%d%d%dv%d+$") then -- test for the 1501- format w/ & w/o version
 
year, month = id:match("^(%d%d)([01]%d)%.%d%d%d%d%d[v%d]*$");
 
year = tonumber(year);
 
month = tonumber(month);
 
if ((15 > year) or (1 > month or 12 < month)) then -- is year invalid or is month invalid? (doesn't test for future years)
 
err_cat = ' ' .. set_error( 'bad_arxiv' ); -- set error message
 
end
 
else
 
err_cat = ' ' .. set_error( 'bad_arxiv' ); -- arXiv id doesn't match any format
 
 
end
 
end
 +
return false;
 +
end
  
text = external_link_id({link = handler.link, label = handler.label,
 
prefix=handler.prefix,id=id,separator=handler.separator, encode=handler.encode}) .. err_cat;
 
  
if is_set (class) then
+
--[[--------------------------< I S _ G O O D _ V A N C _ N A M E >--------------------------------------------
class = ' [[' .. '//arxiv.org/archive/' .. class .. ' ' .. class .. ']]'; -- external link within square brackets, not wikilink
+
 
else
+
For Vancouver Style, author/editor names are supposed to be rendered in Latin (read ASCII) characters.  When a name
class = ''; -- empty string for concatenation
+
uses characters that contain diacritical marks, those characters are to converted to the corresponding Latin character.
end
+
When a name is written using a non-Latin alphabet or logogram, that name is to be transliterated into Latin characters.
+
These things are not currently possible in this module so are left to the editor to do.
return text .. class;
+
 
end
+
This test allows |first= and |last= names to contain any of the letters defined in the four Unicode Latin character sets
 +
[http://www.unicode.org/charts/PDF/U0000.pdf C0 Controls and Basic Latin] 0041–005A, 0061–007A
 +
[http://www.unicode.org/charts/PDF/U0080.pdf C1 Controls and Latin-1 Supplement] 00C0–00D6, 00D8–00F6, 00F8–00FF
 +
[http://www.unicode.org/charts/PDF/U0100.pdf Latin Extended-A] 0100–017F
 +
[http://www.unicode.org/charts/PDF/U0180.pdf Latin Extended-B] 0180–01BF, 01C4–024F
 +
 
 +
|lastn= also allowed to contain hyphens, spaces, and apostrophes. (http://www.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/books/NBK7271/box/A35029/)
 +
|firstn= also allowed to contain hyphens, spaces, apostrophes, and periods
 +
 
 +
This original test:
 +
if nil == mw.ustring.find (last, "^[A-Za-zÀ-ÖØ-öø-ƿDŽ-ɏ%-%s%']*$") or nil == mw.ustring.find (first, "^[A-Za-zÀ-ÖØ-öø-ƿDŽ-ɏ%-%s%'%.]+[2-6%a]*$") then
 +
was written ouside of the code editor and pasted here because the code editor gets confused between character insertion point and cursor position.
 +
The test has been rewritten to use decimal character escape sequence for the individual bytes of the unicode characters so that it is not necessary
 +
to use an external editor to maintain this code.
  
--[[
+
\195\128-\195\150 – À-Ö (U+00C0–U+00D6 – C0 controls)
lccn normalization (http://www.loc.gov/marc/lccn-namespace.html#normalization)
+
\195\152-\195\182 – Ø-ö (U+00D8-U+00F6 – C0 controls)
1. Remove all blanks.
+
\195\184-\198\191 – ø-ƿ (U+00F8-U+01BF – C0 controls, Latin extended A & B)
2. If there is a forward slash (/) in the string, remove it, and remove all characters to the right of the forward slash.
+
\199\132-\201\143 – DŽ-ɏ (U+01C4-U+024F – Latin extended B)
3. If there is a hyphen in the string:
 
a. Remove it.
 
b. Inspect the substring following (to the right of) the (removed) hyphen. Then (and assuming that steps 1 and 2 have been carried out):
 
1. All these characters should be digits, and there should be six or less. (not done in this function)
 
2. If the length of the substring is less than 6, left-fill the substring with zeroes until the length is six.
 
  
Returns a normalized lccn for lccn() to validate.  There is no error checking (step 3.b.1) performed in this function.
 
 
]]
 
]]
  
local function normalize_lccn (lccn)
+
local function is_good_vanc_name (last, first)
lccn = lccn:gsub ("%s", ""); -- 1. strip whitespace
+
local first, suffix = first:match ('(.-),?%s*([%dJS][%drndth]+)%.?$') or first; -- if first has something that looks like a generational suffix, get it
  
if nil ~= string.find (lccn,'/') then
+
if is_set (suffix) then
lccn = lccn:match ("(.-)/"); -- 2. remove forward slash and all character to the right of it
+
if not is_suffix (suffix) then
 +
add_vanc_error ('suffix');
 +
return false; -- not a name with an appropriate suffix
 +
end
 
end
 
end
 +
if nil == mw.ustring.find (last, "^[A-Za-z\195\128-\195\150\195\152-\195\182\195\184-\198\191\199\132-\201\143%-%s%']*$") or
 +
nil == mw.ustring.find (first, "^[A-Za-z\195\128-\195\150\195\152-\195\182\195\184-\198\191\199\132-\201\143%-%s%'%.]*$") then
 +
add_vanc_error ('non-Latin character');
 +
return false; -- not a string of latin characters; Vancouver requires Romanization
 +
end;
 +
return true;
 +
end
 +
  
local prefix
+
--[[--------------------------< R E D U C E _ T O _ I N I T I A L S >------------------------------------------
local suffix
 
prefix, suffix = lccn:match ("(.+)%-(.+)"); -- 3.a remove hyphen by splitting the string into prefix and suffix
 
  
if nil ~= suffix then -- if there was a hyphen
+
Attempts to convert names to initials in support of |name-list-format=vanc. 
suffix=string.rep("0", 6-string.len (suffix)) .. suffix; -- 3.b.2 left fill the suffix with 0s if suffix length less than 6
+
 
lccn=prefix..suffix; -- reassemble the lccn
+
Names in |firstn= may be separated by spaces or hyphens, or for initials, a period. See http://www.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/books/NBK7271/box/A35062/.
end
 
 
return lccn;
 
end
 
  
--[[
+
Vancouver style requires family rank designations (Jr, II, III, etc) to be rendered as Jr, 2nd, 3rd, etcSee http://www.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/books/NBK7271/box/A35085/.
Format LCCN link and do simple error checkingLCCN is a character string 8-12 characters long. The length of the LCCN dictates the character type of the first 1-3 characters; the
+
This code only accepts and understands generational suffix in the Vancouver format because Roman numerals look like, and can be mistaken for, initials.
rightmost eight are always digits. http://info-uri.info/registry/OAIHandler?verb=GetRecord&metadataPrefix=reg&identifier=info:lccn/
 
  
length = 8 then all digits
+
This function uses ustring functions because firstname initials may be any of the unicode Latin characters accepted by is_good_vanc_name ().
length = 9 then lccn[1] is lower case alpha
 
length = 10 then lccn[1] and lccn[2] are both lower case alpha or both digits
 
length = 11 then lccn[1] is lower case alpha, lccn[2] and lccn[3] are both lower case alpha or both digits
 
length = 12 then lccn[1] and lccn[2] are both lower case alpha
 
  
 
]]
 
]]
  
local function lccn(lccn)
+
local function reduce_to_initials(first)
local handler = cfg.id_handlers['LCCN'];
+
local name, suffix = mw.ustring.match(first, "^(%u+) ([%dJS][%drndth]+)$");
local err_cat =  ''; -- presume that LCCN is valid
 
local id = lccn; -- local copy of the lccn
 
  
id = normalize_lccn (id); -- get canonical form (no whitespace, hyphens, forward slashes)
+
if not name then -- if not initials and a suffix
local len = id:len(); -- get the length of the lccn
+
name = mw.ustring.match(first, "^(%u+)$"); -- is it just intials?
 +
end
  
if 8 == len then
+
if name then -- if first is initials with or without suffix
if id:match("[^%d]") then -- if LCCN has anything but digits (nil if only digits)
+
if 3 > mw.ustring.len (name) then -- if one or two initials
err_cat = ' ' .. set_error( 'bad_lccn' ); -- set an error message
+
if suffix then -- if there is a suffix
end
+
if is_suffix (suffix) then -- is it legitimate?
elseif 9 == len then -- LCCN should be adddddddd
+
return first; -- one or two initials and a valid suffix so nothing to do
if nil == id:match("%l%d%d%d%d%d%d%d%d") then -- does it match our pattern?
+
else
err_cat = ' ' .. set_error( 'bad_lccn' ); -- set an error message
+
add_vanc_error ('suffix'); -- one or two initials with invalid suffix so error message
end
+
return first; -- and return first unmolested
elseif 10 == len then -- LCCN should be aadddddddd or dddddddddd
+
end
if id:match("[^%d]") then -- if LCCN has anything but digits (nil if only digits) ...
+
else
if nil == id:match("^%l%l%d%d%d%d%d%d%d%d") then -- ... see if it matches our pattern
+
return first; -- one or two initials without suffix; nothing to do
err_cat = ' ' .. set_error( 'bad_lccn' ); -- no match, set an error message
 
 
end
 
end
 
end
 
end
elseif 11 == len then -- LCCN should be aaadddddddd or adddddddddd
+
end -- if here then name has 3 or more uppercase letters so treat them as a word
if not (id:match("^%l%l%l%d%d%d%d%d%d%d%d") or id:match("^%l%d%d%d%d%d%d%d%d%d%d")) then -- see if it matches one of our patterns
 
err_cat = ' ' .. set_error( 'bad_lccn' ); -- no match, set an error message
 
end
 
elseif 12 == len then -- LCCN should be aadddddddddd
 
if not id:match("^%l%l%d%d%d%d%d%d%d%d%d%d") then -- see if it matches our pattern
 
err_cat = ' ' .. set_error( 'bad_lccn' ); -- no match, set an error message
 
end
 
else
 
err_cat = ' ' .. set_error( 'bad_lccn' ); -- wrong length, set an error message
 
end
 
  
if not is_set (err_cat) and nil ~= lccn:find ('%s') then
 
err_cat = ' ' .. set_error( 'bad_lccn' ); -- lccn contains a space, set an error message
 
end
 
  
return external_link_id({link = handler.link, label = handler.label,
+
local initials, names = {}, {}; -- tables to hold name parts and initials
prefix=handler.prefix,id=lccn,separator=handler.separator, encode=handler.encode}) .. err_cat;
+
local i = 1; -- counter for number of initials
end
 
  
--[[
+
names = mw.text.split (first, '[%s,]+'); -- split into a table of names and possible suffix
Format PMID and do simple error checking.  PMIDs are sequential numbers beginning at 1 and counting up.  This code checks the PMID to see that it
 
contains only digits and is less than test_limit; the value in local variable test_limit will need to be updated periodically as more PMIDs are issued.
 
]]
 
  
local function pmid(id)
+
while names[i] do -- loop through the table
local test_limit = 30000000; -- update this value as PMIDs approach
+
if 1 < i and names[i]:match ('[%dJS][%drndth]+%.?$') then -- if not the first name, and looks like a suffix (may have trailing dot)
local handler = cfg.id_handlers['PMID'];
+
names[i] = names[i]:gsub ('%.', ''); -- remove terminal dot if present
local err_cat =  ''; -- presume that PMID is valid
+
if is_suffix (names[i]) then -- if a legitimate suffix
+
table.insert (initials, ' ' .. names[i]); -- add a separator space, insert at end of initials table
if id:match("[^%d]") then -- if PMID has anything but digits
+
break; -- and done because suffix must fall at the end of a name
err_cat = ' ' .. set_error( 'bad_pmid' ); -- set an error message
+
end -- no error message if not a suffix; possibly because of Romanization
else -- PMID is only digits
 
local id_num = tonumber(id); -- convert id to a number for range testing
 
if 1 > id_num or test_limit < id_num then -- if PMID is outside test limit boundaries
 
err_cat = ' ' .. set_error( 'bad_pmid' ); -- set an error message
 
 
end
 
end
end
+
if 3 > i then
+
table.insert (initials, mw.ustring.sub(names[i],1,1)); -- insert the intial at end of initials table
return external_link_id({link = handler.link, label = handler.label,
 
prefix=handler.prefix,id=id,separator=handler.separator, encode=handler.encode}) .. err_cat;
 
end
 
 
 
--[[--------------------------< I S _ E M B A R G O E D >------------------------------------------------------
 
 
 
Determines if a PMC identifier's online version is embargoed. Compares the date in |embargo= against today's date.  If embargo date is
 
in the future, returns the content of |embargo=; otherwise, returns and empty string because the embargo has expired or because
 
|embargo= was not set in this cite.
 
 
 
]]
 
 
 
local function is_embargoed (embargo)
 
if is_set (embargo) then
 
local lang = mw.getContentLanguage();
 
local good1, embargo_date, good2, todays_date;
 
good1, embargo_date = pcall( lang.formatDate, lang, 'U', embargo );
 
good2, todays_date = pcall( lang.formatDate, lang, 'U' );
 
 
if good1 and good2 then -- if embargo date and today's date are good dates
 
if tonumber( embargo_date ) >= tonumber( todays_date ) then -- is embargo date is in the future?
 
return embargo; -- still embargoed
 
else
 
add_maint_cat ('embargo')
 
return ''; -- unset because embargo has expired
 
end
 
 
end
 
end
 +
i = i+1; -- bump the counter
 
end
 
end
return ''; -- |embargo= not set return empty string
+
 +
return table.concat(initials) -- Vancouver format does not include spaces.
 
end
 
end
  
--[[--------------------------< P M C >------------------------------------------------------------------------
 
  
Format a PMC, do simple error checking, and check for embargoed articles.
+
--[[--------------------------< L I S T  _ P E O P L E >-------------------------------------------------------
  
The embargo parameter takes a date for a value. If the embargo date is in the future the PMC identifier will not
+
Formats a list of people (e.g. authors / editors)  
be linked to the article. If the embargo date is today or in the past, or if it is empty or omitted, then the
 
PMC identifier is linked to the article through the link at cfg.id_handlers['PMC'].prefix.
 
 
 
PMC embargo date testing is done in function is_embargoed () which is called earlier because when the citation
 
has |pmc=<value> but does not have a |url= then |title= is linked with the PMC link.  Function is_embargoed ()
 
returns the embargo date if the PMC article is still embargoed, otherwise it returns an empty string.
 
 
 
PMCs are sequential numbers beginning at 1 and counting up.  This code checks the PMC to see that it contains only digits and is less
 
than test_limit; the value in local variable test_limit will need to be updated periodically as more PMCs are issued.
 
  
 
]]
 
]]
  
local function pmc(id, embargo)
+
local function list_people(control, people, etal)
local test_limit = 5000000; -- update this value as PMCs approach
+
local sep;
local handler = cfg.id_handlers['PMC'];
+
local namesep;
local err_cat = ''; -- presume that PMC is valid
+
local format = control.format
+
local maximum = control.maximum
local text;
+
local lastauthoramp = control.lastauthoramp;
 +
local text = {}
  
if id:match("[^%d]") then -- if PMC has anything but digits
+
if 'vanc' == format then -- Vancouver-like author/editor name styling?
err_cat = ' ' .. set_error( 'bad_pmc' ); -- set an error message
+
sep = cfg.presentation['sep_nl_vanc']; -- name-list separator between authors is a comma
else -- PMC is only digits
+
namesep = cfg.presentation['sep_name_vanc']; -- last/first separator is a space
local id_num = tonumber(id); -- convert id to a number for range testing
+
else
if 1 > id_num or test_limit < id_num then -- if PMC is outside test limit boundaries
+
sep = cfg.presentation['sep_nl']; -- name-list separator between authors is a semicolon
err_cat = ' ' .. set_error( 'bad_pmc' ); -- set an error message
+
namesep = cfg.presentation['sep_name']; -- last/first separator is <comma><space>
end
 
 
end
 
end
 
 
if is_set (embargo) then -- is PMC is still embargoed?
+
if sep:sub(-1,-1) ~= " " then sep = sep .. " " end
text="[[" .. handler.link .. "|" .. handler.label .. "]]:" .. handler.separator .. id .. err_cat; -- still embargoed so no external link
+
if is_set (maximum) and maximum < 1 then return "", 0; end -- returned 0 is for EditorCount; not used for authors
else
 
text = external_link_id({link = handler.link, label = handler.label, -- no embargo date or embargo has expired, ok to link to article
 
prefix=handler.prefix,id=id,separator=handler.separator, encode=handler.encode}) .. err_cat;
 
end
 
return text;
 
end
 
 
 
-- Formats a DOI and checks for DOI errors.
 
 
 
-- DOI names contain two parts: prefix and suffix separated by a forward slash.
 
--  Prefix: directory indicator '10.' followed by a registrant code
 
--  Suffix: character string of any length chosen by the registrant
 
 
 
-- This function checks a DOI name for: prefix/suffix.  If the doi name contains spaces or endashes,
 
-- or, if it ends with a period or a comma, this function will emit a bad_doi error message.
 
 
 
-- DOI names are case-insensitive and can incorporate any printable Unicode characters so the test for spaces, endash,
 
-- and terminal punctuation may not be technically correct but it appears, that in practice these characters are rarely if ever used in doi names.
 
 
 
local function doi(id, inactive)
 
local cat = ""
 
local handler = cfg.id_handlers['DOI'];
 
 
 
local text;
+
for i,person in ipairs(people) do
if is_set(inactive) then
+
if is_set(person.last) then
local inactive_year = inactive:match("%d%d%d%d") or ''; -- try to get the year portion from the inactive date
+
local mask = person.mask
text = "[[" .. handler.link .. "|" .. handler.label .. "]]:" .. id;
+
local one
if is_set(inactive_year) then
+
local sep_one = sep;
table.insert( z.error_categories, "Pages with DOIs inactive since " .. inactive_year );
+
if is_set (maximum) and i > maximum then
else
+
etal = true;
table.insert( z.error_categories, "Pages with inactive DOIs" ); -- when inactive doesn't contain a recognizable year
+
break;
end
+
elseif (mask ~= nil) then
inactive = " (" .. cfg.messages['inactive'] .. " " .. inactive .. ")"
+
local n = tonumber(mask)
else
+
if (n ~= nil) then
text = external_link_id({link = handler.link, label = handler.label,
+
one = string.rep("&mdash;",n)
prefix=handler.prefix,id=id,separator=handler.separator, encode=handler.encode})
+
else
inactive = ""  
+
one = mask;
end
+
sep_one = " ";
 
+
end
if nil == id:match("^10%.[^%s–]-/[^%s–]-[^%.,]$") then -- doi must begin with '10.', must contain a fwd slash, must not contain spaces or endashes, and must not end with period or comma
+
else
cat = ' ' .. set_error( 'bad_doi' );
+
one = person.last
end
+
local first = person.first
return text .. inactive .. cat
+
if is_set(first) then
end
+
if ( "vanc" == format ) then -- if vancouver format
 
+
one = one:gsub ('%.', ''); -- remove periods from surnames (http://www.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/books/NBK7271/box/A35029/)
 
+
if not person.corporate and is_good_vanc_name (one, first) then -- and name is all Latin characters; corporate authors not tested
--[[--------------------------< O P E N L I B R A R Y >--------------------------------------------------------
+
first = reduce_to_initials(first) -- attempt to convert first name(s) to initials
 
+
end
Formats an OpenLibrary link, and checks for associated errors.
+
end
 
+
one = one .. namesep .. first;
]]
+
end
local function openlibrary(id)
+
if is_set(person.link) and person.link ~= control.page_name then
local code = id:match("^%d+([AMW])$"); -- only digits followed by 'A', 'M', or 'W'
+
one = make_wikilink (person.link, one); -- link author/editor if this page is not the author's/editor's page
local handler = cfg.id_handlers['OL'];
+
end
 
+
end
if ( code == "A" ) then
+
table.insert( text, one )
return external_link_id({link=handler.link, label=handler.label,
+
table.insert( text, sep_one )
prefix=handler.prefix .. 'authors/OL',
+
end
id=id, separator=handler.separator, encode = handler.encode})
 
elseif ( code == "M" ) then
 
return external_link_id({link=handler.link, label=handler.label,
 
prefix=handler.prefix .. 'books/OL',
 
id=id, separator=handler.separator, encode = handler.encode})
 
elseif ( code == "W" ) then
 
return external_link_id({link=handler.link, label=handler.label,
 
prefix=handler.prefix .. 'works/OL',
 
id=id, separator=handler.separator, encode = handler.encode})
 
else
 
return external_link_id({link=handler.link, label=handler.label,
 
prefix=handler.prefix .. 'OL',
 
id=id, separator=handler.separator, encode = handler.encode}) .. ' ' .. set_error( 'bad_ol' );
 
 
end
 
end
end
 
  
 
+
local count = #text / 2; -- (number of names + number of separators) divided by 2
--[[--------------------------< M E S S A G E _ I D >----------------------------------------------------------
+
if count > 0 then
 
+
if count > 1 and is_set(lastauthoramp) and not etal then
Validate and format a usenet message id.  Simple error checking, looks for 'id-left@id-right' not enclosed in
+
text[#text-2] = " & "; -- replace last separator with ampersand text
'<' and/or '>' angle brackets.
+
end
 
+
text[#text] = nil; -- erase the last separator
]]
+
end
 
 
local function message_id (id)
 
local handler = cfg.id_handlers['USENETID'];
 
 
 
text = external_link_id({link = handler.link, label = handler.label,
 
prefix=handler.prefix,id=id,separator=handler.separator, encode=handler.encode})
 
 
if not id:match('^.+@.+$') or not id:match('^[^<].*[^>]$')then -- doesn't have '@' or has one or first or last character is '< or '>'
 
text = text .. ' ' .. set_error( 'bad_message_id' ) -- add an error message if the message id is invalid
 
end  
 
 
 
return text
+
local result = table.concat(text) -- construct list
end
+
if etal and is_set (result) then -- etal may be set by |display-authors=etal but we might not have a last-first list
 
+
result = result .. sep .. ' ' .. cfg.messages['et al']; -- we've go a last-first list and etal so add et al.
--[[--------------------------< S E T _ T I T L E T Y P E >----------------------------------------------------
 
 
 
This function sets default title types (equivalent to the citation including |type=<default value>) for those templates that have defaults.
 
Also handles the special case where it is desirable to omit the title type from the rendered citation (|type=none).
 
 
 
]]
 
 
 
local function set_titletype (cite_class, title_type)
 
if is_set(title_type) then
 
if "none" == title_type then
 
title_type = ""; -- if |type=none then type parameter not displayed
 
end
 
return title_type; -- if |type= has been set to any other value use that value
 
 
end
 
end
 
+
return cfg.title_types [cite_class] or ''; -- set template's default title type; else empty string for concatenation
+
return result, count
 
end
 
end
  
--[[--------------------------< C L E A N _ I S B N >----------------------------------------------------------
 
  
Removes irrelevant text and dashes from ISBN number
+
--[[--------------------------< A N C H O R _ I D >------------------------------------------------------------
Similar to that used for Special:BookSources
 
  
]]
+
Generates a CITEREF anchor ID if we have at least one name or a date.  Otherwise returns an empty string.
  
local function clean_isbn( isbn_str )
+
namelist is one of the contributor-, author-, or editor-name lists chosen in that order.  year is Year or anchor_year.
return isbn_str:gsub( "[^-0-9X]", "" );
 
end
 
 
 
--[[--------------------------< E S C A P E _ L U A _ M A G I C _ C H A R S >----------------------------------
 
  
Returns a string where all of lua's magic characters have been escaped.  This is important because functions like
 
string.gsub() treat their pattern and replace strings as patterns, not literal strings.
 
 
]]
 
]]
local function escape_lua_magic_chars (argument)
+
local function anchor_id (namelist, year)
argument = argument:gsub("%%", "%%%%"); -- replace % with %%
+
local names={}; -- a table for the one to four names and year
argument = argument:gsub("([%^%$%(%)%.%[%]%*%+%-%?])", "%%%1"); -- replace all other lua magic pattern characters
+
for i,v in ipairs (namelist) do -- loop through the list and take up to the first four last names
return argument;
+
names[i] = v.last
 +
if i == 4 then break end -- if four then done
 +
end
 +
table.insert (names, year); -- add the year at the end
 +
local id = table.concat(names); -- concatenate names and year for CITEREF id
 +
if is_set (id) then -- if concatenation is not an empty string
 +
return "CITEREF" .. id; -- add the CITEREF portion
 +
else
 +
return ''; -- return an empty string; no reason to include CITEREF id in this citation
 +
end
 
end
 
end
  
--[[--------------------------< S T R I P _ A P O S T R O P H E _ M A R K U P >--------------------------------
 
  
Strip wiki italic and bold markup from argument so that it doesn't contaminate COinS metadata.
+
--[[--------------------------< N A M E _ H A S _ E T A L >----------------------------------------------------
This function strips common patterns of apostrophe markup.  We presume that editors who have taken the time to
 
markup a title have, as a result, provided valid markup. When they don't, some single apostrophes are left behind.
 
  
]]
+
Evaluates the content of author and editor name parameters for variations on the theme of et al.  If found,
 +
the et al. is removed, a flag is set to true and the function returns the modified name and the flag.
  
local function strip_apostrophe_markup (argument)
+
This function never sets the flag to false but returns it's previous state because it may have been set by
if not is_set (argument) then return argument; end
+
previous passes through this function or by the parameters |display-authors=etal or |display-editors=etal
  
while true do
 
if argument:match ("%'%'%'%'%'") then -- bold italic (5)
 
argument=argument:gsub("%'%'%'%'%'", ""); -- remove all instances of it
 
elseif argument:match ("%'%'%'%'") then -- italic start and end without content (4)
 
argument=argument:gsub("%'%'%'%'", "");
 
elseif argument:match ("%'%'%'") then -- bold (3)
 
argument=argument:gsub("%'%'%'", "");
 
elseif argument:match ("%'%'") then -- italic (2)
 
argument=argument:gsub("%'%'", "");
 
else
 
break;
 
end
 
end
 
return argument; -- done
 
end
 
 
--[[--------------------------< M A K E _ C O I N S _ T I T L E >----------------------------------------------
 
 
Makes a title for COinS from Title and / or ScriptTitle (or any other name-script pairs)
 
 
Apostrophe markup (bold, italics) is stripped from each value so that the COinS metadata isn't correupted with strings
 
of %27%27...
 
 
]]
 
]]
  
local function make_coins_title (title, script)
+
local function name_has_etal (name, etal, nocat)
if is_set (title) then
 
title = strip_apostrophe_markup (title); -- strip any apostrophe markup
 
else
 
title=''; -- if not set, make sure title is an empty string
 
end
 
if is_set (script) then
 
script = script:gsub ('^%l%l%s*:%s*', ''); -- remove language prefix if present (script value may now be empty string)
 
script = strip_apostrophe_markup (script); -- strip any apostrophe markup
 
else
 
script=''; -- if not set, make sure script is an empty string
 
end
 
if is_set (title) and is_set (script) then
 
script = ' ' .. script; -- add a space before we concatenate
 
end
 
return title .. script; -- return the concatenation
 
end
 
  
--[[--------------------------< G E T _ C O I N S _ P A G E S >------------------------------------------------
+
if is_set (name) then -- name can be nil in which case just return
 +
local etal_pattern = "[;,]? *[\"']*%f[%a][Ee][Tt] *[Aa][Ll][%.\"']*$" -- variations on the 'et al' theme
 +
local others_pattern = "[;,]? *%f[%a]and [Oo]thers"; -- and alternate to et al.
 +
 +
if name:match (etal_pattern) then -- variants on et al.
 +
name = name:gsub (etal_pattern, ''); -- if found, remove
 +
etal = true; -- set flag (may have been set previously here or by |display-authors=etal)
 +
if not nocat then -- no categorization for |vauthors=
 +
add_maint_cat ('etal'); -- and add a category if not already added
 +
end
 +
elseif name:match (others_pattern) then -- if not 'et al.', then 'and others'?
 +
name = name:gsub (others_pattern, ''); -- if found, remove
 +
etal = true; -- set flag (may have been set previously here or by |display-authors=etal)
 +
if not nocat then -- no categorization for |vauthors=
 +
add_maint_cat ('etal'); -- and add a category if not already added
 +
end
 +
end
 +
end
 +
return name, etal; --  
 +
end
  
Extract page numbers from external wikilinks in any of the |page=, |pages=, or |at= parameters for use in COinS.
+
 
 +
--[[--------------------------< N A M E _ H A S _ E D _ M A R K U P >------------------------------------------
 +
 
 +
Evaluates the content of author and editor parameters for extranious editor annotations: ed, ed., eds, (Ed.), etc.
 +
These annotation do not belong in author parameters and are redundant in editor parameters.  If found, the function
 +
adds the editor markup maintenance category.
  
 
]]
 
]]
  
local function get_coins_pages (pages)
+
local function name_has_ed_markup (name, list_name)
local pattern;
+
local _, pattern;
if not is_set (pages) then return pages; end -- if no page numbers then we're done
+
local patterns = { -- these patterns match annotations at end of name
+
'%f[%(%[][%(%[]%s*[Ee][Dd][Ss]?%.?%s*[%)%]]?$', -- (ed) or (eds): leading '(', case insensitive 'ed', optional 's', '.' and/or ')'
while true do
+
'[,%.%s]%f[e]eds?%.?$', -- ed or eds: without '('or ')'; case sensitive (ED could be initials Ed could be name)
pattern = pages:match("%[(%w*:?//[^ ]+%s+)[%w%d].*%]"); -- pattern is the opening bracket, the url and following space(s): "[url "
+
'%f[%(%[][%(%[]%s*[Ee][Dd][Ii][Tt][Oo][Rr][Ss]?%.?%s*[%)%]]?$', -- (editor) or (editors): leading '(', case insensitive, optional '.' and/or ')'
if nil == pattern then break; end -- no more urls
+
'[,%.%s]%f[Ee][Ee][Dd][Ii][Tt][Oo][Rr][Ss]?%.?$', -- editor or editors: without '('or ')'; case insensitive
pattern = escape_lua_magic_chars (pattern); -- pattern is not a literal string; escape lua's magic pattern characters
+
pages = pages:gsub(pattern, ""); -- remove as many instances of pattern as possible
+
-- these patterns match annotations at beginning of name
 +
'^eds?[%.,;]', -- ed. or eds.: lower case only, optional 's', requires '.'
 +
'^[%(%[]%s*[Ee][Dd][Ss]?%.?%s*[%)%]]', -- (ed) or (eds): also sqare brackets, case insensitive, optional 's', '.'
 +
'^[%(%[]?%s*[Ee][Dd][Ii][Tt][Oo][Rr][Ss]?%A', -- (editor or (editors: also sq brackets, case insensitive, optional brackets, 's'
 +
'^[%(%[]?%s*[Ee][Dd][Ii][Tt][Ee][Dd]%A', -- (edited: also sq brackets, case insensitive, optional brackets
 +
}
 +
 
 +
if is_set (name) then
 +
for _, pattern in ipairs (patterns) do -- spin through patterns table and
 +
if name:match (pattern) then
 +
add_maint_cat ('extra_text_names', cfg.special_case_translation [list_name]); -- add a maint cat for this template
 +
break;
 +
end
 +
end
 
end
 
end
pages = pages:gsub("[%[%]]", ""); -- remove the brackets
+
return name; -- and done
pages = pages:gsub("–", "-" ); -- replace endashes with hyphens
 
pages = pages:gsub("&%w+;", "-" ); -- and replace html entities (&ndash; etc.) with hyphens; do we need to replace numerical entities like &#32; and the like?
 
return pages;
 
 
end
 
end
  
-- Gets the display text for a wikilink like [[A|B]] or [[B]] gives B
 
local function remove_wiki_link( str )
 
return (str:gsub( "%[%[([^%[%]]*)%]%]", function(l)
 
return l:gsub( "^[^|]*|(.*)$", "%1" ):gsub("^%s*(.-)%s*$", "%1");
 
end));
 
end
 
  
-- Converts a hyphen to a dash
+
--[[--------------------------< N A M E _ H A S _ M U L T _ N A M E S >----------------------------------------
local function hyphen_to_dash( str )
 
if not is_set(str) or str:match( "[%[%]{}<>]" ) ~= nil then
 
return str;
 
end
 
return str:gsub( '-', '–' );
 
end
 
  
--[[--------------------------< S A F E _ J O I N >------------------------------------------------------------
+
Evaluates the content of author and editor (surnames only) parameters for multiple names.  Multiple names are
 +
indicated if there is more than one comma and or semicolon.  If found, the function adds the multiple name
 +
(author or editor) maintenance category.
  
Joins a sequence of strings together while checking for duplicate separation characters.
+
]]
 +
 
 +
local function name_has_mult_names (name, list_name)
 +
local count, _;
 +
if is_set (name) then
 +
_, count = name:gsub ('[;,]', ''); -- count the number of separator-like characters
 +
 +
if 1 < count then -- param could be |author= or |editor= so one separator character is acceptable
 +
add_maint_cat ('mult_names', cfg.special_case_translation [list_name]); -- more than one separator indicates multiple names so add a maint cat for this template
 +
end
 +
end
 +
return name; -- and done
 +
end
 +
 
 +
 
 +
--[[--------------------------< N A M E _ C H E C K S >--------------------------------------------------------
 +
This function calls various name checking functions used to validate the content of the various name-holding
 +
parameters.
  
 
]]
 
]]
  
local function safe_join( tbl, duplicate_char )
+
local function name_checks (last, first, list_name)
--[[
+
if is_set (last) then
Note: we use string functions here, rather than ustring functions.
+
if last:match ('^%(%(.*%)%)$') then -- if wrapped in doubled parentheses, accept as written
+
last = last:match ('^%(%((.*)%)%)$'); -- strip parens
This has considerably faster performance and should work correctly as  
+
else
long as the duplicate_char is strict ASCII. The strings
+
last = name_has_mult_names (last, list_name); -- check for multiple names in the parameter (last only)
in tbl may be ASCII or UTF8.
+
last = name_has_ed_markup (last, list_name); -- check for extraneous 'editor' annotation
]]
+
end
+
end
local str = ''; -- the output string
+
if is_set (first) then
local comp = ''; -- what does 'comp' mean?
+
if first:match ('^%(%(.*%)%)$') then -- if wrapped in doubled parentheses, accept as written
local end_chr = '';
+
first = first:match ('^%(%((.*)%)%)$'); -- strip parens
local trim;
+
else
for _, value in ipairs( tbl ) do
+
first = name_has_ed_markup (first, list_name); -- check for extraneous 'editor' annotation
if value == nil then value = ''; end
+
end
+
end
if str == '' then -- if output string is empty
+
return last, first; -- done
str = value; -- assign value to it (first time through the loop)
+
end
elseif value ~= '' then
+
 
if value:sub(1,1) == '<' then -- Special case of values enclosed in spans and other markup.
+
 
comp = value:gsub( "%b<>", "" ); -- remove html markup (<span>string</span> -> string)
+
--[[--------------------------< E X T R A C T _ N A M E S >----------------------------------------------------
else
+
Gets name list from the input arguments
comp = value;
+
 
end
+
Searches through args in sequential order to find |lastn= and |firstn= parameters (or their aliases), and their matching link and mask parameters.
-- typically duplicate_char is sepc
+
Stops searching when both |lastn= and |firstn= are not found in args after two sequential attempts: found |last1=, |last2=, and |last3= but doesn't
if comp:sub(1,1) == duplicate_char then -- is first charactier same as duplicate_char? why test first character?
+
find |last4= and |last5= then the search is done.
--   Because individual string segments often (always?) begin with terminal punct for th
+
 
--   preceding segment: 'First element' .. 'sepc next element' .. etc?
+
This function emits an error message when there is a |firstn= without a matching |lastn=.  When there are 'holes' in the list of last names, |last1= and |last3=
trim = false;
+
are present but |last2= is missing, an error message is emitted. |lastn= is not required to have a matching |firstn=.
end_chr = str:sub(-1,-1); -- get the last character of the output string
 
-- str = str .. "<HERE(enchr=" .. end_chr.. ")" -- debug stuff?
 
if end_chr == duplicate_char then -- if same as separator
 
str = str:sub(1,-2); -- remove it
 
elseif end_chr == "'" then -- if it might be wikimarkup
 
if str:sub(-3,-1) == duplicate_char .. "''" then -- if last three chars of str are sepc''
 
str = str:sub(1, -4) .. "''"; -- remove them and add back ''
 
elseif str:sub(-5,-1) == duplicate_char .. "]]''" then -- if last five chars of str are sepc]]''
 
trim = true; -- why? why do this and next differently from previous?
 
elseif str:sub(-4,-1) == duplicate_char .. "]''" then -- if last four chars of str are sepc]''
 
trim = true; -- same question
 
end
 
elseif end_chr == "]" then -- if it might be wikimarkup
 
if str:sub(-3,-1) == duplicate_char .. "]]" then -- if last three chars of str are sepc]] wikilink
 
trim = true;
 
elseif str:sub(-2,-1) == duplicate_char .. "]" then -- if last two chars of str are sepc] external link
 
trim = true;
 
elseif str:sub(-4,-1) == duplicate_char .. "'']" then -- normal case when |url=something & |title=Title.
 
trim = true;
 
end
 
elseif end_chr == " " then -- if last char of output string is a space
 
if str:sub(-2,-1) == duplicate_char .. " " then -- if last two chars of str are <sepc><space>
 
str = str:sub(1,-3); -- remove them both
 
end
 
end
 
  
if trim then
+
When an author or editor parameter contains some form of 'et al.', the 'et al.' is stripped from the parameter and a flag (etal) returned
if value ~= comp then -- value does not equal comp when value contains html markup
+
that will cause list_people() to add the static 'et al.' text from Module:Citation/CS1/Configuration. This keeps 'et al.' out of the  
local dup2 = duplicate_char;
+
template's metadata. When this occurs, the page is added to a maintenance category.
if dup2:match( "%A" ) then dup2 = "%" .. dup2; end -- if duplicate_char not a letter then escape it
 
 
value = value:gsub( "(%b<>)" .. dup2, "%1", 1 ) -- remove duplicate_char if it follows html markup
 
else
 
value = value:sub( 2, -1 ); -- remove duplicate_char when it is first character
 
end
 
end
 
end
 
str = str .. value; --add it to the output string
 
end
 
end
 
return str;
 
end  
 
  
--[[--------------------------< I S _ G O O D _ V A N C _ N A M E >--------------------------------------------
+
]]
  
For Vancouver Style, author/editor names are supposed to be rendered in Latin (read ASCII) characters.  When a name
+
local function extract_names(args, list_name)
uses characters that contain diacritical marks, those characters are to converted to the corresponding Latin character.
+
local names = {}; -- table of names
When a name is written using a non-Latin alphabet or logogram, that name is to be transliterated into Latin characters.
+
local last; -- individual name components
These things are not currently possible in this module so are left to the editor to do.
+
local first;
 +
local link;
 +
local mask;
 +
local i = 1; -- loop counter/indexer
 +
local n = 1; -- output table indexer
 +
local count = 0; -- used to count the number of times we haven't found a |last= (or alias for authors, |editor-last or alias for editors)
 +
local etal=false; -- return value set to true when we find some form of et al. in an author parameter
  
This test allows |first= and |last= names to contain any of the letters defined in the four Unicode Latin character sets
+
local err_msg_list_name = list_name:match ("(%w+)List") .. 's list'; -- modify AuthorList or EditorList for use in error messages if necessary
[http://www.unicode.org/charts/PDF/U0000.pdf C0 Controls and Basic Latin] 0041–005A, 0061–007A
+
while true do
[http://www.unicode.org/charts/PDF/U0080.pdf C1 Controls and Latin-1 Supplement] 00C0–00D6, 00D8–00F6, 00F8–00FF
+
last = select_one( args, cfg.aliases[list_name .. '-Last'], 'redundant_parameters', i ); -- search through args for name components beginning at 1
[http://www.unicode.org/charts/PDF/U0100.pdf Latin Extended-A] 0100–017F
+
first = select_one( args, cfg.aliases[list_name .. '-First'], 'redundant_parameters', i );
[http://www.unicode.org/charts/PDF/U0180.pdf Latin Extended-B] 0180–01BF, 01C4–024F
+
link = select_one( args, cfg.aliases[list_name .. '-Link'], 'redundant_parameters', i );
 +
mask = select_one( args, cfg.aliases[list_name .. '-Mask'], 'redundant_parameters', i );
  
|lastn= also allowed to contain hyphens, spaces, and apostrophes. (http://www.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/books/NBK7271/box/A35029/)
+
last, etal = name_has_etal (last, etal, false); -- find and remove variations on et al.
|firstn= also allowed to contain hyphens, spaces, apostrophes, and periods
+
first, etal = name_has_etal (first, etal, false); -- find and remove variations on et al.
 +
last, first= name_checks (last, first, list_name); -- multiple names, extraneous annotation, etc checks
 +
 +
if first and not last then -- if there is a firstn without a matching lastn
 +
table.insert( z.message_tail, { set_error( 'first_missing_last', {err_msg_list_name, i}, true ) } ); -- add this error message
 +
elseif not first and not last then -- if both firstn and lastn aren't found, are we done?
 +
count = count + 1; -- number of times we haven't found last and first
 +
if 2 <= count then -- two missing names and we give up
 +
break; -- normal exit or there is a two-name hole in the list; can't tell which
 +
end
 +
else -- we have last with or without a first
 +
link_title_ok (link, list_name:match ("(%w+)List"):lower() .. '-link' .. i, last, list_name:match ("(%w+)List"):lower() .. '-last' .. i); -- check for improper wikimarkup
  
At the time of this writing, I had to write the 'if nil == mw.ustring.find ...' test ouside of the code editor and paste it here
+
names[n] = {last = last, first = first, link = link, mask = mask, corporate=false}; -- add this name to our names list (corporate for |vauthors= only)
because the code editor gets confused between character insertion point and cursor position.
+
n = n + 1; -- point to next location in the names table
 +
if 1 == count then -- if the previous name was missing
 +
table.insert( z.message_tail, { set_error( 'missing_name', {err_msg_list_name, i-1}, true ) } ); -- add this error message
 +
end
 +
count = 0; -- reset the counter, we're looking for two consecutive missing names
 +
end
 +
i = i + 1; -- point to next args location
 +
end
 +
 +
return names, etal; -- all done, return our list of names
 +
end
  
]]
 
  
local function is_good_vanc_name (last, first)
+
--[[--------------------------< G E T _ I S O 6 3 9 _ C O D E >------------------------------------------------
if nil == mw.ustring.find (last, "^[A-Za--ÖØ-öø-ƿDŽ-ɏ%-%s%']*$") or nil == mw.ustring.find (first, "^[A-Za--ÖØ-öø-ƿDŽ-ɏ%-%s%'%.]*$") then
 
add_vanc_error ();
 
return false; -- not a string of latin characters; Vancouver required Romanization
 
end;
 
return true;
 
end
 
  
--[[--------------------------< R E D U C E _ T O _ I N I T I A L S >------------------------------------------
+
Validates language names provided in |language= parameter if not an ISO639-1 or 639-2 code.
  
Attempts to convert names to initials in support of |name-list-format=vanc.   
+
Returns the language name and associated two- or three-character code.  Because case of the source may be incorrect
 +
or different from the case that WikiMedia uses, the name comparisons are done in lower case and when a match is
 +
found, the Wikimedia version (assumed to be correct) is returned along with the codeWhen there is no match, we
 +
return the original language name string.
  
Names in |firstn= may be separated by spaces or hyphens, or for initials, a period. See http://www.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/books/NBK7271/box/A35062/.
+
mw.language.fetchLanguageNames(<local wiki language>, 'all') returns a list of languages that in some cases may include
 +
extensions. For example, code 'cbk-zam' and its associated name 'Chavacano de Zamboanga' (MediaWiki does not support
 +
code 'cbk' or name 'Chavacano'.  Most (all?) of these languages are not used a 'language' codes per se, rather they
 +
are used as sub-domain names: cbk-zam.wikipedia.org. These names can be found (for the time being) at
 +
https://phabricator.wikimedia.org/diffusion/ECLD/browse/master/LocalNames/LocalNamesEn.php
  
Vancouver style requires family rank designations (Jr, II, III, etc) to be rendered as Jr, 2nd, 3rd, etcThis form is not
+
Names but that are included in the list will be found if that name is provided in the |language= parameter.  For example,
currently supported by this code so correctly formed names like Smith JL 2nd are converted to Smith J2. See http://www.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/books/NBK7271/box/A35085/.
+
if |language=Chavacano de Zamboanga, that name will be found with the associated code 'cbk-zam'When names are found
 +
and the associated code is not two or three characters, this function returns only the Wikimedia language name.
  
This function uses ustring functions because firstname initials may be any of the unicode Latin characters accepted by is_good_vanc_name ().
+
Adapted from code taken from Module:Check ISO 639-1.
  
 
]]
 
]]
  
local function reduce_to_initials(first)
+
local function get_iso639_code (lang, this_wiki_code)
if mw.ustring.match(first, "^%u%u$") then return first end; -- when first contains just two upper-case letters, nothing to do
+
if cfg.lang_name_remap[lang:lower()] then -- if there is a remapped name (because MediaWiki uses something that we don't think is correct)
local initials = {}
+
return cfg.lang_name_remap[lang:lower()][1], cfg.lang_name_remap[lang:lower()][2]; -- for this language 'name', return a possibly new name and appropriate code
local i = 0; -- counter for number of initials
 
for word in mw.ustring.gmatch(first, "[^%s%.%-]+") do -- names separated by spaces, hyphens, or periods
 
table.insert(initials, mw.ustring.sub(word,1,1)) -- Vancouver format does not include full stops.
 
i = i + 1; -- bump the counter
 
if 2 <= i then break; end -- only two initials allowed in Vancouver system; if 2, quit
 
 
end
 
end
return table.concat(initials) -- Vancouver format does not include spaces.
+
 
 +
local languages = mw.language.fetchLanguageNames(this_wiki_code, 'all') -- get a list of language names known to Wikimedia
 +
-- ('all' is required for North Ndebele, South Ndebele, and Ojibwa)
 +
local langlc = mw.ustring.lower(lang); -- lower case version for comparisons
 +
 +
for code, name in pairs(languages) do -- scan the list to see if we can find our language
 +
if langlc == mw.ustring.lower(name) then
 +
if 2 ~= code:len() and 3 ~= code:len() then -- two- or three-character codes only; extensions not supported
 +
return name; -- so return the name but not the code
 +
end
 +
return name, code; -- found it, return name to ensure proper capitalization and the the code
 +
end
 +
end
 +
return lang; -- not valid language; return language in original case and nil for the code
 
end
 
end
  
--[[--------------------------< L I S T  _ P E O P L E >-------------------------------------------------------
 
  
Formats a list of people (e.g. authors / editors)
+
--[[--------------------------< L A N G U A G E _ P A R A M E T E R >------------------------------------------
 +
 
 +
Gets language name from a provided two- or three-character ISO 639 code.  If a code is recognized by MediaWiki,
 +
use the returned name; if not, then use the value that was provided with the language parameter.
 +
 
 +
When |language= contains a recognized language (either code or name), the page is assigned to the category for
 +
that code: Category:Norwegian-language sources (no).  For valid three-character code languages, the page is assigned
 +
to the single category for '639-2' codes: Category:CS1 ISO 639-2 language sources.
 +
 
 +
Languages that are the same as the local wiki are not categorized.  MediaWiki does not recognize three-character
 +
equivalents of two-character codes: code 'ar' is recognized bit code 'ara' is not.
 +
 
 +
This function supports multiple languages in the form |language=nb, French, th where the language names or codes are
 +
separated from each other by commas.
  
 
]]
 
]]
  
local function list_people(control, people, etal, list_name) -- TODO: why is list_name here?  not used in this function
+
local function language_parameter (lang)
local sep;
+
local code; -- the two- or three-character language code
local namesep;
+
local name; -- the language name
local format = control.format
+
local language_list = {}; -- table of language names to be rendered
local maximum = control.maximum
+
local names_table = {}; -- table made from the value assigned to |language=
local lastauthoramp = control.lastauthoramp;
+
 
local text = {}
+
local this_wiki = mw.getContentLanguage(); -- get a language object for this wiki
 +
local this_wiki_code = this_wiki:getCode() -- get this wiki's language code
 +
local this_wiki_name = mw.language.fetchLanguageName(this_wiki_code, this_wiki_code); -- get this wiki's language name
 +
 
 +
names_table = mw.text.split (lang, '%s*,%s*'); -- names should be a comma separated list
  
if 'vanc' == format then -- Vancouver-like author/editor name styling?
+
for _, lang in ipairs (names_table) do -- reuse lang
sep = ','; -- name-list separator between authors is a comma
+
 
namesep = ' '; -- last/first separator is a space
+
if lang:match ('^%a%a%-') then -- strip ietf language tags from code; TODO: is there a need to support 3-char with tag?
else
+
lang = lang:match ('(%a%a)%-') -- keep only 639-1 code portion to lang; TODO: do something with 3166 alpha 2 country code?
sep = ';' -- name-list separator between authors is a semicolon
+
end
namesep = ', ' -- last/first separator is <comma><space>
+
if 2 == lang:len() or 3 == lang:len() then -- if two-or three-character code
end
+
name = mw.language.fetchLanguageName( lang:lower(), this_wiki_code); -- get language name if |language= is a proper code
 +
if not is_set (name) then
 +
name = cfg.lang_code_remap[lang]; -- not supported by MediaWiki; is it in remap?
 +
end
 +
end
 
 
if sep:sub(-1,-1) ~= " " then sep = sep .. " " end
+
if is_set (name) then -- if |language= specified a valid code
if is_set (maximum) and maximum < 1 then return "", 0; end -- returned 0 is for EditorCount; not used for authors
+
code = lang:lower(); -- save it
 +
else
 +
name, code = get_iso639_code (lang, this_wiki_code); -- attempt to get code from name (assign name here so that we are sure of proper capitalization)
 +
end
 
 
for i,person in ipairs(people) do
+
if is_set (code) then -- only 2- or 3-character codes
if is_set(person.last) then
+
name = cfg.lang_code_remap[code] or name; -- override wikimedia when they misuse language codes/names
local mask = person.mask
+
 
local one
+
if this_wiki_code ~= code then -- when the language is not the same as this wiki's language
local sep_one = sep;
+
if 2 == code:len() then -- and is a two-character code
if is_set (maximum) and i > maximum then
+
add_prop_cat ('foreign_lang_source' .. code, {name, code}) -- categorize it
etal = true;
+
else -- or is a recognized language (but has a three-character code)
break;
+
add_prop_cat ('foreign_lang_source_2' .. code, {code}) -- categorize it differently TODO: support mutliple three-character code categories per cs1|2 template
elseif (mask ~= nil) then
 
local n = tonumber(mask)
 
if (n ~= nil) then
 
one = string.rep("&mdash;",n)
 
else
 
one = mask;
 
sep_one = " ";
 
 
end
 
end
else
+
end
one = person.last
+
else
local first = person.first
+
add_maint_cat ('unknown_lang'); -- add maint category if not already added
if is_set(first) then
+
end
if ( "vanc" == format ) then -- if vancouver format
+
one = one:gsub ('%.', ''); -- remove periods from surnames (http://www.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/books/NBK7271/box/A35029/)
+
table.insert (language_list, name);
if not person.corporate and is_good_vanc_name (one, first) then -- and name is all Latin characters; corporate authors not tested
+
name = ''; -- so we can reuse it
first = reduce_to_initials(first) -- attempt to convert first name(s) to initials
 
end
 
end
 
one = one .. namesep .. first
 
end
 
if is_set(person.link) and person.link ~= control.page_name then
 
one = "[[" .. person.link .. "|" .. one .. "]]" -- link author/editor if this page is not the author's/editor's page
 
end
 
end
 
table.insert( text, one )
 
table.insert( text, sep_one )
 
end
 
 
end
 
end
 
+
local count = #text / 2; -- (number of names + number of separators) divided by 2
+
code = #language_list -- reuse code as number of languages in the list
if count > 0 then  
+
if 2 >= code then
if count > 1 and is_set(lastauthoramp) and not etal then
+
name = table.concat (language_list, ' and ') -- insert '<space>and<space>' between two language names
text[#text-2] = " & "; -- replace last separator with ampersand text
+
elseif 2 < code then
end
+
language_list[code] = 'and ' .. language_list[code]; -- prepend last name with 'and<space>'
text[#text] = nil; -- erase the last separator
+
name = table.concat (language_list, ', ') -- and concatenate with '<comma><space>' separators
 
end
 
end
+
if this_wiki_name == name then
local result = table.concat(text) -- construct list
+
return ''; -- if one language and that language is this wiki's return an empty string (no annotation)
if etal and is_set (result) then -- etal may be set by |display-authors=etal but we might not have a last-first list
 
result = result .. sep .. ' ' .. cfg.messages['et al']; -- we've go a last-first list and etal so add et al.
 
 
end
 
end
+
return (" " .. wrap_msg ('language', name)); -- otherwise wrap with '(in ...)'
return result, count
+
--[[ TODO: should only return blank or name rather than full list
 +
so we can clean up the bunched parenthetical elements Language, Type, Format
 +
]]
 
end
 
end
  
--[[--------------------------< A N C H O R _ I D >------------------------------------------------------------
 
  
Generates a CITEREF anchor ID if we have at least one name or a date.  Otherwise returns an empty string.
+
--[[--------------------------< S E T _ C S 1 _ S T Y L E >----------------------------------------------------
  
namelist is one of the contributor-, author-, or editor-name lists chosen in that order. year is Year or anchor_year.
+
Set style settings for CS1 citation templates. Returns separator and postscript settings
 +
At en.wiki, for cs1:
 +
ps gets: '.'
 +
sep gets: '.'
  
 
]]
 
]]
local function anchor_id (namelist, year)
+
 
local names={}; -- a table for the one to four names and year
+
local function set_cs1_style (ps)
for i,v in ipairs (namelist) do -- loop through the list and take up to the first four last names
+
if not is_set (ps) then -- unless explicitely set to something
names[i] = v.last
+
ps = cfg.presentation['ps_cs1']; -- terminate the rendered citation
if i == 4 then break end -- if four then done
 
end
 
table.insert (names, year); -- add the year at the end
 
local id = table.concat(names); -- concatenate names and year for CITEREF id
 
if is_set (id) then -- if concatenation is not an empty string
 
return "CITEREF" .. id; -- add the CITEREF portion
 
else
 
return ''; -- return an empty string; no reason to include CITEREF id in this citation
 
 
end
 
end
 +
return cfg.presentation['sep_cs1'], ps; -- element separator
 
end
 
end
  
  
--[[--------------------------< N A M E _ H A S _ E T A L >----------------------------------------------------
+
--[[--------------------------< S E T _ C S 2 _ S T Y L E >----------------------------------------------------
  
Evaluates the content of author and editor name parameters for variations on the theme of et al. If found,
+
Set style settings for CS2 citation templates. Returns separator, postscript, ref settings
the et al. is removed, a flag is set to true and the function returns the modified name and the flag.
+
At en.wiki, for cs2:
 
+
ps gets: '' (empty string - no terminal punctuation)
This function never sets the flag to false but returns it's previous state because it may have been set by
+
sep gets: ','
previous passes through this function or by the parameters |display-authors=etal or |display-editors=etal
 
  
 
]]
 
]]
  
local function name_has_etal (name, etal, nocat)
+
local function set_cs2_style (ps, ref)
 
+
if not is_set (ps) then -- if |postscript= has not been set, set cs2 default
if is_set (name) then -- name can be nil in which case just return
+
ps = cfg.presentation['ps_cs2']; -- terminate the rendered citation
local etal_pattern = "[;,]? *[\"']*%f[%a][Ee][Tt] *[Aa][Ll][%.\"']*$" -- variations on the 'et al' theme
+
end
local others_pattern = "[;,]? *%f[%a]and [Oo]thers"; -- and alternate to et al.
+
if not is_set (ref) then -- if |ref= is not set
+
ref = "harv"; -- set default |ref=harv
if name:match (etal_pattern) then -- variants on et al.
 
name = name:gsub (etal_pattern, ''); -- if found, remove
 
etal = true; -- set flag (may have been set previously here or by |display-authors=etal)
 
if not nocat then -- no categorization for |vauthors=
 
add_maint_cat ('etal'); -- and add a category if not already added
 
end
 
elseif name:match (others_pattern) then -- if not 'et al.', then 'and others'?
 
name = name:gsub (others_pattern, ''); -- if found, remove
 
etal = true; -- set flag (may have been set previously here or by |display-authors=etal)
 
if not nocat then -- no categorization for |vauthors=
 
add_maint_cat ('etal'); -- and add a category if not already added
 
end
 
end
 
 
end
 
end
return name, etal; --  
+
return cfg.presentation['sep_cs2'], ps, ref; -- element separator
 
end
 
end
  
--[[--------------------------< E X T R A C T _ N A M E S >----------------------------------------------------
 
Gets name list from the input arguments
 
  
Searches through args in sequential order to find |lastn= and |firstn= parameters (or their aliases), and their matching link and mask parameters.
+
--[[--------------------------< G E T _ S E T T I N G S _ F R O M _ C I T E _ C L A S S >----------------------
Stops searching when both |lastn= and |firstn= are not found in args after two sequential attempts: found |last1=, |last2=, and |last3= but doesn't
 
find |last4= and |last5= then the search is done.
 
  
This function emits an error message when there is a |firstn= without a matching |lastn=.  When there are 'holes' in the list of last names, |last1= and |last3=
+
When |mode= is not set or when its value is invalid, use config.CitationClass and parameter values to establish
are present but |last2= is missing, an error message is emitted. |lastn= is not required to have a matching |firstn=.
+
rendered style.
 
 
When an author or editor parameter contains some form of 'et al.', the 'et al.' is stripped from the parameter and a flag (etal) returned
 
that will cause list_people() to add the static 'et al.' text from Module:Citation/CS1/Configuration.  This keeps 'et al.' out of the
 
template's metadata.  When this occurs, the page is added to a maintenance category.
 
  
 
]]
 
]]
  
local function extract_names(args, list_name)
+
local function get_settings_from_cite_class (ps, ref, cite_class)
local names = {}; -- table of names
+
local sep;
local last; -- individual name components
+
if (cite_class == "citation") then -- for citation templates (CS2)
local first;
+
sep, ps, ref = set_cs2_style (ps, ref);
local link;
+
else -- not a citation template so CS1
local mask;
+
sep, ps = set_cs1_style (ps);
local i = 1; -- loop counter/indexer
+
end
local n = 1; -- output table indexer
+
 
local count = 0; -- used to count the number of times we haven't found a |last= (or alias for authors, |editor-last or alias for editors)
+
return sep, ps, ref -- return them all
local etal=false; -- return value set to true when we find some form of et al. in an author parameter
+
end
 +
 
 +
 
 +
--[[--------------------------< S E T _ S T Y L E >------------------------------------------------------------
  
local err_msg_list_name = list_name:match ("(%w+)List") .. 's list'; -- modify AuthorList or EditorList for use in error messages if necessary
+
Establish basic style settings to be used when rendering the citation.  Uses |mode= if set and valid or uses
while true do
+
config.CitationClass from the template's #invoke: to establish style.
last = select_one( args, cfg.aliases[list_name .. '-Last'], 'redundant_parameters', i ); -- search through args for name components beginning at 1
 
first = select_one( args, cfg.aliases[list_name .. '-First'], 'redundant_parameters', i );
 
link = select_one( args, cfg.aliases[list_name .. '-Link'], 'redundant_parameters', i );
 
mask = select_one( args, cfg.aliases[list_name .. '-Mask'], 'redundant_parameters', i );
 
  
last, etal = name_has_etal (last, etal, false); -- find and remove variations on et al.
+
]]
first, etal = name_has_etal (first, etal, false); -- find and remove variations on et al.
 
  
if first and not last then -- if there is a firstn without a matching lastn
+
local function set_style (mode, ps, ref, cite_class)
table.insert( z.message_tail, { set_error( 'first_missing_last', {err_msg_list_name, i}, true ) } ); -- add this error message
+
local sep;
elseif not first and not last then -- if both firstn and lastn aren't found, are we done?
+
if 'cs2' == mode then -- if this template is to be rendered in CS2 (citation) style
count = count + 1; -- number of times we haven't found last and first
+
sep, ps, ref = set_cs2_style (ps, ref);
if 2 <= count then -- two missing names and we give up
+
elseif 'cs1' == mode then -- if this template is to be rendered in CS1 (cite xxx) style
break; -- normal exit or there is a two-name hole in the list; can't tell which
+
sep, ps = set_cs1_style (ps);
end
+
else -- anything but cs1 or cs2
else -- we have last with or without a first
+
sep, ps, ref = get_settings_from_cite_class (ps, ref, cite_class); -- get settings based on the template's CitationClass
if is_set (link) and false == link_param_ok (link) then -- do this test here in case link is missing last
+
end
table.insert( z.message_tail, { set_error( 'bad_paramlink', list_name:match ("(%w+)List"):lower() .. '-link' .. i )}); -- url or wikilink in author link;
+
if 'none' == ps:lower() then -- if assigned value is 'none' then
end
+
ps = ''; -- set to empty string
names[n] = {last = last, first = first, link = link, mask = mask, corporate=false}; -- add this name to our names list (corporate for |vauthors= only)
 
n = n + 1; -- point to next location in the names table
 
if 1 == count then -- if the previous name was missing
 
table.insert( z.message_tail, { set_error( 'missing_name', {err_msg_list_name, i-1}, true ) } ); -- add this error message
 
end
 
count = 0; -- reset the counter, we're looking for two consecutive missing names
 
end
 
i = i + 1; -- point to next args location
 
 
end
 
end
 
 
return names, etal; -- all done, return our list of names
+
return sep, ps, ref
 
end
 
end
  
--[[--------------------------< B U I L D _ I D _ L I S T >--------------------------------------------------------
 
  
Populates ID table from arguments using configuration settings. Loops through cfg.id_handlers and searches args for
+
--[=[-------------------------< I S _ P D F >------------------------------------------------------------------
any of the parameters listed in each cfg.id_handlers['...'].parameters.  If found, adds the parameter and value to
 
the identifier list.  Emits redundant error message is more than one alias exists in args
 
  
]]
+
Determines if a url has the file extension that is one of the pdf file extensions used by [[MediaWiki:Common.css]] when
 +
applying the pdf icon to external links.
 +
 
 +
returns true if file extension is one of the recognized extensions, else false
 +
 
 +
]=]
  
local function extract_ids( args )
+
local function is_pdf (url)
local id_list = {}; -- list of identifiers found in args
+
return url:match ('%.pdf$') or url:match ('%.PDF$') or url:match ('%.pdf[%?#]') or url:match ('%.PDF[%?#]');
for k, v in pairs( cfg.id_handlers ) do -- k is uc identifier name as index to cfg.id_handlers; e.g. cfg.id_handlers['ISBN'], v is a table
 
v = select_one( args, v.parameters, 'redundant_parameters' ); -- v.parameters is a table of aliases for k; here we pick one from args if present
 
if is_set(v) then id_list[k] = v; end -- if found in args, add identifier to our list
 
end
 
return id_list;
 
 
end
 
end
  
--[[--------------------------< B U I L D _ I D _ L I S T >--------------------------------------------------------
 
  
Takes a table of IDs created by extract_ids() and turns it into a table of formatted ID outputs.
+
--[[--------------------------< S T Y L E _ F O R M A T >------------------------------------------------------
  
inputs:
+
Applies css style to |format=, |chapter-format=, etc.  Also emits an error message if the format parameter does
id_list – table of identifiers built by extract_ids()
+
not have a matching url parameter.  If the format parameter is not set and the url contains a file extension that
options – table of various template parameter values used to modify some manually handled identifiers
+
is recognized as a pdf document by MediaWiki's commons.css, this code will set the format parameter to (PDF) with
 +
the appropriate styling.
  
 
]]
 
]]
  
local function build_id_list( id_list, options )
+
local function style_format (format, url, fmt_param, url_param)
local new_list, handler = {};
+
if is_set (format) then
 
+
format = wrap_style ('format', format); -- add leading space, parentheses, resize
function fallback(k) return { __index = function(t,i) return cfg.id_handlers[k][i] end } end;
+
if not is_set (url) then
+
format = format .. set_error( 'format_missing_url', {fmt_param, url_param} ); -- add an error message
for k, v in pairs( id_list ) do -- k is uc identifier name as index to cfg.id_handlers; e.g. cfg.id_handlers['ISBN'], v is a table
 
-- fallback to read-only cfg
 
handler = setmetatable( { ['id'] = v }, fallback(k) );
 
 
if handler.mode == 'external' then
 
table.insert( new_list, {handler.label, external_link_id( handler ) } );
 
elseif handler.mode == 'internal' then
 
table.insert( new_list, {handler.label, internal_link_id( handler ) } );
 
elseif handler.mode ~= 'manual' then
 
error( cfg.messages['unknown_ID_mode'] );
 
elseif k == 'DOI' then
 
table.insert( new_list, {handler.label, doi( v, options.DoiBroken ) } );
 
elseif k == 'ARXIV' then
 
table.insert( new_list, {handler.label, arxiv( v, options.Class ) } );  
 
elseif k == 'ASIN' then
 
table.insert( new_list, {handler.label, amazon( v, options.ASINTLD ) } );
 
elseif k == 'LCCN' then
 
table.insert( new_list, {handler.label, lccn( v ) } );
 
elseif k == 'OL' or k == 'OLA' then
 
table.insert( new_list, {handler.label, openlibrary( v ) } );
 
elseif k == 'PMC' then
 
table.insert( new_list, {handler.label, pmc( v, options.Embargo ) } );
 
elseif k == 'PMID' then
 
table.insert( new_list, {handler.label, pmid( v ) } );
 
elseif k == 'ISMN' then
 
table.insert( new_list, {handler.label, ismn( v ) } );
 
elseif k == 'ISSN' then
 
table.insert( new_list, {handler.label, issn( v ) } );
 
elseif k == 'ISBN' then
 
local ISBN = internal_link_id( handler );
 
if not check_isbn( v ) and not is_set(options.IgnoreISBN) then
 
ISBN = ISBN .. set_error( 'bad_isbn', {}, false, " ", "" );
 
end
 
table.insert( new_list, {handler.label, ISBN } );
 
elseif k == 'USENETID' then
 
table.insert( new_list, {handler.label, message_id( v ) } );
 
else
 
error( cfg.messages['unknown_manual_ID'] );
 
 
end
 
end
 +
elseif is_pdf (url) then -- format is not set so if url is a pdf file then
 +
format = wrap_style ('format', 'PDF'); -- set format to pdf
 +
else
 +
format = ''; -- empty string for concatenation
 
end
 
end
+
return format;
function comp( a, b ) -- used in following table.sort()
 
return a[1] < b[1];
 
end
 
 
table.sort( new_list, comp );
 
for k, v in ipairs( new_list ) do
 
new_list[k] = v[2];
 
end
 
 
return new_list;
 
 
end
 
end
 
 
  
--[[--------------------------< C O I N S _ C L E A N U P >----------------------------------------------------
 
  
Cleanup parameter values for the metadata by removing or replacing invisible characters and certain html entities.
+
--[[--------------------------< G E T _ D I S P L A Y _ A U T H O R S _ E D I T O R S >------------------------
  
2015-12-10: there is a bug in mw.text.unstripNoWiki ().  It replaced math stripmarkers with the appropriate content
+
Returns a number that defines the number of names displayed for author and editor name lists and a boolean flag
when it shouldn't. See https://phabricator.wikimedia.org/T121085 and Wikipedia_talk:Lua#stripmarkers_and_mw.text.unstripNoWiki.28.29
+
to indicate when et al. should be appended to the name list.
  
TODO: move the replacement patterns and replacement values into a table in /Configuration similar to the invisible
+
When the value assigned to |display-xxxxors= is a number greater than or equal to zero, return the number and
characters table?
+
the previous state of the 'etal' flag (false by default but may have been set to true if the name list contains
]]
+
some variant of the text 'et al.').
  
local function coins_cleanup (value)
+
When the value assigned to |display-xxxxors= is the keyword 'etal', return a number that is one greater than the
value = mw.text.unstripNoWiki (value); -- replace nowiki stripmarkers with their content
+
number of authors in the list and set the 'etal' flag true.  This will cause the list_people() to display all of
value = value:gsub ('<span class="nowrap" style="padding%-left:0%.1em;">&#39;s</span>', "'s"); -- replace {{'s}} template with simple apostrophe-s
+
the names in the name list followed by 'et al.'
value = value:gsub ('&zwj;\226\128\138\039\226\128\139', "'"); -- replace {{'}} with simple apostrophe
 
value = value:gsub ('\226\128\138\039\226\128\139', "'"); -- replace {{'}} with simple apostrophe (as of 2015-12-11)
 
value = value:gsub ('&nbsp;', ' '); -- replace &nbsp; entity with plain space
 
value = value:gsub ('\226\128\138', ' '); -- replace hair space with plain space
 
value = value:gsub ('&zwj;', ''); -- remove &zwj; entities
 
value = value:gsub ('[\226\128\141\226\128\139]', '') -- remove zero-width joiner, zero-width space
 
value = value:gsub ('[\194\173\009\010\013]', ' '); -- replace soft hyphen, horizontal tab, line feed, carriage return with plain space
 
return value;
 
end
 
  
 +
In all other cases, returns nil and the previous state of the 'etal' flag.
  
--[[--------------------------< C O I N S >--------------------------------------------------------------------
+
inputs:
 
+
max: A['DisplayAuthors'] or A['DisplayEditors']; a number or some flavor of etal
COinS metadata (see <http://ocoins.info/>) allows automated tools to parse the citation information.
+
count: #a or #e
 +
list_name: 'authors' or 'editors'
 +
etal: author_etal or editor_etal
  
 
]]
 
]]
  
local function COinS(data, class)
+
local function get_display_authors_editors (max, count, list_name, etal)
if 'table' ~= type(data) or nil == next(data) then
+
if is_set (max) then
return '';
+
if 'etal' == max:lower():gsub("[ '%.]", '') then -- the :gsub() portion makes 'etal' from a variety of 'et al.' spellings and stylings
end
+
max = count + 1; -- number of authors + 1 so display all author name plus et al.
 
+
etal = true; -- overrides value set by extract_names()
for k, v in pairs (data) do -- spin through all of the metadata parameter values
+
elseif max:match ('^%d+$') then -- if is a string of numbers
if 'ID_list' ~= k and 'Authors' ~= k then -- except the ID_list and Author tables (author nowiki stripmarker done when Author table processed)
+
max = tonumber (max); -- make it a number
data[k] = coins_cleanup (v);
+
if max >= count then -- if |display-xxxxors= value greater than or equal to number of authors/editors
 +
add_maint_cat ('disp_auth_ed', cfg.special_case_translation [list_name]);
 +
end
 +
else -- not a valid keyword or number
 +
table.insert( z.message_tail, { set_error( 'invalid_param_val', {'display-' .. list_name, max}, true ) } ); -- add error message
 +
max = nil; -- unset; as if |display-xxxxors= had not been set
 
end
 
end
 
end
 
end
 
local ctx_ver = "Z39.88-2004";
 
 
 
-- treat table strictly as an array with only set values.
+
return max, etal;
local OCinSoutput = setmetatable( {}, {
+
end
__newindex = function(self, key, value)
 
if is_set(value) then
 
rawset( self, #self+1, table.concat{ key, '=', mw.uri.encode( remove_wiki_link( value ) ) } );
 
end
 
end
 
});
 
 
if in_array (class, {'arxiv', 'journal', 'news'}) or (in_array (class, {'conference', 'interview', 'map', 'press release', 'web'}) and is_set(data.Periodical)) or
 
('citation' == class and is_set(data.Periodical) and not is_set (data.Encyclopedia)) then
 
OCinSoutput.rft_val_fmt = "info:ofi/fmt:kev:mtx:journal"; -- journal metadata identifier
 
if 'arxiv' == class then -- set genre according to the type of citation template we are rendering
 
OCinSoutput["rft.genre"] = "preprint"; -- cite arxiv
 
elseif 'conference' == class then
 
OCinSoutput["rft.genre"] = "conference"; -- cite conference (when Periodical set)
 
elseif 'web' == class then
 
OCinSoutput["rft.genre"] = "unknown"; -- cite web (when Periodical set)
 
else
 
OCinSoutput["rft.genre"] = "article"; -- journal and other 'periodical' articles
 
end
 
OCinSoutput["rft.jtitle"] = data.Periodical; -- journal only
 
if is_set (data.Map) then
 
OCinSoutput["rft.atitle"] = data.Map; -- for a map in a periodical
 
else
 
OCinSoutput["rft.atitle"] = data.Title; -- all other 'periodical' article titles
 
end
 
-- these used onlu for periodicals
 
OCinSoutput["rft.ssn"] = data.Season; -- keywords: winter, spring, summer, fall
 
OCinSoutput["rft.chron"] = data.Chron; -- free-form date components
 
OCinSoutput["rft.volume"] = data.Volume; -- does not apply to books
 
OCinSoutput["rft.issue"] = data.Issue;
 
OCinSoutput["rft.pages"] = data.Pages; -- also used in book metadata
 
  
elseif 'thesis' ~= class then -- all others except cite thesis are treated as 'book' metadata; genre distinguishes
 
OCinSoutput.rft_val_fmt = "info:ofi/fmt:kev:mtx:book"; -- book metadata identifier
 
if 'report' == class or 'techreport' == class then -- cite report and cite techreport
 
OCinSoutput["rft.genre"] = "report";
 
elseif 'conference' == class then -- cite conference when Periodical not set
 
OCinSoutput["rft.genre"] = "conference";
 
elseif in_array (class, {'book', 'citation', 'encyclopaedia', 'interview', 'map'}) then
 
if is_set (data.Chapter) then
 
OCinSoutput["rft.genre"] = "bookitem";
 
OCinSoutput["rft.atitle"] = data.Chapter; -- book chapter, encyclopedia article, interview in a book, or map title
 
else
 
if 'map' == class or 'interview' == class then
 
OCinSoutput["rft.genre"] = 'unknown'; -- standalone map or interview
 
else
 
OCinSoutput["rft.genre"] = 'book'; -- book and encyclopedia
 
end
 
end
 
else --{'audio-visual', 'AV-media-notes', 'DVD-notes', 'episode', 'interview', 'mailinglist', 'map', 'newsgroup', 'podcast', 'press release', 'serial', 'sign', 'speech', 'web'}
 
OCinSoutput["rft.genre"] = "unknown";
 
end
 
OCinSoutput["rft.btitle"] = data.Title; -- book only
 
OCinSoutput["rft.place"] = data.PublicationPlace; -- book only
 
OCinSoutput["rft.series"] = data.Series; -- book only
 
OCinSoutput["rft.pages"] = data.Pages; -- book, journal
 
OCinSoutput["rft.edition"] = data.Edition; -- book only
 
OCinSoutput["rft.pub"] = data.PublisherName; -- book and dissertation
 
 
else -- cite thesis
 
OCinSoutput.rft_val_fmt = "info:ofi/fmt:kev:mtx:dissertation"; -- dissertation metadata identifier
 
OCinSoutput["rft.title"] = data.Title; -- dissertation (also patent but that is not yet supported)
 
OCinSoutput["rft.degree"] = data.Degree; -- dissertation only
 
OCinSoutput['rft.inst'] = data.PublisherName; -- book and dissertation
 
end
 
-- and now common parameters (as much as possible)
 
OCinSoutput["rft.date"] = data.Date; -- book, journal, dissertation
 
 
for k, v in pairs( data.ID_list ) do -- what to do about these? For now assume that they are common to all?
 
if k == 'ISBN' then v = clean_isbn( v ) end
 
local id = cfg.id_handlers[k].COinS;
 
if string.sub( id or "", 1, 4 ) == 'info' then -- for ids that are in the info:registry
 
OCinSoutput["rft_id"] = table.concat{ id, "/", v };
 
elseif string.sub (id or "", 1, 3 ) == 'rft' then -- for isbn, issn, eissn, etc that have defined COinS keywords
 
OCinSoutput[ id ] = v;
 
elseif id then -- when cfg.id_handlers[k].COinS is not nil
 
OCinSoutput["rft_id"] = table.concat{ cfg.id_handlers[k].prefix, v }; -- others; provide a url
 
end
 
end
 
  
--[[
+
--[[--------------------------< E X T R A _ T E X T _ I N _ P A G E _ C H E C K >------------------------------
for k, v in pairs( data.ID_list ) do -- what to do about these? For now assume that they are common to all?
+
 
local id, value = cfg.id_handlers[k].COinS;
+
Adds page to Category:CS1 maint: extra text if |page= or |pages= has what appears to be some form of p. or pp.
if k == 'ISBN' then value = clean_isbn( v ); else value = v; end
+
abbreviation in the first characters of the parameter content.
if string.sub( id or "", 1, 4 ) == 'info' then
+
 
OCinSoutput["rft_id"] = table.concat{ id, "/", v };
+
check Page and Pages for extraneous p, p., pp, and pp. at start of parameter value:
else
+
good pattern: '^P[^%.P%l]' matches when |page(s)= begins PX or P# but not Px where x and X are letters and # is a dgiit
OCinSoutput[ id ] = value;
+
bad pattern: '^[Pp][Pp]' matches matches when |page(s)= begins pp or pP or Pp or PP
end
+
 
end
 
 
]]
 
]]
local last, first;
+
 
for k, v in ipairs( data.Authors ) do
+
local function extra_text_in_page_check (page)
last, first = coins_cleanup (v.last), coins_cleanup (v.first or ''); -- replace any nowiki strip markers, non-printing or invisible characers
+
local good_pattern = '^P[^%.Pp]'; -- ok to begin with uppercase P: P7 (pg 7 of section P) but not p123 (page 123) TODO: add Gg for PG or Pg?
if k == 1 then -- for the first author name only
+
local bad_pattern = '^[Pp]?[Pp]%.?[ %d]';
if is_set(last) and is_set(first) then -- set these COinS values if |first= and |last= specify the first author name
+
 
OCinSoutput["rft.aulast"] = last; -- book, journal, dissertation
+
if not page:match (good_pattern) and (page:match (bad_pattern) or  page:match ('^[Pp]ages?')) then
OCinSoutput["rft.aufirst"] = first; -- book, journal, dissertation
+
add_maint_cat ('extra_text');
elseif is_set(last) then
 
OCinSoutput["rft.au"] = last; -- book, journal, dissertation -- otherwise use this form for the first name
 
end
 
else -- for all other authors
 
if is_set(last) and is_set(first) then
 
OCinSoutput["rft.au"] = table.concat{ last, ", ", first }; -- book, journal, dissertation
 
elseif is_set(last) then
 
OCinSoutput["rft.au"] = last; -- book, journal, dissertation
 
end
 
end
 
 
end
 
end
 
OCinSoutput.rft_id = data.URL;
 
OCinSoutput.rfr_id = table.concat{ "info:sid/", mw.site.server:match( "[^/]*$" ), ":", data.RawPage };
 
OCinSoutput = setmetatable( OCinSoutput, nil );
 
 
-- sort with version string always first, and combine.
 
table.sort( OCinSoutput );
 
table.insert( OCinSoutput, 1, "ctx_ver=" .. ctx_ver );  -- such as "Z39.88-2004"
 
return table.concat(OCinSoutput, "&");
 
 
end
 
end
  
  
--[[--------------------------< G E T _ I S O 6 3 9 _ C O D E >------------------------------------------------
+
--[=[-------------------------< G E T _ V _ N A M E _ T A B L E >----------------------------------------------
  
Validates language names provided in |language= parameter if not an ISO639-1 codeHandles the special case that is Norwegian where
+
split apart a |vauthors= or |veditors= parameter.  This function allows for corporate names, wrapped in doubled
ISO639-1 code 'no' is mapped to language name 'Norwegian Bokmål' by Extention:CLDR.
+
parentheses to also have commas; in the old version of the code, the doubled parnetheses were included in the
 +
rendered citation and in the metadata. Individual author names may be wikilinked
  
Returns the language name and associated ISO639-1 code. Because case of the source may be incorrect or different from the case that Wikimedia
+
|vauthors=Jones AB, [[E. B. White|White EB]], ((Black, Brown, and Co.))
uses, the name comparisons are done in lower case and when a match is found, the Wikimedia version (assumed to be correct) is returned along
 
with the code.  When there is no match, we return the original language name string.
 
  
mw.language.fetchLanguageNames() will return a list of languages that aren't part of ISO639-1. Names that aren't ISO639-1 but that are included
+
]=]
in the list will be found if that name is provided in the |language= parameter.  For example, if |language=Samaritan Aramaic, that name will be
 
found with the associated code 'sam', not an ISO639-1 code.  When names are found and the associated code is not two characters, this function
 
returns only the Wikimedia language name.
 
  
Adapted from code taken from Module:Check ISO 639-1.
+
local function get_v_name_table (vparam, output_table, output_link_table)
 
+
local name_table = mw.text.split(vparam, "%s*,%s*"); -- names are separated by commas
]]
+
local wl_type, label, link; -- wl_type not used here; just a place holder
 
 
local function get_iso639_code (lang)
 
if 'norwegian' == lang:lower() then -- special case related to Wikimedia remap of code 'no' at Extension:CLDR
 
return 'Norwegian', 'no'; -- Make sure rendered version is properly capitalized
 
end
 
 
 
local languages = mw.language.fetchLanguageNames('en', 'all') -- get a list of language names known to Wikimedia
+
local i = 1;
-- ('all' is required for North Ndebele, South Ndebele, and Ojibwa)
 
local langlc = mw.ustring.lower(lang); -- lower case version for comparisons
 
 
 
for code, name in pairs(languages) do -- scan the list to see if we can find our language
+
while name_table[i] do
if langlc == mw.ustring.lower(name) then
+
if name_table[i]:match ('^%(%(.*[^%)][^%)]$') then -- first segment of corporate with one or more commas; this segment has the opening doubled parens
if 2 ~= code:len() then -- ISO639-1 codes only
+
local name = name_table[i];
return name; -- so return the name but not the code
+
i=i+1; -- bump indexer to next segment
 +
while name_table[i] do
 +
name = name .. ', ' .. name_table[i]; -- concatenate with previous segments
 +
if name_table[i]:match ('^.*%)%)$') then -- if this table member has the closing doubled parens
 +
break; -- and done reassembling so
 +
end
 +
i=i+1; -- bump indexer
 +
end
 +
table.insert (output_table, name); -- and add corporate name to the output table
 +
table.insert (output_link_table, ''); -- no wikilink
 +
else
 +
wl_type, label, link = is_wikilink (name_table[i]); -- wl_type is: 0, no wl (text in label variable); 1, [[D]]; 2, [[L|D]]
 +
table.insert (output_table, label); -- add this name
 +
if 1 == wl_type then
 +
table.insert (output_link_table, label); -- simple wikilink [[D]]
 +
else
 +
table.insert (output_link_table, link); -- no wikilink or [[L|D]]; add this link if there is one, else empty string
 
end
 
end
return name, code; -- found it, return name to ensure proper capitalization and the ISO639-1 code
 
 
end
 
end
end
+
i = i+1;
return lang; -- not valid language; return language in original case and nil for ISO639-1 code
+
end
 +
return output_table;
 
end
 
end
  
--[[--------------------------< L A N G U A G E _ P A R A M E T E R >------------------------------------------
 
  
Get language name from ISO639-1 code value provided.  If a code is valid use the returned name; if not, then use the value that was provided with the language parameter.
+
--[[--------------------------< P A R S E _ V A U T H O R S _ V E D I T O R S >--------------------------------
  
There is an exception.  There are three ISO639-1 codes for Norewegian language variants.  There are two official variants: Norwegian Bokmål (code 'nb') and
+
This function extracts author / editor names from |vauthors= or |veditors= and finds matching |xxxxor-maskn= and
Norwegian Nynorsk (code 'nn').  The third, code 'no',  is defined by ISO639-1 as 'Norwegian' though in Norway this is pretty much meaninglessHowever, it appears
+
|xxxxor-linkn= in argsIt then returns a table of assembled names just as extract_names() does.
that on enwiki, editors are for the most part unaware of the nb and nn variants (compare page counts for these variants at Category:Articles with non-English-language external links.
 
  
Because Norwegian Bokmål is the most common language variant, Media wiki has been modified to return Norwegian Bokmål for ISO639-1 code 'no'. Here we undo that and
+
Author / editor names in |vauthors= or |veditors= must be in Vancouver system style. Corporate or institutional names
return 'Norwegian' when editors use |language=no.  We presume that editors don't know about the variants or can't descriminate between them.
+
may sometimes be required and because such names will often fail the is_good_vanc_name() and other format compliance
 +
tests, are wrapped in doubled paranethese ((corporate name)) to suppress the format tests.
  
See Help talk:Citation Style_1#An ISO 639-1 language name test
+
Supports generational suffixes Jr, 2nd, 3rd, 4th–6th.
  
When |language= contains a valid ISO639-1 code, the page is assigned to the category for that code: Category:Norwegian-language sources (no) if
+
This function sets the vancouver error when a reqired comma is missing and when there is a space between an author's initials.
the page is a mainspace page and the ISO639-1 code is not 'en'.  Similarly, if the  parameter is |language=Norwegian, it will be categorized in the same way.
 
 
 
This function supports multiple languages in the form |language=nb, French, th where the language names or codes are separated from each other by commas.
 
  
 
]]
 
]]
  
local function language_parameter (lang)
+
local function parse_vauthors_veditors (args, vparam, list_name)
local code; -- the ISO639-1 two character code
+
local names = {}; -- table of names assembled from |vauthors=, |author-maskn=, |author-linkn=
local name; -- the language name
+
local v_name_table = {};
local language_list = {}; -- table of language names to be rendered
+
local v_link_table = {}; -- when name is wikilinked, targets go in this table
local names_table = {}; -- table made from the value assigned to |language=
+
local etal = false; -- return value set to true when we find some form of et al. vauthors parameter
 +
local last, first, link, mask, suffix;
 +
local corporate = false;
  
names_table = mw.text.split (lang, '%s*,%s*'); -- names should be a comma separated list
+
vparam, etal = name_has_etal (vparam, etal, true); -- find and remove variations on et al. do not categorize (do it here because et al. might have a period)
 +
v_name_table = get_v_name_table (vparam, v_name_table, v_link_table); -- names are separated by commas
  
for _, lang in ipairs (names_table) do -- reuse lang
+
for i, v_name in ipairs(v_name_table) do
 
+
if v_name:match ('^%(%(.+%)%)$') then -- corporate authors are wrapped in doubled parentheses to supress vanc formatting and error detection
if lang:match ('^%a%a%-') then -- strip ietf language tags from code
+
first = ''; -- set to empty string for concatenation and because it may have been set for previous author/editor
lang = lang:match ('(%a%a)%-') -- keep only 639-1 code portion to lang; TODO: do something with 3166 alpha 2 country code?
+
last = v_name:match ('^%(%((.+)%)%)$') -- remove doubled parntheses
end
+
corporate = true; -- flag used in list_people()
if 2 == lang:len() then -- ISO639-1 language code are 2 characters (fetchLanguageName also supports 3 character codes)
+
elseif string.find(v_name, "%s") then
name = mw.language.fetchLanguageName( lang:lower(), "en" ); -- get ISO 639-1 language name if Language is a proper code
+
if v_name:find('[;%.]') then -- look for commonly occurring punctuation characters;
end
+
add_vanc_error ('punctuation');
+
end
if is_set (name) then -- if Language specified a valid ISO639-1 code
+
local lastfirstTable = {}
code = lang:lower(); -- save it
+
lastfirstTable = mw.text.split(v_name, "%s")
 +
first = table.remove(lastfirstTable); -- removes and returns value of last element in table which should be author intials
 +
if is_suffix (first) then -- if a valid suffix
 +
suffix = first -- save it as a suffix and
 +
first = table.remove(lastfirstTable); -- get what should be the initials from the table
 +
end -- no suffix error message here because letter combination may be result of Romanization; check for digits?
 +
last = table.concat(lastfirstTable, " ") -- returns a string that is the concatenation of all other names that are not initials
 +
if mw.ustring.match (last, '%a+%s+%u+%s+%a+') then
 +
add_vanc_error ('missing comma'); -- matches last II last; the case when a comma is missing
 +
end
 +
if mw.ustring.match (v_name, ' %u %u$') then -- this test is in the wrong place TODO: move or replace with a more appropriate test
 +
add_vanc_error ('name'); -- matches a space between two intiials
 +
end
 
else
 
else
name, code = get_iso639_code (lang); -- attempt to get code from name (assign name here so that we are sure of proper capitalization)
+
first = ''; -- set to empty string for concatenation and because it may have been set for previous author/editor
 +
last = v_name; -- last name or single corporate name?  Doesn't support multiword corporate names? do we need this?
 
end
 
end
+
if is_set (code) then
+
if is_set (first) then
if 'no' == code then name = 'Norwegian' end; -- override wikimedia when code is 'no'
+
if not mw.ustring.match (first, "^%u?%u$") then -- first shall contain one or two upper-case letters, nothing else
if 'en' ~= code then -- English not the language
+
add_vanc_error ('initials'); -- too many initials; mixed case initials (which may be ok Romanization); hyphenated initials
add_prop_cat ('foreign_lang_source', {name, code})
+
end
 +
is_good_vanc_name (last, first); -- check first and last before restoring the suffix which may have a non-Latin digit
 +
if is_set (suffix) then
 +
first = first .. ' ' .. suffix; -- if there was a suffix concatenate with the initials
 +
suffix = ''; -- unset so we don't add this suffix to all subsequent names
 
end
 
end
 
else
 
else
add_maint_cat ('unknown_lang'); -- add maint category if not already added
+
if not corporate then
 +
is_good_vanc_name (last, '');
 +
end
 
end
 
end
+
 
table.insert (language_list, name);
+
link = select_one( args, cfg.aliases[list_name .. '-Link'], 'redundant_parameters', i ) or v_link_table[i];
name = ''; -- so we can reuse it
+
mask = select_one( args, cfg.aliases[list_name .. '-Mask'], 'redundant_parameters', i );
 +
names[i] = {last = last, first = first, link = link, mask = mask, corporate=corporate}; -- add this assembled name to our names list
 
end
 
end
+
return names, etal; -- all done, return our list of names
code = #language_list -- reuse code as number of languages in the list
 
if 2 >= code then
 
name = table.concat (language_list, ' and ') -- insert '<space>and<space>' between two language names
 
elseif 2 < code then
 
language_list[code] = 'and ' .. language_list[code]; -- prepend last name with 'and<space>'
 
name = table.concat (language_list, ', ') -- and concatenate with '<comma><space>' separators
 
end
 
if 'English' == name then
 
return ''; -- if one language and that language is English return an empty string (no annotation)
 
end
 
return (" " .. wrap_msg ('language', name)); -- otherwise wrap with '(in ...)'
 
 
end
 
end
  
--[[--------------------------< S E T _ C S 1 _ S T Y L E >----------------------------------------------------
 
  
Set style settings for CS1 citation templates. Returns separator and postscript settings
+
--[[--------------------------< S E L E C T _ A U T H O R _ E D I T O R _ S O U R C E >------------------------
  
]]
+
Select one of |authors=, |authorn= / |lastn / firstn=, or |vauthors= as the source of the author name list or
 +
select one of |editors=, |editorn= / editor-lastn= / |editor-firstn= or |veditors= as the source of the editor name list.
  
local function set_cs1_style (ps)
+
Only one of these appropriate three will be used.  The hierarchy is: |authorn= (and aliases) highest and |authors= lowest and
if not is_set (ps) then -- unless explicitely set to something
+
similarly, |editorn= (and aliases) highest and |editors= lowest
ps = '.'; -- terminate the rendered citation with a period
+
 
end
+
When looking for |authorn= / |editorn= parameters, test |xxxxor1= and |xxxxor2= (and all of their aliases); stops after the second
return '.', ps; -- separator is a full stop
+
test which mimicks the test used in extract_names() when looking for a hole in the author name list.  There may be a better
end
+
way to do this, I just haven't discovered what that way is.
  
--[[--------------------------< S E T _ C S 2 _ S T Y L E >----------------------------------------------------
+
Emits an error message when more than one xxxxor name source is provided.
  
Set style settings for CS2 citation templates. Returns separator, postscript, ref settings
+
In this function, vxxxxors = vauthors or veditors; xxxxors = authors or editors as appropriate.
  
 
]]
 
]]
  
local function set_cs2_style (ps, ref)
+
local function select_author_editor_source (vxxxxors, xxxxors, args, list_name)
if not is_set (ps) then -- if |postscript= has not been set, set cs2 default
+
local lastfirst = false;
ps = ''; -- make sure it isn't nil
+
if select_one( args, cfg.aliases[list_name .. '-Last'], 'none', 1 ) or -- do this twice incase we have a |first1= without a |last1=; this ...
 +
select_one( args, cfg.aliases[list_name .. '-First'], 'none', 1 ) or -- ... also catches the case where |first= is used with |vauthors=
 +
select_one( args, cfg.aliases[list_name .. '-Last'], 'none', 2 ) or
 +
select_one( args, cfg.aliases[list_name .. '-First'], 'none', 2 ) then
 +
lastfirst=true;
 
end
 
end
if not is_set (ref) then -- if |ref= is not set
+
 
ref = "harv"; -- set default |ref=harv
+
if (is_set (vxxxxors) and true == lastfirst) or -- these are the three error conditions
 +
(is_set (vxxxxors) and is_set (xxxxors)) or
 +
(true == lastfirst and is_set (xxxxors)) then
 +
local err_name;
 +
if 'AuthorList' == list_name then -- figure out which name should be used in error message
 +
err_name = 'author';
 +
else
 +
err_name = 'editor';
 +
end
 +
table.insert( z.message_tail, { set_error( 'redundant_parameters',
 +
{err_name .. '-name-list parameters'}, true ) } ); -- add error message
 
end
 
end
return ',', ps, ref; -- separator is a comma
 
end
 
  
--[[--------------------------< G E T _ S E T T I N G S _ F R O M _ C I T E _ C L A S S >----------------------
+
if true == lastfirst then return 1 end; -- return a number indicating which author name source to use
 
+
if is_set (vxxxxors) then return 2 end;
When |mode= is not set or when its value is invalid, use config.CitationClass and parameter values to establish
+
if is_set (xxxxors) then return 3 end;
rendered style.
+
return 1; -- no authors so return 1; this allows missing author name test to run in case there is a first without last
 +
end
 +
 
 +
 
 +
--[[--------------------------< I S _ V A L I D _ P A R A M E T E R _ V A L U E >------------------------------
 +
 
 +
This function is used to validate a parameter's assigned value for those parameters that have only a limited number
 +
of allowable values (yes, y, true, no, etc).  When the parameter value has not been assigned a value (missing or empty
 +
in the source template) the function returns true.  If the parameter value is one of the list of allowed values returns
 +
true; else, emits an error message and returns false.
  
 
]]
 
]]
  
local function get_settings_from_cite_class (ps, ref, cite_class)
+
local function is_valid_parameter_value (value, name, possible)
local sep;
+
if not is_set (value) then
if (cite_class == "citation") then -- for citation templates (CS2)
+
return true; -- an empty parameter is ok
sep, ps, ref = set_cs2_style (ps, ref);
+
elseif in_array(value:lower(), possible) then
else -- not a citation template so CS1
+
return true;
sep, ps = set_cs1_style (ps);
+
else
 +
table.insert( z.message_tail, { set_error( 'invalid_param_val', {name, value}, true ) } ); -- not an allowed value so add error message
 +
return false
 
end
 
end
 
return sep, ps, ref -- return them all
 
 
end
 
end
  
--[[--------------------------< S E T _ S T Y L E >------------------------------------------------------------
 
  
Establish basic style settings to be used when rendering the citation.  Uses |mode= if set and valid or uses
+
--[[--------------------------< T E R M I N A T E _ N A M E _ L I S T >----------------------------------------
config.CitationClass from the template's #invoke: to establish style.
 
  
]]
+
This function terminates a name list (author, contributor, editor) with a separator character (sepc) and a space
 +
when the last character is not a sepc character or when the last three characters are not sepc followed by two
 +
closing square brackets (close of a wikilink).  When either of these is true, the name_list is terminated with a
 +
single space character.
  
local function set_style (mode, ps, ref, cite_class)
+
]]
local sep;
+
 
if 'cs2' == mode then -- if this template is to be rendered in CS2 (citation) style
+
local function terminate_name_list (name_list, sepc)
sep, ps, ref = set_cs2_style (ps, ref);
+
if (string.sub (name_list,-3,-1) == sepc .. '. ') then -- if already properly terminated
elseif 'cs1' == mode then -- if this template is to be rendered in CS1 (cite xxx) style
+
return name_list; -- just return the name list
sep, ps = set_cs1_style (ps);
+
elseif (string.sub (name_list,-1,-1) == sepc) or (string.sub (name_list,-3,-1) == sepc .. ']]') then -- if last name in list ends with sepc char
else -- anything but cs1 or cs2
+
return name_list .. " "; -- don't add another
sep, ps, ref = get_settings_from_cite_class (ps, ref, cite_class); -- get settings based on the template's CitationClass
+
else
 +
return name_list .. sepc .. ' '; -- otherwise terninate the name list
 
end
 
end
if 'none' == ps:lower() then -- if assigned value is 'none' then
 
ps = ''; -- set to empty string
 
end
 
 
return sep, ps, ref
 
 
end
 
end
  
--[=[-------------------------< I S _ P D F >------------------------------------------------------------------
 
  
Determines if a url has the file extension that is one of the pdf file extensions used by [[MediaWiki:Common.css]] when
+
--[[-------------------------< F O R M A T _ V O L U M E _ I S S U E >----------------------------------------
applying the pdf icon to external links.
 
  
returns true if file extension is one of the recognized extension, else false
+
returns the concatenation of the formatted volume and issue parameters as a single string; or formatted volume
 +
or formatted issue, or an empty string if neither are set.
  
]=]
+
]]
 
+
local function is_pdf (url)
+
local function format_volume_issue (volume, issue, cite_class, origin, sepc, lower)
return url:match ('%.pdf[%?#]?') or url:match ('%.PDF[%?#]?');
+
if not is_set (volume) and not is_set (issue) then
 +
return '';
 +
end
 +
 +
if 'magazine' == cite_class or (in_array (cite_class, {'citation', 'map'}) and 'magazine' == origin) then
 +
if is_set (volume) and is_set (issue) then
 +
return wrap_msg ('vol-no', {sepc, volume, issue}, lower);
 +
elseif is_set (volume) then
 +
return wrap_msg ('vol', {sepc, volume}, lower);
 +
else
 +
return wrap_msg ('issue', {sepc, issue}, lower);
 +
end
 +
end
 +
 
 +
local vol = '';
 +
 +
if is_set (volume) then
 +
if (4 < mw.ustring.len(volume)) then
 +
vol = substitute (cfg.messages['j-vol'], {sepc, volume});
 +
else
 +
vol = substitute (cfg.presentation['vol-bold'], {sepc, hyphen_to_dash(volume)});
 +
end
 +
end
 +
if is_set (issue) then
 +
return vol .. substitute (cfg.messages['j-issue'], issue);
 +
end
 +
return vol;
 
end
 
end
  
--[[--------------------------< S T Y L E _ F O R M A T >------------------------------------------------------
 
  
Applies css style to |format=, |chapter-format=, etc.  Also emits an error message if the format parameter does
+
--[[-------------------------< F O R M A T _ P A G E S _ S H E E T S >-----------------------------------------
not have a matching url parameter.  If the format parameter is not set and the url contains a file extension that
 
is recognized as a pdf document by MediaWiki's commons.css, this code will set the format parameter to (PDF) with
 
the appropriate styling.
 
  
]]
+
adds static text to one of |page(s)= or |sheet(s)= values and returns it with all of the others set to empty strings.
 +
The return order is:
 +
page, pages, sheet, sheets
  
local function style_format (format, url, fmt_param, url_param)
+
Singular has priority over plural when both are provided.
if is_set (format) then
 
format = wrap_style ('format', format); -- add leading space, parenthases, resize
 
if not is_set (url) then
 
format = format .. set_error( 'format_missing_url', {fmt_param, url_param} ); -- add an error message
 
end
 
elseif is_pdf (url) then -- format is not set so if url is a pdf file then
 
format = wrap_style ('format', 'PDF'); -- set format to pdf
 
else
 
format = ''; -- empty string for concatenation
 
end
 
return format;
 
end
 
 
 
--[[--------------------------< G E T _ D I S P L A Y _ A U T H O R S _ E D I T O R S >------------------------
 
 
 
Returns a number that may or may not limit the length of the author or editor name lists.
 
 
 
When the value assigned to |display-authors= is a number greater than or equal to zero, return the number and
 
the previous state of the 'etal' flag (false by default but may have been set to true if the name list contains
 
some variant of the text 'et al.').
 
 
 
When the value assigned to |display-authors= is the keyword 'etal', return a number that is one greater than the
 
number of authors in the list and set the 'etal' flag true.  This will cause the list_people() to display all of
 
the names in the name list followed by 'et al.'
 
 
 
In all other cases, returns nil and the previous state of the 'etal' flag.
 
  
 
]]
 
]]
  
local function get_display_authors_editors (max, count, list_name, etal)
+
local function format_pages_sheets (page, pages, sheet, sheets, cite_class, origin, sepc, nopp, lower)
if is_set (max) then
+
if 'map' == cite_class then -- only cite map supports sheet(s) as in-source locators
if 'etal' == max:lower():gsub("[ '%.]", '') then -- the :gsub() portion makes 'etal' from a variety of 'et al.' spellings and stylings
+
if is_set (sheet) then
max = count + 1; -- number of authors + 1 so display all author name plus et al.
+
if 'journal' == origin then
etal = true; -- overrides value set by extract_names()
+
return '', '', wrap_msg ('j-sheet', sheet, lower), '';
elseif max:match ('^%d+$') then -- if is a string of numbers
+
else
max = tonumber (max); -- make it a number
+
return '', '', wrap_msg ('sheet', {sepc, sheet}, lower), '';
if max >= count and 'authors' == list_name then -- AUTHORS ONLY -- if |display-xxxxors= value greater than or equal to number of authors/editors
+
end
add_maint_cat ('disp_auth_ed', list_name);
+
elseif is_set (sheets) then
 +
if 'journal' == origin then
 +
return '', '', '', wrap_msg ('j-sheets', sheets, lower);
 +
else
 +
return '', '', '', wrap_msg ('sheets', {sepc, sheets}, lower);
 
end
 
end
else -- not a valid keyword or number
 
table.insert( z.message_tail, { set_error( 'invalid_param_val', {'display-' .. list_name, max}, true ) } ); -- add error message
 
max = nil; -- unset
 
 
end
 
end
elseif 'authors' == list_name then -- AUTHORS ONLY need to clear implicit et al category
+
end
max = count + 1; -- number of authors + 1
+
 
 +
local is_journal = 'journal' == cite_class or (in_array (cite_class, {'citation', 'map', 'interview'}) and 'journal' == origin);
 +
 +
if is_set (page) then
 +
if is_journal then
 +
return substitute (cfg.messages['j-page(s)'], page), '', '', '';
 +
elseif not nopp then
 +
return substitute (cfg.messages['p-prefix'], {sepc, page}), '', '', '';
 +
else
 +
return substitute (cfg.messages['nopp'], {sepc, page}), '', '', '';
 +
end
 +
elseif is_set(pages) then
 +
if is_journal then
 +
return substitute (cfg.messages['j-page(s)'], pages), '', '', '';
 +
elseif tonumber(pages) ~= nil and not nopp then -- if pages is only digits, assume a single page number
 +
return '', substitute (cfg.messages['p-prefix'], {sepc, pages}), '', '';
 +
elseif not nopp then
 +
return '', substitute (cfg.messages['pp-prefix'], {sepc, pages}), '', '';
 +
else
 +
return '', substitute (cfg.messages['nopp'], {sepc, pages}), '', '';
 +
end
 
end
 
end
 
 
return max, etal;
+
return '', '', '', ''; -- return empty strings
 
end
 
end
  
--[[--------------------------< E X T R A _ T E X T _ I N _ P A G E _ C H E C K >------------------------------
 
  
Adds page to Category:CS1 maint: extra text if |page= or |pages= has what appears to be some form of p. or pp.  
+
--[=[-------------------------< A R C H I V E _ U R L _ C H E C K >--------------------------------------------
abbreviation in the first characters of the parameter content.
+
 
 +
Check archive.org urls to make sure they at least look like they are pointing at valid archives and not to the
 +
save snapshot url or to calendar pages. When the archive url is 'https://web.archive.org/save/' (or http://...)
 +
archive.org saves a snapshot of the target page in the url.  That is something that Wikipedia should not allow
 +
unwitting readers to do.
  
check Page and Pages for extraneous p, p., pp, and pp. at start of parameter value:
+
When the archive.org url does not have a complete timestamp, archive.org chooses a snapshot according to its own
good pattern: '^P[^%.P%l]' matches when |page(s)= begins PX or P# but not Px where x and X are letters and # is a dgiit
+
algorithm or provides a calendar 'search' result.  [[WP:ELNO]] discourages links to search results.
bad pattern: '^[Pp][Pp]' matches matches when |page(s)= begins pp or pP or Pp or PP
 
  
]]
+
This function looks at the value assigned to |archive-url= and returns empty strings for |archive-url= and
 +
|archive-date= and an error message when:
 +
|archive-url= holds an archive.org save command url
 +
|archive-url= is an archive.org url that does not have a complete timestamp (YYYYMMDDhhmmss 14 digits) in the
 +
correct place
 +
otherwise returns |archive-url= and |archive-date=
  
local function extra_text_in_page_check (page)
+
There are two mostly compatible archive.org urls:
-- local good_pattern = '^P[^%.P%l]';
+
//web.archive.org/<timestamp>... -- the old form
local good_pattern = '^P[^%.Pp]'; -- ok to begin with uppercase P: P7 (pg 7 of section P) but not p123 (page 123) TODO: add Gg for PG or Pg?
+
//web.archive.org/web/<timestamp>... -- the new form
-- local bad_pattern = '^[Pp][Pp]';
 
local bad_pattern = '^[Pp]?[Pp]%.?[ %d]';
 
  
if not page:match (good_pattern) and (page:match (bad_pattern) or  page:match ('^[Pp]ages?')) then
+
The old form does not support or map to the new form when it contains a display flag. There are four identified flags
add_maint_cat ('extra_text');
+
('id_', 'js_', 'cs_', 'im_') but since archive.org ignores others following the same form (two letters and an underscore)
end
+
we don't check for these specific flags but we do check the form.
-- if Page:match ('^[Pp]?[Pp]%.?[ %d]') or  Page:match ('^[Pp]ages?[ %d]') or
 
-- Pages:match ('^[Pp]?[Pp]%.?[ %d]') or  Pages:match ('^[Pp]ages?[ %d]') then
 
-- add_maint_cat ('extra_text');
 
-- end
 
end
 
  
 +
This function supports a preview mode.  When the article is rendered in preview mode, this funct may return a modified
 +
archive url:
 +
for save command errors, return undated wildcard (/*/)
 +
for timestamp errors when the timestamp has a wildcard, return the url unmodified
 +
for timestamp errors when the timestamp does not have a wildcard, return with timestamp limited to six digits plus wildcard (/yyyymm*/)
  
--[[--------------------------< P A R S E _ V A U T H O R S _ V E D I T O R S >--------------------------------
+
]=]
  
This function extracts author / editor names from |vauthors= or |veditors= and finds matching |xxxxor-maskn= and
+
local function archive_url_check (url, date)
|xxxxor-linkn= in args. It then returns a table of assembled names just as extract_names() does.
+
local err_msg = ''; -- start with the error message empty
 +
local path, timestamp, flag; -- portions of the archive.or url
 +
 +
if (not url:match('//web%.archive%.org/')) and (not url:match('//liveweb%.archive%.org/')) then -- also deprecated liveweb Wayback machine url
 +
return url, date; -- not an archive.org archive, return ArchiveURL and ArchiveDate
 +
end
  
Author / editor names in |vauthors= or |veditors= must be in Vancouver system style. Corporate or institutional names
+
if url:match('//web%.archive%.org/save/') then -- if a save command url, we don't want to allow saving of the target page
may sometimes be required and because such names will often fail the is_good_vanc_name() and other format compliance
+
err_msg = 'save command';
tests, are wrapped in doubled paranethese ((corporate name)) to suppress the format tests.
+
url = url:gsub ('(//web%.archive%.org)/save/', '%1/*/', 1); -- for preview mode: modify ArchiveURL
 +
elseif url:match('//liveweb%.archive%.org/') then
 +
err_msg = 'liveweb';
 +
else
 +
path, timestamp, flag = url:match('//web%.archive%.org/([^%d]*)(%d+)([^/]*)/'); -- split out some of the url parts for evaluation
 +
 +
if not is_set(timestamp) or 14 ~= timestamp:len() then -- path and flag optional, must have 14-digit timestamp here
 +
err_msg = 'timestamp';
 +
if '*' ~= flag then
 +
url=url:gsub ('(//web%.archive%.org/[^%d]*%d?%d?%d?%d?%d?%d?)[^/]*', '%1*', 1) -- for preview, modify ts to be yearmo* max (0-6 digits plus splat)
 +
end
 +
elseif is_set(path) and 'web/' ~= path then -- older archive urls do not have the extra 'web/' path element
 +
err_msg = 'path';
 +
elseif is_set (flag) and not is_set (path) then -- flag not allowed with the old form url (without the 'web/' path element)
 +
err_msg = 'flag';
 +
elseif is_set (flag) and not flag:match ('%a%a_') then -- flag if present must be two alpha characters and underscore (requires 'web/' path element)
 +
err_msg = 'flag';
 +
else
 +
return url, date; -- return archiveURL and ArchiveDate
 +
end
 +
end
 +
-- if here, something not right so
 +
table.insert( z.message_tail, { set_error( 'archive_url', {err_msg}, true ) } ); -- add error message and
 +
if is_set (Frame:preprocess('{{REVISIONID}}')) then
 +
return '', ''; -- return empty strings for archiveURL and ArchiveDate
 +
else
 +
return url, date; -- preview mode so return archiveURL and ArchiveDate
 +
end
 +
end
  
This function sets the vancouver error when a reqired comma is missing and when there is a space between an author's initials.
 
  
]]
+
--[[--------------------------< C I T A T I O N 0 >------------------------------------------------------------
  
local function parse_vauthors_veditors (args, vparam, list_name)
+
This is the main function doing the majority of the citation formatting.
local names = {}; -- table of names assembled from |vauthors=, |author-maskn=, |author-linkn=
 
local v_name_table = {};
 
local etal = false; -- return value set to true when we find some form of et al. vauthors parameter
 
local last, first, link, mask;
 
local corporate = false;
 
  
vparam, etal = name_has_etal (vparam, etal, true); -- find and remove variations on et al. do not categorize (do it here because et al. might have a period)
+
]]
if vparam:find ('%[%[') or vparam:find ('%]%]') then -- no wikilinking vauthors names
 
add_vanc_error ();
 
end
 
v_name_table = mw.text.split(vparam, "%s*,%s*") -- names are separated by commas
 
  
for i, v_name in ipairs(v_name_table) do
+
local function citation0( config, args)
if v_name:match ('^%(%(.+%)%)$') then -- corporate authors are wrapped in doubled parenthese to supress vanc formatting and error detection
+
--[[
first = ''; -- set to empty string for concatenation and because it may have been set for previous author/editor
+
Load Input Parameters
last = v_name:match ('^%(%((.+)%)%)$')
+
The argument_wrapper facilitates the mapping of multiple aliases to single internal variable.
corporate = true;
+
]]
elseif string.find(v_name, "%s") then
+
local A = argument_wrapper( args );
    lastfirstTable = {}
+
local i  
    lastfirstTable = mw.text.split(v_name, "%s")
 
    first = table.remove(lastfirstTable); -- removes and returns value of last element in table which should be author intials
 
    last  = table.concat(lastfirstTable, " ") -- returns a string that is the concatenation of all other names that are not initials
 
    if mw.ustring.match (last, '%a+%s+%u+%s+%a+') or mw.ustring.match (v_name, ' %u %u$') then
 
add_vanc_error (); -- matches last II last; the case when a comma is missing or a space between two intiials
 
end
 
else
 
first = ''; -- set to empty string for concatenation and because it may have been set for previous author/editor
 
last = v_name; -- last name or single corporate name?  Doesn't support multiword corporate names? do we need this?
 
end
 
 
if is_set (first) and not mw.ustring.match (first, "^%u?%u$") then -- first shall contain one or two upper-case letters, nothing else
 
add_vanc_error ();
 
end
 
-- this from extract_names ()
 
link = select_one( args, cfg.aliases[list_name .. '-Link'], 'redundant_parameters', i );
 
mask = select_one( args, cfg.aliases[list_name .. '-Mask'], 'redundant_parameters', i );
 
names[i] = {last = last, first = first, link = link, mask = mask, corporate=corporate}; -- add this assembled name to our names list
 
end
 
return names, etal; -- all done, return our list of names
 
end
 
  
--[[--------------------------< S E L E C T _ A U T H O R _ E D I T O R _ S O U R C E >------------------------
+
-- Pick out the relevant fields from the arguments.  Different citation templates
 +
-- define different field names for the same underlying things.
  
Select one of |authors=, |authorn= / |lastn / firstn=, or |vauthors= as the source of the author name list or
+
-- set default parameter values defined by |mode= parameter.
select one of |editors=, |editorn= / editor-lastn= / |editor-firstn= or |veditors= as the source of the editor name list.
+
local Mode = A['Mode'];
 +
if not is_valid_parameter_value (Mode, 'mode', cfg.keywords['mode']) then
 +
Mode = '';
 +
end
  
Only one of these appropriate three will be used.  The hierarchy is: |authorn= (and aliases) highest and |authors= lowest and
+
local author_etal;
similarly, |editorn= (and aliases) highest and |editors= lowest
+
local a = {}; -- authors list from |lastn= / |firstn= pairs or |vauthors=
 +
local Authors;
 +
local NameListFormat = A['NameListFormat'];
 +
local Collaboration = A['Collaboration'];
  
When looking for |authorn= / |editorn= parameters, test |xxxxor1= and |xxxxor2= (and all of their aliases); stops after the second
+
do -- to limit scope of selected
test which mimicks the test used in extract_names() when looking for a hole in the author name list.  There may be a better
+
local selected = select_author_editor_source (A['Vauthors'], A['Authors'], args, 'AuthorList');
way to do this, I just haven't discovered what that way is.
+
if 1 == selected then
 +
a, author_etal = extract_names (args, 'AuthorList'); -- fetch author list from |authorn= / |lastn= / |firstn=, |author-linkn=, and |author-maskn=
 +
elseif 2 == selected then
 +
NameListFormat = 'vanc'; -- override whatever |name-list-format= might be
 +
a, author_etal = parse_vauthors_veditors (args, args.vauthors, 'AuthorList'); -- fetch author list from |vauthors=, |author-linkn=, and |author-maskn=
 +
elseif 3 == selected then
 +
Authors = A['Authors']; -- use content of |authors=
 +
if 'authors' == A:ORIGIN('Authors') then -- but add a maint cat if the parameter is |authors=
 +
add_maint_cat ('authors'); -- because use of this parameter is discouraged; what to do about the aliases is a TODO:
 +
end
 +
end
 +
if is_set (Collaboration) then
 +
author_etal = true; -- so that |display-authors=etal not required
 +
end
 +
end
  
Emits an error message when more than one xxxxor name source is provided.
+
local Others = A['Others'];
  
In this function, vxxxxors = vauthors or veditors; xxxxors = authors or editors as appropriate.
+
local editor_etal;
 +
local e = {}; -- editors list from |editor-lastn= / |editor-firstn= pairs or |veditors=
 +
local Editors;
  
]]
+
do -- to limit scope of selected
 +
local selected = select_author_editor_source (A['Veditors'], A['Editors'], args, 'EditorList');
 +
if 1 == selected then
 +
e, editor_etal = extract_names (args, 'EditorList'); -- fetch editor list from |editorn= / |editor-lastn= / |editor-firstn=, |editor-linkn=, and |editor-maskn=
 +
elseif 2 == selected then
 +
NameListFormat = 'vanc'; -- override whatever |name-list-format= might be
 +
e, editor_etal = parse_vauthors_veditors (args, args.veditors, 'EditorList'); -- fetch editor list from |veditors=, |editor-linkn=, and |editor-maskn=
 +
elseif 3 == selected then
 +
Editors = A['Editors']; -- use content of |editors=
 +
add_maint_cat ('editors'); -- but add a maint cat because use of this parameter is discouraged
 +
end
 +
end
  
local function select_author_editor_source (vxxxxors, xxxxors, args, list_name)
+
local t = {}; -- translators list from |translator-lastn= / translator-firstn= pairs
local lastfirst = false;
+
local Translators; -- assembled translators name list
if select_one( args, cfg.aliases[list_name .. '-Last'], 'none', 1 ) or -- do this twice incase we have a first 1 without a last1
+
t = extract_names (args, 'TranslatorList'); -- fetch translator list from |translatorn= / |translator-lastn=, -firstn=, -linkn=, -maskn=
select_one( args, cfg.aliases[list_name .. '-Last'], 'none', 2 ) then
 
lastfirst=true;
 
end
 
  
if (is_set (vxxxxors) and true == lastfirst) or -- these are the three error conditions
+
local interviewers_list = {};
(is_set (vxxxxors) and is_set (xxxxors)) or
+
local Interviewers = A['Interviewers']
(true == lastfirst and is_set (xxxxors)) then
+
if is_set (Interviewers) then -- add a maint cat if the |interviewers= is used
local err_name;
+
add_maint_cat ('interviewers'); -- because use of this parameter is discouraged
if 'AuthorList' == list_name then -- figure out which name should be used in error message
+
else
err_name = 'author';
+
interviewers_list = extract_names (args, 'InterviewerList'); -- else, process preferred interviewers parameters
else
 
err_name = 'editor';
 
end
 
table.insert( z.message_tail, { set_error( 'redundant_parameters',
 
{err_name .. '-name-list parameters'}, true ) } ); -- add error message
 
 
end
 
end
  
if true == lastfirst then return 1 end; -- return a number indicating which author name source to use
+
local c = {}; -- contributors list from |contributor-lastn= / contributor-firstn= pairs
if is_set (vxxxxors) then return 2 end;
+
local Contributors; -- assembled contributors name list
if is_set (xxxxors) then return 3 end;
+
local Contribution = A['Contribution'];
return 1; -- no authors so return 1; this allows missing author name test to run in case there is a first without last
+
if in_array(config.CitationClass, {"book","citation"}) and not is_set(A['Periodical']) then -- |contributor= and |contribution= only supported in book cites
end
+
c = extract_names (args, 'ContributorList'); -- fetch contributor list from |contributorn= / |contributor-lastn=, -firstn=, -linkn=, -maskn=
 +
 +
if 0 < #c then
 +
if not is_set (Contribution) then -- |contributor= requires |contribution=
 +
table.insert( z.message_tail, { set_error( 'contributor_missing_required_param', 'contribution')}); -- add missing contribution error message
 +
c = {}; -- blank the contributors' table; it is used as a flag later
 +
end
 +
if 0 == #a then -- |contributor= requires |author=
 +
table.insert( z.message_tail, { set_error( 'contributor_missing_required_param', 'author')}); -- add missing author error message
 +
c = {}; -- blank the contributors' table; it is used as a flag later
 +
end
 +
end
 +
else -- if not a book cite
 +
if select_one (args, cfg.aliases['ContributorList-Last'], 'redundant_parameters', 1 ) then -- are there contributor name list parameters?
 +
table.insert( z.message_tail, { set_error( 'contributor_ignored')}); -- add contributor ignored error message
 +
end
 +
Contribution = nil; -- unset
 +
end
  
 +
if not is_valid_parameter_value (NameListFormat, 'name-list-format', cfg.keywords['name-list-format']) then -- only accepted value for this parameter is 'vanc'
 +
NameListFormat = ''; -- anything else, set to empty string
 +
end
  
--[[--------------------------< I S _ V A L I D _ P A R A M E T E R _ V A L U E >------------------------------
+
local Year = A['Year'];
 
+
local PublicationDate = A['PublicationDate'];
This function is used to validate a parameter's assigned value for those parameters that have only a limited number
+
local OrigYear = A['OrigYear'];
of allowable values (yes, y, true, no, etc).  When the parameter value has not been assigned a value (missing or empty
+
local Date = A['Date'];
in the source template) the function refurns true.  If the parameter value is one of the list of allowed values returns
+
local LayDate = A['LayDate'];
true; else, emits an error message and returns false.
+
------------------------------------------------- Get title data
 +
local Title = A['Title'];
 +
local ScriptTitle = A['ScriptTitle'];
 +
local BookTitle = A['BookTitle'];
 +
local Conference = A['Conference'];
 +
local TransTitle = A['TransTitle'];
 +
local TitleNote = A['TitleNote'];
 +
local TitleLink = A['TitleLink'];
 +
link_title_ok (TitleLink, A:ORIGIN ('TitleLink'), Title, 'title'); -- check for wikimarkup in |title-link= or wikimarkup in |title= when |title-link= is set
  
]]
+
local Chapter = A['Chapter'];
 +
local ScriptChapter = A['ScriptChapter'];
 +
local ChapterLink -- = A['ChapterLink']; -- deprecated as a parameter but still used internally by cite episode
 +
local TransChapter = A['TransChapter'];
 +
local TitleType = A['TitleType'];
 +
local Degree = A['Degree'];
 +
local Docket = A['Docket'];
 +
local ArchiveFormat = A['ArchiveFormat'];
  
local function is_valid_parameter_value (value, name, possible)
+
local ArchiveDate;
if not is_set (value) then
+
local ArchiveURL;
return true; -- an empty parameter is ok
 
elseif in_array(value:lower(), possible) then
 
return true;
 
else
 
table.insert( z.message_tail, { set_error( 'invalid_param_val', {name, value}, true ) } ); -- not an allowed value so add error message
 
return false
 
end
 
end
 
  
 +
ArchiveURL, ArchiveDate = archive_url_check (A['ArchiveURL'], A['ArchiveDate'])
 +
 +
local DeadURL = A['DeadURL']
 +
if not is_valid_parameter_value (DeadURL, 'dead-url', cfg.keywords ['deadurl']) then -- set in config.defaults to 'yes'
 +
DeadURL = ''; -- anything else, set to empty string
 +
end
  
--[[--------------------------< T E R M I N A T E _ N A M E _ L I S T >----------------------------------------
+
local URL = A['URL']
 +
local URLorigin = A:ORIGIN('URL'); -- get name of parameter that holds URL
 +
local ChapterURL = A['ChapterURL'];
 +
local ChapterURLorigin = A:ORIGIN('ChapterURL'); -- get name of parameter that holds ChapterURL
 +
local ConferenceFormat = A['ConferenceFormat'];
 +
local ConferenceURL = A['ConferenceURL'];
 +
local ConferenceURLorigin = A:ORIGIN('ConferenceURL'); -- get name of parameter that holds ConferenceURL
 +
local Periodical = A['Periodical'];
 +
local Periodical_origin = A:ORIGIN('Periodical'); -- get the name of the periodical parameter
  
This function terminates a name list (author, contributor, editor) with a separator character (sepc) and a space
+
local Series = A['Series'];
when the last character is not a sepc character or when the last three characters are not sepc followed by two
+
closing square brackets (close of a wikilink).  When either of these is true, the name_list is terminated with a
+
local Volume;
single space character.
+
local Issue;
 +
local Page;
 +
local Pages;
 +
local At;
  
]]
+
if in_array (config.CitationClass, cfg.templates_using_volume) then
 
+
Volume = A['Volume'];
local function terminate_name_list (name_list, sepc)
+
end
if (string.sub (name_list,-1,-1) == sepc) or (string.sub (name_list,-3,-1) == sepc .. ']]') then -- if last name in list ends with sepc char
+
-- conference & map books do not support issue
return name_list .. " "; -- don't add another
+
if in_array (config.CitationClass, cfg.templates_using_issue) and not (in_array (config.CitationClass, {'conference', 'map'}) and not is_set (Periodical))then
else
+
Issue = hyphen_to_dash (A['Issue']);
return name_list .. sepc .. ' '; -- otherwise terninate the name list
+
end
 +
local Position = '';
 +
if not in_array (config.CitationClass, cfg.templates_not_using_page) then
 +
Page = A['Page'];
 +
Pages = hyphen_to_dash (A['Pages']);
 +
At = A['At'];
 
end
 
end
end
 
  
 +
local Edition = A['Edition'];
 +
local PublicationPlace = A['PublicationPlace']
 +
local Place = A['Place'];
 +
 +
local PublisherName = A['PublisherName'];
 +
local RegistrationRequired = A['RegistrationRequired'];
 +
if not is_valid_parameter_value (RegistrationRequired, 'registration', cfg.keywords ['yes_true_y']) then
 +
RegistrationRequired=nil;
 +
end
 +
 +
local SubscriptionRequired = A['SubscriptionRequired'];
 +
if not is_valid_parameter_value (SubscriptionRequired, 'subscription', cfg.keywords ['yes_true_y']) then
 +
SubscriptionRequired=nil;
 +
end
  
--[[-------------------------< F O R M A T _ V O L U M E _ I S S U E >----------------------------------------
+
local UrlAccess = A['UrlAccess'];
 
+
if not is_valid_parameter_value (UrlAccess, 'url-access', cfg.keywords ['url-access']) then
returns the concatenation of the formatted volume and issue parameters as a single string; or formatted volume
+
UrlAccess = nil;
or formatted issue, or an empty string if neither are set.
+
end
 +
if not is_set(URL) and is_set(UrlAccess) then
 +
UrlAccess = nil;
 +
table.insert( z.message_tail, { set_error( 'param_access_requires_param', {'url'}, true ) } );
 +
end
  
]]
+
if is_set (UrlAccess) and is_set (SubscriptionRequired) then -- while not aliases, these are much the same so if both are set
+
table.insert( z.message_tail, { set_error( 'redundant_parameters', {wrap_style ('parameter', 'url-access') .. ' and ' .. wrap_style ('parameter', 'subscription')}, true ) } ); -- add error message
local function format_volume_issue (volume, issue, cite_class, origin, sepc, lower)
+
SubscriptionRequired = nil; -- unset; prefer |access= over |subscription=
if not is_set (volume) and not is_set (issue) then
 
return '';
 
end
 
 
if 'magazine' == cite_class or (in_array (cite_class, {'citation', 'map'}) and 'magazine' == origin) then
 
if is_set (volume) and is_set (issue) then
 
return wrap_msg ('vol-no', {sepc, volume, issue}, lower);
 
elseif is_set (volume) then
 
return wrap_msg ('vol', {sepc, volume}, lower);
 
else
 
return wrap_msg ('issue', {sepc, issue}, lower);
 
 
end
 
end
end
+
if is_set (UrlAccess) and is_set (RegistrationRequired) then -- these are not the same but contradictory so if both are set
+
table.insert( z.message_tail, { set_error( 'redundant_parameters', {wrap_style ('parameter', 'url-access') .. ' and ' .. wrap_style ('parameter', 'registration')}, true ) } ); -- add error message
local vol = '';
+
RegistrationRequired = nil; -- unset; prefer |access= over |registration=
 
if is_set (volume) then
 
if (4 < mw.ustring.len(volume)) then
 
vol = substitute (cfg.messages['j-vol'], {sepc, volume});
 
else
 
vol = wrap_style ('vol-bold', hyphen_to_dash(volume));
 
 
end
 
end
end
 
if is_set (issue) then
 
return vol .. substitute (cfg.messages['j-issue'], issue);
 
end
 
return vol;
 
end
 
  
 +
local ChapterUrlAccess = A['ChapterUrlAccess'];
 +
if not is_valid_parameter_value (ChapterUrlAccess, 'chapter-url-access', cfg.keywords ['url-access']) then -- same as url-access
 +
ChapterUrlAccess = nil;
 +
end
 +
if not is_set(ChapterURL) and is_set(ChapterUrlAccess) then
 +
ChapterUrlAccess = nil;
 +
table.insert( z.message_tail, { set_error( 'param_access_requires_param', {'chapter-url'}, true ) } );
 +
end
  
--[[-------------------------< F O R M A T _ P A G E S _ S H E E T S >-----------------------------------------
+
local Via = A['Via'];
 +
local AccessDate = A['AccessDate'];
 +
local Agency = A['Agency'];
  
adds static text to one of |page(s)= or |sheet(s)= values and returns it with all of the others set to empty strings.
+
local Language = A['Language'];
The return order is:
+
local Format = A['Format'];
page, pages, sheet, sheets
+
local ChapterFormat = A['ChapterFormat'];
 +
local DoiBroken = A['DoiBroken'];
 +
local ID = A['ID'];
 +
local ASINTLD = A['ASINTLD'];
 +
local IgnoreISBN = A['IgnoreISBN'];
 +
if not is_valid_parameter_value (IgnoreISBN, 'ignore-isbn-error', cfg.keywords ['yes_true_y']) then
 +
IgnoreISBN = nil; -- anything else, set to empty string
 +
end
 +
local Embargo = A['Embargo'];
 +
local Class = A['Class']; -- arxiv class identifier
  
Singular has priority over plural when both are provided.
+
local ID_list = extract_ids( args );
 +
local ID_access_levels = extract_id_access_levels( args, ID_list );
  
]]
+
local Quote = A['Quote'];
 +
 
 +
local LayFormat = A['LayFormat'];
 +
local LayURL = A['LayURL'];
 +
local LaySource = A['LaySource'];
 +
local Transcript = A['Transcript'];
 +
local TranscriptFormat = A['TranscriptFormat'];
 +
local TranscriptURL = A['TranscriptURL']
 +
local TranscriptURLorigin = A:ORIGIN('TranscriptURL'); -- get name of parameter that holds TranscriptURL
  
local function format_pages_sheets (page, pages, sheet, sheets, cite_class, origin, sepc, nopp, lower)
+
local LastAuthorAmp = A['LastAuthorAmp'];
if 'map' == cite_class then -- only cite map supports sheet(s) as in-source locators
+
if not is_valid_parameter_value (LastAuthorAmp, 'last-author-amp', cfg.keywords ['yes_true_y']) then
if is_set (sheet) then
+
LastAuthorAmp = nil; -- set to empty string
if 'journal' == origin then
 
return '', '', wrap_msg ('j-sheet', sheet, lower), '';
 
else
 
return '', '', wrap_msg ('sheet', {sepc, sheet}, lower), '';
 
end
 
elseif is_set (sheets) then
 
if 'journal' == origin then
 
return '', '', '', wrap_msg ('j-sheets', sheets, lower);
 
else
 
return '', '', '', wrap_msg ('sheets', {sepc, sheets}, lower);
 
end
 
 
end
 
end
end
 
  
local is_journal = 'journal' == cite_class or (in_array (cite_class, {'citation', 'map'}) and 'journal' == origin);
+
local no_tracking_cats = A['NoTracking'];
 +
if not is_valid_parameter_value (no_tracking_cats, 'no-tracking', cfg.keywords ['yes_true_y']) then
 +
no_tracking_cats = nil; -- set to empty string
 +
end
  
if is_set (page) then
+
--local variables that are not cs1 parameters
if is_journal then
+
local use_lowercase; -- controls capitalization of certain static text
return substitute (cfg.messages['j-page(s)'], page), '', '', '';
+
local this_page = mw.title.getCurrentTitle(); -- also used for COinS and for language
elseif not nopp then
+
local anchor_year; -- used in the CITEREF identifier
return substitute (cfg.messages['p-prefix'], {sepc, page}), '', '', '';
+
local COinS_date = {}; -- holds date info extracted from |date= for the COinS metadata by Module:Date verification
else
+
 
return substitute (cfg.messages['nopp'], {sepc, page}), '', '', '';
+
local DF = A['DF']; -- date format set in cs1|2 template
 +
if not is_valid_parameter_value (DF, 'df', cfg.keywords['date-format']) then -- validate reformatting keyword
 +
DF = ''; -- not valid, set to empty string
 +
end
 +
 
 +
local sepc; -- separator between citation elements for CS1 a period, for CS2, a comma
 +
local PostScript;
 +
local Ref;
 +
sepc, PostScript, Ref = set_style (Mode:lower(), A['PostScript'], A['Ref'], config.CitationClass);
 +
use_lowercase = ( sepc == ',' ); -- used to control capitalization for certain static text
 +
 
 +
--check this page to see if it is in one of the namespaces that cs1 is not supposed to add to the error categories
 +
if not is_set (no_tracking_cats) then -- ignore if we are already not going to categorize this page
 +
if in_array (this_page.nsText, cfg.uncategorized_namespaces) then
 +
no_tracking_cats = "true"; -- set no_tracking_cats
 
end
 
end
elseif is_set(pages) then
+
for _,v in ipairs (cfg.uncategorized_subpages) do -- cycle through page name patterns
if is_journal then
+
if this_page.text:match (v) then -- test page name against each pattern
return substitute (cfg.messages['j-page(s)'], pages), '', '', '';
+
no_tracking_cats = "true"; -- set no_tracking_cats
elseif tonumber(pages) ~= nil and not nopp then -- if pages is only digits, assume a single page number
+
break; -- bail out if one is found
return '', substitute (cfg.messages['p-prefix'], {sepc, pages}), '', '';
+
end
elseif not nopp then
 
return '', substitute (cfg.messages['pp-prefix'], {sepc, pages}), '', '';
 
else
 
return '', substitute (cfg.messages['nopp'], {sepc, pages}), '', '';
 
 
end
 
end
 
end
 
end
 
return '', '', '', ''; -- return empty strings
 
end
 
  
--[[--------------------------< C I T A T I O N 0 >------------------------------------------------------------
+
-- check for extra |page=, |pages= or |at= parameters. (also sheet and sheets while we're at it)
 +
select_one( args, {'page', 'p', 'pp', 'pages', 'at', 'sheet', 'sheets'}, 'redundant_parameters' ); -- this is a dummy call simply to get the error message and category
  
This is the main function doing the majority of the citation formatting.
+
local NoPP = A['NoPP']
 +
if is_set (NoPP) and is_valid_parameter_value (NoPP, 'nopp', cfg.keywords ['yes_true_y']) then
 +
NoPP = true;
 +
else
 +
NoPP = nil; -- unset, used as a flag later
 +
end
  
]]
+
if is_set(Page) then
 +
if is_set(Pages) or is_set(At) then
 +
Pages = ''; -- unset the others
 +
At = '';
 +
end
 +
extra_text_in_page_check (Page); -- add this page to maint cat if |page= value begins with what looks like p. or pp.
 +
elseif is_set(Pages) then
 +
if is_set(At) then
 +
At = ''; -- unset
 +
end
 +
extra_text_in_page_check (Pages); -- add this page to maint cat if |pages= value begins with what looks like p. or pp.
 +
end
  
local function citation0( config, args)
+
-- both |publication-place= and |place= (|location=) allowed if different
--[[  
+
if not is_set(PublicationPlace) and is_set(Place) then
Load Input Parameters
+
PublicationPlace = Place; -- promote |place= (|location=) to |publication-place
The argument_wrapper facilitates the mapping of multiple aliases to single internal variable.
+
end
]]
+
local A = argument_wrapper( args );
+
if PublicationPlace == Place then Place = ''; end -- don't need both if they are the same
local i
+
 +
--[[
 +
Parameter remapping for cite encyclopedia:
 +
When the citation has these parameters:
 +
|encyclopedia and |title then map |title to |article and |encyclopedia to |title
 +
|encyclopedia and |article then map |encyclopedia to |title
 +
|encyclopedia then map |encyclopedia to |title
 +
 +
|trans-title maps to |trans-chapter when |title is re-mapped
 +
|url maps to |chapterurl when |title is remapped
 +
 +
All other combinations of |encyclopedia, |title, and |article are not modified
 +
 +
]]
  
-- Pick out the relevant fields from the arguments.  Different citation templates
+
local Encyclopedia = A['Encyclopedia'];
-- define different field names for the same underlying things.
 
local author_etal;
 
local a = {}; -- authors list from |lastn= / |firstn= pairs or |vauthors=
 
local Authors;
 
local NameListFormat = A['NameListFormat'];
 
  
do -- to limit scope of selected
+
if ( config.CitationClass == "encyclopaedia" ) or ( config.CitationClass == "citation" and is_set (Encyclopedia)) then -- test code for citation
local selected = select_author_editor_source (A['Vauthors'], A['Authors'], args, 'AuthorList');
+
if is_set(Periodical) then -- Periodical is set when |encyclopedia is set
if 1 == selected then
+
if is_set(Title) or is_set (ScriptTitle) then
a, author_etal = extract_names (args, 'AuthorList'); -- fetch author list from |authorn= / |lastn= / |firstn=, |author-linkn=, and |author-maskn=
+
if not is_set(Chapter) then
elseif 2 == selected then
+
Chapter = Title; -- |encyclopedia and |title are set so map |title to |article and |encyclopedia to |title
NameListFormat = 'vanc'; -- override whatever |name-list-format= might be
+
ScriptChapter = ScriptTitle;
a, author_etal = parse_vauthors_veditors (args, args.vauthors, 'AuthorList'); -- fetch author list from |vauthors=, |author-linkn=, and |author-maskn=
+
TransChapter = TransTitle;
elseif 3 == selected then
+
ChapterURL = URL;
Authors = A['Authors']; -- use content of |authors=
+
ChapterUrlAccess = UrlAccess;
end
 
end
 
  
local Coauthors = A['Coauthors'];
+
if not is_set (ChapterURL) and is_set (TitleLink) then
local Others = A['Others'];
+
Chapter = make_wikilink (TitleLink, Chapter);
 
+
end
local editor_etal;
+
Title = Periodical;
local e = {}; -- editors list from |editor-lastn= / |editor-firstn= pairs or |veditors=
+
ChapterFormat = Format;
local Editors;
+
Periodical = ''; -- redundant so unset
 
+
TransTitle = '';
do -- to limit scope of selected
+
URL = '';
local selected = select_author_editor_source (A['Veditors'], A['Editors'], args, 'EditorList');
+
Format = '';
if 1 == selected then
+
TitleLink = '';
e, editor_etal = extract_names (args, 'EditorList'); -- fetch editor list from |editorn= / |editor-lastn= / |editor-firstn=, |editor-linkn=, and |editor-maskn=
+
ScriptTitle = '';
elseif 2 == selected then
+
end
NameListFormat = 'vanc'; -- override whatever |name-list-format= might be
+
else -- |title not set
e, editor_etal = parse_vauthors_veditors (args, args.veditors, 'EditorList'); -- fetch editor list from |veditors=, |editor-linkn=, and |editor-maskn=
+
Title = Periodical; -- |encyclopedia set and |article set or not set so map |encyclopedia to |title
elseif 3 == selected then
+
Periodical = ''; -- redundant so unset
Editors = A['Editors']; -- use content of |editors=
+
end
 
end
 
end
 
end
 
end
  
local t = {}; -- translators list from |translator-lastn= / translator-firstn= pairs
+
-- Special case for cite techreport.
local Translators; -- assembled translators name list
+
if (config.CitationClass == "techreport") then -- special case for cite techreport
t = extract_names (args, 'TranslatorList'); -- fetch translator list from |translatorn= / |translator-lastn=, -firstn=, -linkn=, -maskn=
+
if is_set(A['Number']) then -- cite techreport uses 'number', which other citations alias to 'issue'
+
if not is_set(ID) then -- can we use ID for the "number"?
local c = {}; -- contributors list from |contributor-lastn= / contributor-firstn= pairs
+
ID = A['Number']; -- yes, use it
local Contributors; -- assembled contributors name list
+
else -- ID has a value so emit error message
local Contribution = A['Contribution'];
+
table.insert( z.message_tail, { set_error('redundant_parameters', {wrap_style ('parameter', 'id') .. ' and ' .. wrap_style ('parameter', 'number')}, true )});
if in_array(config.CitationClass, {"book","citation"}) and not is_set(A['Periodical']) then -- |contributor= and |contribution= only supported in book cites
+
end
c = extract_names (args, 'ContributorList'); -- fetch contributor list from |contributorn= / |contributor-lastn=, -firstn=, -linkn=, -maskn=
+
end
 
if 0 < #c then
 
if not is_set (Contribution) then -- |contributor= requires |contribution=
 
table.insert( z.message_tail, { set_error( 'contributor_missing_required_param', 'contribution')}); -- add missing contribution error message
 
c = {}; -- blank the contributors' table; it is used as a flag later
 
end
 
if 0 == #a then -- |contributor= requires |author=
 
table.insert( z.message_tail, { set_error( 'contributor_missing_required_param', 'author')}); -- add missing author error message
 
c = {}; -- blank the contributors' table; it is used as a flag later
 
end
 
end
 
else -- if not a book cite
 
if select_one (args, cfg.aliases['ContributorList-Last'], 'redundant_parameters', 1 ) then -- are there contributor name list parameters?
 
table.insert( z.message_tail, { set_error( 'contributor_ignored')}); -- add contributor ignored error message
 
end
 
Contribution = nil; -- unset
 
 
end
 
end
  
if not is_valid_parameter_value (NameListFormat, 'name-list-format', cfg.keywords['name-list-format']) then -- only accepted value for this parameter is 'vanc'
+
-- special case for cite mailing list
NameListFormat = ''; -- anything else, set to empty string
+
if (config.CitationClass == "mailinglist") then
 +
Periodical = A ['MailingList'];
 +
elseif 'mailinglist' == A:ORIGIN('Periodical') then
 +
Periodical = ''; -- unset because mailing list is only used for cite mailing list
 
end
 
end
  
local Year = A['Year'];
+
-- Account for the oddity that is {{cite conference}}, before generation of COinS data.
local PublicationDate = A['PublicationDate'];
+
if 'conference' == config.CitationClass then
local OrigYear = A['OrigYear'];
+
if is_set(BookTitle) then
local Date = A['Date'];
+
Chapter = Title;
local LayDate = A['LayDate'];
+
-- ChapterLink = TitleLink; -- |chapterlink= is deprecated
------------------------------------------------- Get title data
+
ChapterURL = URL;
local Title = A['Title'];
+
ChapterUrlAccess = UrlAccess;
local ScriptTitle = A['ScriptTitle'];
+
ChapterURLorigin = URLorigin;
local BookTitle = A['BookTitle'];
+
URLorigin = '';
local Conference = A['Conference'];
+
ChapterFormat = Format;
local TransTitle = A['TransTitle'];
+
TransChapter = TransTitle;
local TitleNote = A['TitleNote'];
+
Title = BookTitle;
local TitleLink = A['TitleLink'];
+
Format = '';
if is_set (TitleLink) and false == link_param_ok (TitleLink) then
+
-- TitleLink = '';
table.insert( z.message_tail, { set_error( 'bad_paramlink', A:ORIGIN('TitleLink'))}); -- url or wikilink in |title-link=;
+
TransTitle = '';
 +
URL = '';
 
end
 
end
 +
elseif 'speech' ~= config.CitationClass then
 +
Conference = ''; -- not cite conference or cite speech so make sure this is empty string
 +
end
  
local Chapter = A['Chapter'];
+
-- cite map oddities
local ScriptChapter = A['ScriptChapter'];
+
local Cartography = "";
local ChapterLink -- = A['ChapterLink']; -- deprecated as a parameter but still used internally by cite episode
+
local Scale = "";
local TransChapter = A['TransChapter'];
+
local Sheet = A['Sheet'] or '';
local TitleType = A['TitleType'];
+
local Sheets = A['Sheets'] or '';
local Degree = A['Degree'];
+
if config.CitationClass == "map" then
local Docket = A['Docket'];
+
Chapter = A['Map'];
local ArchiveFormat = A['ArchiveFormat'];
+
ChapterURL = A['MapURL'];
local ArchiveURL = A['ArchiveURL'];
+
ChapterUrlAccess = UrlAccess;
local URL = A['URL']
+
TransChapter = A['TransMap'];
local URLorigin = A:ORIGIN('URL'); -- get name of parameter that holds URL
+
ChapterURLorigin = A:ORIGIN('MapURL');
local ChapterURL = A['ChapterURL'];
+
ChapterFormat = A['MapFormat'];
local ChapterURLorigin = A:ORIGIN('ChapterURL'); -- get name of parameter that holds ChapterURL
+
local ConferenceFormat = A['ConferenceFormat'];
+
Cartography = A['Cartography'];
local ConferenceURL = A['ConferenceURL'];
+
if is_set( Cartography ) then
local ConferenceURLorigin = A:ORIGIN('ConferenceURL'); -- get name of parameter that holds ConferenceURL
+
Cartography = sepc .. " " .. wrap_msg ('cartography', Cartography, use_lowercase);
local Periodical = A['Periodical'];
+
end
local Periodical_origin = A:ORIGIN('Periodical'); -- get the name of the periodical parameter
+
Scale = A['Scale'];
 +
if is_set( Scale ) then
 +
Scale = sepc .. " " .. Scale;
 +
end
 +
end
  
local Series = A['Series'];
+
-- Account for the oddities that are {{cite episode}} and {{cite serial}}, before generation of COinS data.
+
if 'episode' == config.CitationClass or 'serial' == config.CitationClass then
local Volume;
+
local AirDate = A['AirDate'];
local Issue;
+
local SeriesLink = A['SeriesLink'];
local Page;
 
local Pages;
 
local At;
 
  
if in_array (config.CitationClass, cfg.templates_using_volume) and not ('conference' == config.CitationClass and not is_set (Periodical)) then
+
link_title_ok (SeriesLink, A:ORIGIN ('SeriesLink'), Series, 'series'); -- check for wikimarkup in |series-link= or wikimarkup in |series= when |series-link= is set
Volume = A['Volume'];
 
end
 
if in_array (config.CitationClass, cfg.templates_using_issue) and not (in_array (config.CitationClass, {'conference', 'map'}) and not is_set (Periodical))then
 
Issue = A['Issue'];
 
end
 
local Position = '';
 
if not in_array (config.CitationClass, cfg.templates_not_using_page) then
 
Page = A['Page'];
 
Pages = hyphen_to_dash( A['Pages'] );
 
At = A['At'];
 
end
 
  
local Edition = A['Edition'];
+
local Network = A['Network'];
local PublicationPlace = A['PublicationPlace']
+
local Station = A['Station'];
local Place = A['Place'];
+
local s, n = {}, {};
+
-- do common parameters first
local PublisherName = A['PublisherName'];
+
if is_set(Network) then table.insert(n, Network); end
local RegistrationRequired = A['RegistrationRequired'];
+
if is_set(Station) then table.insert(n, Station); end
if not is_valid_parameter_value (RegistrationRequired, 'registration', cfg.keywords ['yes_true_y']) then
+
ID = table.concat(n, sepc .. ' ');
RegistrationRequired=nil;
+
end
+
if not is_set (Date) and is_set (AirDate) then -- promote airdate to date
local SubscriptionRequired = A['SubscriptionRequired'];
+
Date = AirDate;
if not is_valid_parameter_value (SubscriptionRequired, 'subscription', cfg.keywords ['yes_true_y']) then
 
SubscriptionRequired=nil;
 
 
end
 
end
  
local Via = A['Via'];
+
if 'episode' == config.CitationClass then -- handle the oddities that are strictly {{cite episode}}
local AccessDate = A['AccessDate'];
+
local Season = A['Season'];
local ArchiveDate = A['ArchiveDate'];
+
local SeriesNumber = A['SeriesNumber'];
local Agency = A['Agency'];
 
local DeadURL = A['DeadURL']
 
if not is_valid_parameter_value (DeadURL, 'dead-url', cfg.keywords ['deadurl']) then -- set in config.defaults to 'yes'
 
DeadURL = ''; -- anything else, set to empty string
 
end
 
  
local Language = A['Language'];
+
if is_set (Season) and is_set (SeriesNumber) then -- these are mutually exclusive so if both are set
local Format = A['Format'];
+
table.insert( z.message_tail, { set_error( 'redundant_parameters', {wrap_style ('parameter', 'season') .. ' and ' .. wrap_style ('parameter', 'seriesno')}, true ) } ); -- add error message
local ChapterFormat = A['ChapterFormat'];
+
SeriesNumber = ''; -- unset; prefer |season= over |seriesno=
local DoiBroken = A['DoiBroken'];
+
end
local ID = A['ID'];
+
-- assemble a table of parts concatenated later into Series
local ASINTLD = A['ASINTLD'];
+
if is_set(Season) then table.insert(s, wrap_msg ('season', Season, use_lowercase)); end
local IgnoreISBN = A['IgnoreISBN'];
+
if is_set(SeriesNumber) then table.insert(s, wrap_msg ('series', SeriesNumber, use_lowercase)); end
if not is_valid_parameter_value (IgnoreISBN, 'ignore-isbn-error', cfg.keywords ['yes_true_y']) then
+
if is_set(Issue) then table.insert(s, wrap_msg ('episode', Issue, use_lowercase)); end
IgnoreISBN = nil; -- anything else, set to empty string
+
Issue = ''; -- unset because this is not a unique parameter
end
+
local Embargo = A['Embargo'];
+
Chapter = Title; -- promote title parameters to chapter
local Class = A['Class']; -- arxiv class identifier
+
ScriptChapter = ScriptTitle;
 
+
ChapterLink = TitleLink; -- alias episodelink
local ID_list = extract_ids( args );
+
TransChapter = TransTitle;
 +
ChapterURL = URL;
 +
ChapterUrlAccess = UrlAccess;
 +
ChapterURLorigin = A:ORIGIN('URL');
 +
 +
Title = Series; -- promote series to title
 +
TitleLink = SeriesLink;
 +
Series = table.concat(s, sepc .. ' '); -- this is concatenation of season, seriesno, episode number
  
local Quote = A['Quote'];
+
if is_set (ChapterLink) and not is_set (ChapterURL) then -- link but not URL
 +
Chapter = make_wikilink (ChapterLink, Chapter);
 +
elseif is_set (ChapterLink) and is_set (ChapterURL) then -- if both are set, URL links episode;
 +
Series = make_wikilink (ChapterLink, Series);
 +
end
 +
URL = ''; -- unset
 +
TransTitle = '';
 +
ScriptTitle = '';
 +
 +
else -- now oddities that are cite serial
 +
Issue = ''; -- unset because this parameter no longer supported by the citation/core version of cite serial
 +
Chapter = A['Episode']; -- TODO: make |episode= available to cite episode someday?
 +
if is_set (Series) and is_set (SeriesLink) then
 +
Series = make_wikilink (SeriesLink, Series);
 +
end
 +
Series = wrap_style ('italic-title', Series); -- series is italicized
 +
end
 +
end
 +
-- end of {{cite episode}} stuff
 +
 
 +
-- Account for the oddities that are {{cite arxiv}}, {{cite biorxiv}}, {{cite citeseerx}}, before generation of COinS data.
 +
do
 +
if in_array (config.CitationClass, {'arxiv', 'biorxiv', 'citeseerx'}) then
 +
if not is_set (ID_list[config.CitationClass:upper()]) then -- |arxiv= or |eprint= required for cite arxiv; |biorxiv= & |citeseerx= required for their templates
 +
table.insert( z.message_tail, { set_error( config.CitationClass .. '_missing', {}, true ) } ); -- add error message
 +
end
 +
 +
if 'arxiv' == config.CitationClass then
 +
Periodical = 'arXiv'; -- set to arXiv for COinS; after that, must be set to empty string
 +
end
  
local LayFormat = A['LayFormat'];
+
if 'biorxiv' == config.CitationClass then
local LayURL = A['LayURL'];
+
Periodical = 'bioRxiv'; -- set to bioRxiv for COinS; after that, must be set to empty string
local LaySource = A['LaySource'];
+
end
local Transcript = A['Transcript'];
 
local TranscriptFormat = A['TranscriptFormat'];
 
local TranscriptURL = A['TranscriptURL']
 
local TranscriptURLorigin = A:ORIGIN('TranscriptURL'); -- get name of parameter that holds TranscriptURL
 
  
local LastAuthorAmp = A['LastAuthorAmp'];
+
if 'citeseerx' == config.CitationClass then
if not is_valid_parameter_value (LastAuthorAmp, 'last-author-amp', cfg.keywords ['yes_true_y']) then
+
Periodical = 'CiteSeerX'; -- set to CiteSeerX for COinS; after that, must be set to empty string
LastAuthorAmp = nil; -- set to empty string
+
end
 
end
 
end
local no_tracking_cats = A['NoTracking'];
+
end
if not is_valid_parameter_value (no_tracking_cats, 'no-tracking', cfg.keywords ['yes_true_y']) then
+
 
no_tracking_cats = nil; -- set to empty string
+
-- handle type parameter for those CS1 citations that have default values
 +
if in_array(config.CitationClass, {"AV-media-notes", "interview", "mailinglist", "map", "podcast", "pressrelease", "report", "techreport", "thesis"}) then
 +
TitleType = set_titletype (config.CitationClass, TitleType);
 +
if is_set(Degree) and "Thesis" == TitleType then -- special case for cite thesis
 +
TitleType = Degree .. ' ' .. cfg.title_types ['thesis']:lower();
 
end
 
end
 +
end
  
--these are used by cite interview
+
if is_set(TitleType) then -- if type parameter is specified
local Callsign = A['Callsign'];
+
TitleType = substitute( cfg.messages['type'], TitleType); -- display it in parentheses
local City = A['City'];
+
-- TODO: Hack on TitleType to fix bunched parentheses problem
local Program = A['Program'];
+
end
  
--local variables that are not cs1 parameters
+
-- legacy: promote PublicationDate to Date if neither Date nor Year are set.
local use_lowercase; -- controls capitalization of certain static text
+
local Date_origin; -- to hold the name of parameter promoted to Date; required for date error messaging
local this_page = mw.title.getCurrentTitle(); -- also used for COinS and for language
 
local anchor_year; -- used in the CITEREF identifier
 
local COinS_date = {}; -- holds date info extracted from |date= for the COinS metadata by Module:Date verification
 
  
-- set default parameter values defined by |mode= parameter.  If |mode= is empty or omitted, use CitationClass to set these values
+
if not is_set (Date) then
local Mode = A['Mode'];
+
Date = Year; -- promote Year to Date
if not is_valid_parameter_value (Mode, 'mode', cfg.keywords['mode']) then
+
Year = nil; -- make nil so Year as empty string isn't used for CITEREF
Mode = '';
+
if not is_set (Date) and is_set(PublicationDate) then -- use PublicationDate when |date= and |year= are not set
 +
Date = PublicationDate; -- promote PublicationDate to Date
 +
PublicationDate = ''; -- unset, no longer needed
 +
Date_origin = A:ORIGIN('PublicationDate'); -- save the name of the promoted parameter
 +
else
 +
Date_origin = A:ORIGIN('Year'); -- save the name of the promoted parameter
 +
end
 +
else
 +
Date_origin = A:ORIGIN('Date'); -- not a promotion; name required for error messaging
 
end
 
end
local sepc; -- separator between citation elements for CS1 a period, for CS2, a comma
 
local PostScript;
 
local Ref;
 
sepc, PostScript, Ref = set_style (Mode:lower(), A['PostScript'], A['Ref'], config.CitationClass);
 
use_lowercase = ( sepc == ',' ); -- used to control capitalization for certain static text
 
  
--check this page to see if it is in one of the namespaces that cs1 is not supposed to add to the error categories
+
if PublicationDate == Date then PublicationDate = ''; end -- if PublicationDate is same as Date, don't display in rendered citation
if not is_set (no_tracking_cats) then -- ignore if we are already not going to categorize this page
+
 
if in_array (this_page.nsText, cfg.uncategorized_namespaces) then
+
--[[
no_tracking_cats = "true"; -- set no_tracking_cats
+
Go test all of the date-holding parameters for valid MOS:DATE format and make sure that dates are real dates. This must be done before we do COinS because here is where
 +
we get the date used in the metadata.
 +
 +
Date validation supporting code is in Module:Citation/CS1/Date_validation
 +
]]
 +
do -- create defined block to contain local variables error_message, date_parameters_list, mismatch
 +
local error_message = '';
 +
-- AirDate has been promoted to Date so not necessary to check it
 +
local date_parameters_list = {
 +
['access-date'] = {val=AccessDate, name=A:ORIGIN ('AccessDate')},
 +
['archive-date'] = {val=ArchiveDate, name=A:ORIGIN ('ArchiveDate')},
 +
['date'] = {val=Date, name=Date_origin},
 +
['doi-broken-date'] = {val=DoiBroken, name=A:ORIGIN ('DoiBroken')},
 +
['embargo'] = {val=Embargo, name=A:ORIGIN ('Embargo')},
 +
['lay-date'] = {val=LayDate, name=A:ORIGIN ('LayDate')},
 +
['publication-date'] ={val=PublicationDate, name=A:ORIGIN ('PublicationDate')},
 +
['year'] = {val=Year, name=A:ORIGIN ('Year')},
 +
};
 +
anchor_year, Embargo, error_message = dates(date_parameters_list, COinS_date);
 +
 
 +
-- start temporary Julian / Gregorian calendar uncertainty categorization
 +
if COinS_date.inter_cal_cat then
 +
add_prop_cat ('jul_greg_uncertainty');
 
end
 
end
for _,v in ipairs (cfg.uncategorized_subpages) do -- cycle through page name patterns
+
-- end temporary Julian / Gregorian calendar uncertainty categorization
if this_page.text:match (v) then -- test page name against each pattern
+
 
no_tracking_cats = "true"; -- set no_tracking_cats
+
if is_set (Year) and is_set (Date) then -- both |date= and |year= not normally needed;
break; -- bail out if one is found
+
local mismatch = year_date_check (Year, Date)
 +
if 0 == mismatch then -- |year= does not match a year-value in |date=
 +
if is_set (error_message) then -- if there is already an error message
 +
error_message = error_message .. ', '; -- tack on this additional message
 +
end
 +
error_message = error_message .. '&#124;year= / &#124;date= mismatch';
 +
elseif 1 == mismatch then -- |year= matches year-value in |date=
 +
add_maint_cat ('date_year');
 
end
 
end
 
end
 
end
end
+
 +
if not is_set(error_message) then -- error free dates only
 +
local modified = false; -- flag
 +
 +
if is_set (DF) then -- if we need to reformat dates
 +
modified = reformat_dates (date_parameters_list, DF, false); -- reformat to DF format, use long month names if appropriate
 +
end
  
-- check for extra |page=, |pages= or |at= parameters. (also sheet and sheets while we're at it)
+
if true == date_hyphen_to_dash (date_parameters_list) then -- convert hyphens to dashes where appropriate
select_one( args, {'page', 'p', 'pp', 'pages', 'at', 'sheet', 'sheets'}, 'redundant_parameters' ); -- this is a dummy call simply to get the error message and category
+
modified = true;
 +
add_maint_cat ('date_format'); -- hyphens were converted so add maint category
 +
end
 +
 +
-- for those wikis that can and want to have English date names translated to the local language,
 +
-- uncomment these three lines.  Not supported by en.wiki (for obvious reasons)
 +
-- set date_name_xlate() second argument to true to translate English digits to local digits (will translate ymd dates)
 +
-- if date_name_xlate (date_parameters_list, false) then
 +
-- modified = true;
 +
-- end
  
local NoPP = A['NoPP']  
+
if modified then -- if the date_parameters_list values were modified
if is_set (NoPP) and is_valid_parameter_value (NoPP, 'nopp', cfg.keywords ['yes_true_y']) then
+
AccessDate = date_parameters_list['access-date'].val; -- overwrite date holding parameters with modified values
NoPP = true;
+
ArchiveDate = date_parameters_list['archive-date'].val;
else
+
Date = date_parameters_list['date'].val;
NoPP = nil; -- unset, used as a flag later
+
DoiBroken = date_parameters_list['doi-broken-date'].val;
end
+
LayDate = date_parameters_list['lay-date'].val;
 
+
PublicationDate = date_parameters_list['publication-date'].val;
if is_set(Page) then
+
end
if is_set(Pages) or is_set(At) then
+
else
Pages = ''; -- unset the others
+
table.insert( z.message_tail, { set_error( 'bad_date', {error_message}, true ) } ); -- add this error message
At = '';
 
 
end
 
end
extra_text_in_page_check (Page); -- add this page to maint cat if |page= value begins with what looks like p. or pp.
+
end -- end of do
elseif is_set(Pages) then
 
if is_set(At) then
 
At = ''; -- unset
 
end
 
extra_text_in_page_check (Pages); -- add this page to maint cat if |pages= value begins with what looks like p. or pp.
 
end
 
  
-- both |publication-place= and |place= (|location=) allowed if different
+
-- Account for the oddity that is {{cite journal}} with |pmc= set and |url= not set.  Do this after date check but before COInS.
if not is_set(PublicationPlace) and is_set(Place) then
+
-- Here we unset Embargo if PMC not embargoed (|embargo= not set in the citation) or if the embargo time has expired. Otherwise, holds embargo date
PublicationPlace = Place; -- promote |place= (|location=) to |publication-place
+
Embargo = is_embargoed (Embargo);
end
 
 
if PublicationPlace == Place then Place = ''; end -- don't need both if they are the same
 
 
--[[
 
Parameter remapping for cite encyclopedia:
 
When the citation has these parameters:
 
|encyclopedia and |title then map |title to |article and |encyclopedia to |title
 
|encyclopedia and |article then map |encyclopedia to |title
 
|encyclopedia then map |encyclopedia to |title
 
  
|trans_title maps to |trans_chapter when |title is re-mapped
+
if config.CitationClass == "journal" and not is_set(URL) and is_set(ID_list['PMC']) then
|url maps to |chapterurl when |title is remapped
+
if not is_set (Embargo) then -- if not embargoed or embargo has expired
 +
URL=cfg.id_handlers['PMC'].prefix .. ID_list['PMC']; -- set url to be the same as the PMC external link if not embargoed
 +
URLorigin = cfg.id_handlers['PMC'].parameters[1]; -- set URLorigin to parameter name for use in error message if citation is missing a |title=
 +
if is_set(AccessDate) then -- access date requires |url=; pmc created url is not |url=
 +
table.insert( z.message_tail, { set_error( 'accessdate_missing_url', {}, true ) } );
 +
AccessDate = ''; -- unset
 +
end
  
All other combinations of |encyclopedia, |title, and |article are not modified
+
end
 +
end
  
]]
+
-- At this point fields may be nil if they weren't specified in the template use. We can use that fact.
 
+
-- Test if citation has no title
local Encyclopedia = A['Encyclopedia'];
+
if not is_set(Title) and
 
+
not is_set(TransTitle) and
if ( config.CitationClass == "encyclopaedia" ) or ( config.CitationClass == "citation" and is_set (Encyclopedia)) then -- test code for citation
+
not is_set(ScriptTitle) then
if is_set(Periodical) then -- Periodical is set when |encyclopedia is set
+
if 'episode' == config.CitationClass then -- special case for cite episode; TODO: is there a better way to do this?
if is_set(Title) or is_set (ScriptTitle) then
+
table.insert( z.message_tail, { set_error( 'citation_missing_title', {'series'}, true ) } );
if not is_set(Chapter) then
+
else
Chapter = Title; -- |encyclopedia and |title are set so map |title to |article and |encyclopedia to |title
+
table.insert( z.message_tail, { set_error( 'citation_missing_title', {'title'}, true ) } );
ScriptChapter = ScriptTitle;
 
TransChapter = TransTitle;
 
ChapterURL = URL;
 
if not is_set (ChapterURL) and is_set (TitleLink) then
 
Chapter= '[[' .. TitleLink .. '|' .. Chapter .. ']]';
 
end
 
Title = Periodical;
 
ChapterFormat = Format;
 
Periodical = ''; -- redundant so unset
 
TransTitle = '';
 
URL = '';
 
Format = '';
 
TitleLink = '';
 
ScriptTitle = '';
 
end
 
else -- |title not set
 
Title = Periodical; -- |encyclopedia set and |article set or not set so map |encyclopedia to |title
 
Periodical = ''; -- redundant so unset
 
 
end
 
end
end
+
end
 +
 +
if 'none' == Title and in_array (config.CitationClass, {'journal', 'citation'}) and is_set (Periodical) and 'journal' == A:ORIGIN('Periodical') then -- special case for journal cites
 +
Title = ''; -- set title to empty string
 +
add_maint_cat ('untitled');
 
end
 
end
  
-- Special case for cite techreport.
+
check_for_url ({ -- add error message when any of these parameters contains a URL
if (config.CitationClass == "techreport") then -- special case for cite techreport
+
['title']=Title,
if is_set(A['Number']) then -- cite techreport uses 'number', which other citations alias to 'issue'
+
[A:ORIGIN('Chapter')]=Chapter,
if not is_set(ID) then -- can we use ID for the "number"?
+
[A:ORIGIN('Periodical')]=Periodical,
ID = A['Number']; -- yes, use it
+
[A:ORIGIN('PublisherName')] = PublisherName
else -- ID has a value so emit error message
+
});
table.insert( z.message_tail, { set_error('redundant_parameters', {wrap_style ('parameter', 'id') .. ' and ' .. wrap_style ('parameter', 'number')}, true )});
 
end
 
end
 
end
 
  
-- special case for cite interview
+
-- COinS metadata (see <http://ocoins.info/>) for automated parsing of citation information.
if (config.CitationClass == "interview") then
+
-- handle the oddity that is cite encyclopedia and {{citation |encyclopedia=something}}. Here we presume that
if is_set(Program) then
+
-- when Periodical, Title, and Chapter are all set, then Periodical is the book (encyclopedia) title, Title
ID = ' ' .. Program;
+
-- is the article title, and Chapter is a section within the article. So, we remap
end
+
if is_set(Callsign) then
+
local coins_chapter = Chapter; -- default assuming that remapping not required
if is_set(ID) then
+
local coins_title = Title; -- et tu
ID = ID .. sepc .. ' ' .. Callsign;
+
if 'encyclopaedia' == config.CitationClass or ('citation' == config.CitationClass and is_set (Encyclopedia)) then
else
+
if is_set (Chapter) and is_set (Title) and is_set (Periodical) then -- if all are used then
ID = ' ' .. Callsign;
+
coins_chapter = Title; -- remap
end
+
coins_title = Periodical;
end
 
if is_set(City) then
 
if is_set(ID) then
 
ID = ID .. sepc .. ' ' .. City;
 
else
 
ID = ' ' .. City;
 
end
 
 
end
 
end
 +
end
 +
local coins_author = a; -- default for coins rft.au
 +
if 0 < #c then -- but if contributor list
 +
coins_author = c; -- use that instead
 +
end
  
if is_set(Others) then
+
-- this is the function call to COinS()
if is_set(TitleType) then
+
local OCinSoutput = COinS({
Others = ' ' .. TitleType .. ' with ' .. Others;
+
['Periodical'] = Periodical,
TitleType = '';
+
['Encyclopedia'] = Encyclopedia,
else
+
['Chapter'] = make_coins_title (coins_chapter, ScriptChapter), -- Chapter and ScriptChapter stripped of bold / italic wikimarkup
Others = ' ' .. 'Interview with ' .. Others;
+
['Degree'] = Degree; -- cite thesis only
end
+
['Title'] = make_coins_title (coins_title, ScriptTitle), -- Title and ScriptTitle stripped of bold / italic wikimarkup
else
+
['PublicationPlace'] = PublicationPlace,
Others = '(Interview)';
+
['Date'] = COinS_date.rftdate, -- COinS_date has correctly formatted date if Date is valid;
 +
['Season'] = COinS_date.rftssn,
 +
['Chron'] =  COinS_date.rftchron or (not COinS_date.rftdate and Date) or '', -- chron but if not set and invalid date format use Date; keep this last bit?
 +
['Series'] = Series,
 +
['Volume'] = Volume,
 +
['Issue'] = Issue,
 +
['Pages'] = get_coins_pages (first_set ({Sheet, Sheets, Page, Pages, At}, 5)), -- pages stripped of external links
 +
['Edition'] = Edition,
 +
['PublisherName'] = PublisherName,
 +
['URL'] = first_set ({ChapterURL, URL}, 2),
 +
['Authors'] = coins_author,
 +
['ID_list'] = ID_list,
 +
['RawPage'] = this_page.prefixedText,
 +
}, config.CitationClass);
 +
 
 +
-- Account for the oddities that are {{cite arxiv}}, {{cite biorxiv}}, and {{cite citeseerx}} AFTER generation of COinS data.
 +
if in_array (config.CitationClass, {'arxiv', 'biorxiv', 'citeseerx'}) then -- we have set rft.jtitle in COinS to arXiv, bioRxiv, or CiteSeerX now unset so it isn't displayed
 +
Periodical = ''; -- periodical not allowed in these templates; if article has been published, use cite journal
 +
end
 +
 
 +
-- special case for cite newsgroup.  Do this after COinS because we are modifying Publishername to include some static text
 +
if 'newsgroup' == config.CitationClass then
 +
if is_set (PublisherName) then
 +
PublisherName = substitute (cfg.messages['newsgroup'], external_link( 'news:' .. PublisherName, PublisherName, A:ORIGIN('PublisherName'), nil ));
 
end
 
end
 
end
 
end
  
-- special case for cite mailing list
 
if (config.CitationClass == "mailinglist") then
 
Periodical = A ['MailingList'];
 
elseif 'mailinglist' == A:ORIGIN('Periodical') then
 
Periodical = ''; -- unset because mailing list is only used for cite mailing list
 
end
 
  
-- Account for the oddity that is {{cite conference}}, before generation of COinS data.
 
if 'conference' == config.CitationClass then
 
if is_set(BookTitle) then
 
Chapter = Title;
 
-- ChapterLink = TitleLink; -- |chapterlink= is deprecated
 
ChapterURL = URL;
 
ChapterURLorigin = URLorigin;
 
URLorigin = '';
 
ChapterFormat = Format;
 
TransChapter = TransTitle;
 
Title = BookTitle;
 
Format = '';
 
-- TitleLink = '';
 
TransTitle = '';
 
URL = '';
 
end
 
elseif 'speech' ~= config.CitationClass then
 
Conference = ''; -- not cite conference or cite speech so make sure this is empty string
 
end
 
  
-- cite map oddities
+
-- Now perform various field substitutions.
local Cartography = "";
+
-- We also add leading spaces and surrounding markup and punctuation to the
local Scale = "";
+
-- various parts of the citation, but only when they are non-nil.
local Sheet = A['Sheet'] or '';
+
local EditorCount; -- used only for choosing {ed.) or (eds.) annotation at end of editor name-list
local Sheets = A['Sheets'] or '';
+
do
if config.CitationClass == "map" then
+
local last_first_list;
Chapter = A['Map'];
+
local control = {
ChapterURL = A['MapURL'];
+
format = NameListFormat, -- empty string or 'vanc'
TransChapter = A['TransMap'];
+
maximum = nil, -- as if display-authors or display-editors not set
ChapterURLorigin = A:ORIGIN('MapURL');
+
lastauthoramp = LastAuthorAmp,
ChapterFormat = A['MapFormat'];
+
page_name = this_page.text, -- get current page name so that we don't wikilink to it via editorlinkn
+
mode = Mode
Cartography = A['Cartography'];
+
};
if is_set( Cartography ) then
+
 
Cartography = sepc .. " " .. wrap_msg ('cartography', Cartography, use_lowercase);
+
do -- do editor name list first because the now unsupported coauthors used to modify control table
end
+
control.maximum , editor_etal = get_display_authors_editors (A['DisplayEditors'], #e, 'editors', editor_etal);
Scale = A['Scale'];
+
last_first_list, EditorCount = list_people(control, e, editor_etal);
if is_set( Scale ) then
 
Scale = sepc .. " " .. Scale;
 
end
 
end
 
  
-- Account for the oddities that are {{cite episode}} and {{cite serial}}, before generation of COinS data.
+
if is_set (Editors) then
if 'episode' == config.CitationClass or 'serial' == config.CitationClass then
+
if editor_etal then
local AirDate = A['AirDate'];
+
Editors = Editors .. ' ' .. cfg.messages['et al']; -- add et al. to editors parameter beause |display-editors=etal
local SeriesLink = A['SeriesLink'];
+
EditorCount = 2; -- with et al., |editors= is multiple names; spoof to display (eds.) annotation
if is_set (SeriesLink) and false == link_param_ok (SeriesLink) then
+
else
table.insert( z.message_tail, { set_error( 'bad_paramlink', A:ORIGIN('SeriesLink'))});
+
EditorCount = 2; -- we don't know but assume |editors= is multiple names; spoof to display (eds.) annotation
 +
end
 +
else
 +
Editors = last_first_list; -- either an author name list or an empty string
 
end
 
end
local Network = A['Network'];
+
 
local Station = A['Station'];
+
if 1 == EditorCount and (true == editor_etal or 1 < #e) then -- only one editor displayed but includes etal then
local s, n = {}, {};
+
EditorCount = 2; -- spoof to display (eds.) annotation
-- do common parameters first
+
end
if is_set(Network) then table.insert(n, Network); end
+
end
if is_set(Station) then table.insert(n, Station); end
+
do -- now do interviewers
ID = table.concat(n, sepc .. ' ');
+
control.maximum = #interviewers_list; -- number of interviewerss
+
Interviewers = list_people(control, interviewers_list, false); -- et al not currently supported
if not is_set (Date) and is_set (AirDate) then -- promote airdate to date
+
end
Date = AirDate;
+
do -- now do translators
 +
control.maximum = #t; -- number of translators
 +
Translators = list_people(control, t, false); -- et al not currently supported
 +
end
 +
do -- now do contributors
 +
control.maximum = #c; -- number of contributors
 +
Contributors = list_people(control, c, false); -- et al not currently supported
 
end
 
end
 +
do -- now do authors
 +
control.maximum , author_etal = get_display_authors_editors (A['DisplayAuthors'], #a, 'authors', author_etal);
  
if 'episode' == config.CitationClass then -- handle the oddities that are strictly {{cite episode}}
+
last_first_list = list_people(control, a, author_etal);
local Season = A['Season'];
 
local SeriesNumber = A['SeriesNumber'];
 
  
if is_set (Season) and is_set (SeriesNumber) then -- these are mutually exclusive so if both are set
+
if is_set (Authors) then
table.insert( z.message_tail, { set_error( 'redundant_parameters', {wrap_style ('parameter', 'season') .. ' and ' .. wrap_style ('parameter', 'seriesno')}, true ) } ); -- add error message
+
Authors, author_etal = name_has_etal (Authors, author_etal, false); -- find and remove variations on et al.
SeriesNumber = ''; -- unset; prefer |season= over |seriesno=
+
if author_etal then
 +
Authors = Authors .. ' ' .. cfg.messages['et al']; -- add et al. to authors parameter
 +
end
 +
else
 +
Authors = last_first_list; -- either an author name list or an empty string
 
end
 
end
-- assemble a table of parts concatenated later into Series
+
end -- end of do
if is_set(Season) then table.insert(s, wrap_msg ('season', Season, use_lowercase)); end
 
if is_set(SeriesNumber) then table.insert(s, wrap_msg ('series', SeriesNumber, use_lowercase)); end
 
if is_set(Issue) then table.insert(s, wrap_msg ('episode', Issue, use_lowercase)); end
 
Issue = ''; -- unset because this is not a unique parameter
 
 
 
Chapter = Title; -- promote title parameters to chapter
+
if is_set (Authors) and is_set (Collaboration) then
ScriptChapter = ScriptTitle;
+
Authors = Authors .. ' (' .. Collaboration .. ')'; -- add collaboration after et al.
ChapterLink = TitleLink; -- alias episodelink
+
end
TransChapter = TransTitle;
 
ChapterURL = URL;
 
ChapterURLorigin = A:ORIGIN('URL');
 
 
Title = Series; -- promote series to title
 
TitleLink = SeriesLink;
 
Series = table.concat(s, sepc .. ' '); -- this is concatenation of season, seriesno, episode number
 
  
if is_set (ChapterLink) and not is_set (ChapterURL) then -- link but not URL
 
Chapter = '[[' .. ChapterLink .. '|' .. Chapter .. ']]'; -- ok to wikilink
 
elseif is_set (ChapterLink) and is_set (ChapterURL) then -- if both are set, URL links episode;
 
Series = '[[' .. ChapterLink .. '|' .. Series .. ']]'; -- series links with ChapterLink (episodelink -> TitleLink -> ChapterLink) ugly
 
end
 
URL = ''; -- unset
 
TransTitle = '';
 
ScriptTitle = '';
 
 
else -- now oddities that are cite serial
 
Issue = ''; -- unset because this parameter no longer supported by the citation/core version of cite serial
 
Chapter = A['Episode']; -- TODO: make |episode= available to cite episode someday?
 
if is_set (Series) and is_set (SeriesLink) then
 
Series = '[[' .. SeriesLink .. '|' .. Series .. ']]';
 
end
 
Series = wrap_style ('italic-title', Series); -- series is italicized
 
end
 
 
end
 
end
-- end of {{cite episode}} stuff
 
  
-- Account for the oddities that are {{cite arxiv}}, before generation of COinS data.
+
-- apply |[xx-]format= styling; at the end, these parameters hold correctly styled format annotation,
if 'arxiv' == config.CitationClass then
+
-- an error message if the associated url is not set, or an empty string for concatenation
if not is_set (ID_list['ARXIV']) then -- |arxiv= or |eprint= required for cite arxiv
+
ArchiveFormat = style_format (ArchiveFormat, ArchiveURL, 'archive-format', 'archive-url');
table.insert( z.message_tail, { set_error( 'arxiv_missing', {}, true ) } ); -- add error message
+
ConferenceFormat = style_format (ConferenceFormat, ConferenceURL, 'conference-format', 'conference-url');
elseif is_set (Series) then -- series is an alias of version
+
Format = style_format (Format, URL, 'format', 'url');
ID_list['ARXIV'] = ID_list['ARXIV'] .. Series; -- concatenate version onto the end of the arxiv identifier
+
LayFormat = style_format (LayFormat, LayURL, 'lay-format', 'lay-url');
Series = ''; -- unset
+
TranscriptFormat = style_format (TranscriptFormat, TranscriptURL, 'transcript-format', 'transcripturl');
deprecated_parameter ('version'); -- deprecated parameter but only for cite arxiv
 
end
 
 
if first_set ({AccessDate, At, Chapter, Format, Page, Pages, Periodical, PublisherName, URL, -- a crude list of parameters that are not supported by cite arxiv
 
ID_list['ASIN'], ID_list['BIBCODE'], ID_list['DOI'], ID_list['ISBN'], ID_list['ISSN'],
 
ID_list['JFM'], ID_list['JSTOR'], ID_list['LCCN'], ID_list['MR'], ID_list['OCLC'], ID_list['OL'],
 
ID_list['OSTI'], ID_list['PMC'], ID_list['PMID'], ID_list['RFC'], ID_list['SSRN'], ID_list['USENETID'], ID_list['ZBL']},27) then
 
table.insert( z.message_tail, { set_error( 'arxiv_params_not_supported', {}, true ) } ); -- add error message
 
  
AccessDate= ''; -- set these to empty string; not supported in cite arXiv
+
-- special case for chapter format so no error message or cat when chapter not supported
PublisherName = ''; -- (if the article has been published, use cite journal, or other)
+
if not (in_array(config.CitationClass, {'web', 'news', 'journal', 'magazine', 'pressrelease', 'podcast', 'newsgroup', 'arxiv', 'biorxiv', 'citeseerx'}) or
Chapter = '';
+
('citation' == config.CitationClass and is_set (Periodical) and not is_set (Encyclopedia))) then
URL = '';
+
ChapterFormat = style_format (ChapterFormat, ChapterURL, 'chapter-format', 'chapter-url');
Format = '';
 
Page = ''; Pages = ''; At = '';
 
end
 
Periodical = 'arXiv'; -- set to arXiv for COinS; after that, must be set to empty string
 
 
end
 
end
  
-- handle type parameter for those CS1 citations that have default values
+
if not is_set(URL) then
if in_array(config.CitationClass, {"AV-media-notes", "DVD-notes", "mailinglist", "map", "podcast", "pressrelease", "report", "techreport", "thesis"}) then
+
if in_array(config.CitationClass, {"web","podcast", "mailinglist"}) then -- |url= required for cite web, cite podcast, and cite mailinglist
TitleType = set_titletype (config.CitationClass, TitleType);
+
table.insert( z.message_tail, { set_error( 'cite_web_url', {}, true ) } );
if is_set(Degree) and "Thesis" == TitleType then -- special case for cite thesis
+
end
TitleType = Degree .. " thesis";
+
 +
-- do we have |accessdate= without either |url= or |chapter-url=?
 +
if is_set(AccessDate) and not is_set(ChapterURL)then -- ChapterURL may be set when URL is not set;
 +
table.insert( z.message_tail, { set_error( 'accessdate_missing_url', {}, true ) } );
 +
AccessDate = '';
 
end
 
end
 
end
 
end
  
if is_set(TitleType) then -- if type parameter is specified
+
local OriginalURL, OriginalURLorigin, OriginalFormat, OriginalAccess;
TitleType = substitute( cfg.messages['type'], TitleType); -- display it in parentheses
+
DeadURL = DeadURL:lower(); -- used later when assembling archived text
 +
if is_set( ArchiveURL ) then
 +
if is_set (ChapterURL) then -- if chapter-url is set apply archive url to it
 +
OriginalURL = ChapterURL; -- save copy of source chapter's url for archive text
 +
OriginalURLorigin = ChapterURLorigin; -- name of chapter-url parameter for error messages
 +
OriginalFormat = ChapterFormat; -- and original |chapter-format=
 +
if 'no' ~= DeadURL then
 +
ChapterURL = ArchiveURL -- swap-in the archive's url
 +
ChapterURLorigin = A:ORIGIN('ArchiveURL') -- name of archive-url parameter for error messages
 +
ChapterFormat = ArchiveFormat or ''; -- swap in archive's format
 +
ChapterUrlAccess = nil; -- restricted access levels do not make sense for archived urls
 +
end
 +
elseif is_set (URL) then
 +
OriginalURL = URL; -- save copy of original source URL
 +
OriginalURLorigin = URLorigin; -- name of url parameter for error messages
 +
OriginalFormat = Format; -- and original |format=
 +
OriginalAccess = UrlAccess;
 +
if 'no' ~= DeadURL then -- if URL set then archive-url applies to it
 +
URL = ArchiveURL -- swap-in the archive's url
 +
URLorigin = A:ORIGIN('ArchiveURL') -- name of archive url parameter for error messages
 +
Format = ArchiveFormat or ''; -- swap in archive's format
 +
UrlAccess = nil; -- restricted access levels do not make sense for archived urls
 +
end
 +
end
 
end
 
end
  
-- legacy: promote concatenation of |month=, and |year= to Date if Date not set; or, promote PublicationDate to Date if neither Date nor Year are set.
+
if in_array(config.CitationClass, {'web','news','journal', 'magazine', 'pressrelease', 'podcast', 'newsgroup', 'arxiv', 'biorxiv', 'citeseerx'}) or -- if any of the 'periodical' cites except encyclopedia
if not is_set (Date) then
+
('citation' == config.CitationClass and is_set (Periodical) and not is_set (Encyclopedia)) then
Date = Year; -- promote Year to Date
+
local chap_param;
Year = nil; -- make nil so Year as empty string isn't used for CITEREF
+
if is_set (Chapter) then -- get a parameter name from one of these chapter related meta-parameters
if not is_set (Date) and is_set(PublicationDate) then -- use PublicationDate when |date= and |year= are not set
+
chap_param = A:ORIGIN ('Chapter')
Date = PublicationDate; -- promote PublicationDate to Date
+
elseif is_set (TransChapter) then
PublicationDate = ''; -- unset, no longer needed
+
chap_param = A:ORIGIN ('TransChapter')
 +
elseif is_set (ChapterURL) then
 +
chap_param = A:ORIGIN ('ChapterURL')
 +
elseif is_set (ScriptChapter) then
 +
chap_param = A:ORIGIN ('ScriptChapter')
 +
else is_set (ChapterFormat)
 +
chap_param = A:ORIGIN ('ChapterFormat')
 +
end
 +
 
 +
if is_set (chap_param) then -- if we found one
 +
table.insert( z.message_tail, { set_error( 'chapter_ignored', {chap_param}, true ) } ); -- add error message
 +
Chapter = ''; -- and set them to empty string to be safe with concatenation
 +
TransChapter = '';
 +
ChapterURL = '';
 +
ScriptChapter = '';
 +
ChapterFormat = '';
 +
end
 +
else -- otherwise, format chapter / article title
 +
local no_quotes = false; -- default assume that we will be quoting the chapter parameter value
 +
if is_set (Contribution) and 0 < #c then -- if this is a contribution with contributor(s)
 +
if in_array (Contribution:lower(), cfg.keywords.contribution) then -- and a generic contribution title
 +
no_quotes = true; -- then render it unquoted
 +
end
 +
end
 +
 
 +
Chapter = format_chapter_title (ScriptChapter, Chapter, TransChapter, ChapterURL, ChapterURLorigin, no_quotes, ChapterUrlAccess); -- Contribution is also in Chapter
 +
if is_set (Chapter) then
 +
Chapter = Chapter .. ChapterFormat ;
 +
if 'map' == config.CitationClass and is_set (TitleType) then
 +
Chapter = Chapter .. ' ' .. TitleType; -- map annotation here; not after title
 +
end
 +
Chapter = Chapter.. sepc .. ' ';
 +
elseif is_set (ChapterFormat) then -- |chapter= not set but |chapter-format= is so ...
 +
Chapter = ChapterFormat .. sepc .. ' '; -- ... ChapterFormat has error message, we want to see it
 
end
 
end
 
end
 
end
  
if PublicationDate == Date then PublicationDate = ''; end -- if PublicationDate is same as Date, don't display in rendered citation
+
-- Format main title.
 +
if is_set (ArchiveURL) and mw.ustring.match (mw.ustring.lower(Title), cfg.special_case_translation['archived_copy']) then -- if title is 'Archived copy' (place holder added by bots that can't find proper title)
 +
add_maint_cat ('archived_copy'); -- add maintenance category before we modify the content of Title
 +
end
  
--[[
+
if Title:match ('^%(%(.*%)%)$') then -- if keep as written markup:
Go test all of the date-holding parameters for valid MOS:DATE format and make sure that dates are real dates. This must be done before we do COinS because here is where
+
Title= Title:gsub ('^%(%((.*)%)%)$', '%1') -- remove the markup
we get the date used in the metadata.
+
else
 
+
if '...' == Title:sub (-3) then -- if elipsis is the last three characters of |title=
Date validation supporting code is in Module:Citation/CS1/Date_validation
+
Title = Title:gsub ('(%.%.%.)%.+$', '%1'); -- limit the number of dots to three
]]
+
elseif not mw.ustring.find (Title, '%.%s*%a%.$') and -- end of title is not a 'dot-(optional space-)letter-dot' initialism ...
do -- create defined block to contain local variables error_message and mismatch
+
not mw.ustring.find (Title, '%s+%a%.$') then -- ...and not a 'space-letter-dot' initial (''Allium canadense'' L.)
local error_message = '';
+
Title = mw.ustring.gsub(Title, '%'..sepc..'$', ''); -- remove any trailing separator character; sepc and ms.ustring() here for languages that use multibyte separator characters
-- AirDate has been promoted to Date so not necessary to check it
+
end
anchor_year, error_message = dates({['access-date']=AccessDate, ['archive-date']=ArchiveDate, ['date']=Date, ['doi-broken-date']=DoiBroken,
+
end
['embargo']=Embargo, ['lay-date']=LayDate, ['publication-date']=PublicationDate, ['year']=Year}, COinS_date);
+
 
+
if is_set(TitleLink) and is_set(Title) then
if is_set (Year) and is_set (Date) then -- both |date= and |year= not normally needed;
+
Title = make_wikilink (TitleLink, Title);
local mismatch = year_date_check (Year, Date)
 
if 0 == mismatch then -- |year= does not match a year-value in |date=
 
if is_set (error_message) then -- if there is already an error message
 
error_message = error_message .. ', '; -- tack on this additional message
 
end
 
error_message = error_message .. '&#124;year= / &#124;date= mismatch';
 
elseif 1 == mismatch then -- |year= matches year-value in |date=
 
add_maint_cat ('date_year');
 
end
 
end
 
 
 
if is_set(error_message) then
 
table.insert( z.message_tail, { set_error( 'bad_date', {error_message}, true ) } ); -- add this error message
 
end
 
end -- end of do
 
 
 
-- Account for the oddity that is {{cite journal}} with |pmc= set and |url= not set.  Do this after date check but before COInS.
 
-- Here we unset Embargo if PMC not embargoed (|embargo= not set in the citation) or if the embargo time has expired. Otherwise, holds embargo date
 
Embargo = is_embargoed (Embargo); --
 
 
 
if config.CitationClass == "journal" and not is_set(URL) and is_set(ID_list['PMC']) then
 
if not is_set (Embargo) then -- if not embargoed or embargo has expired
 
URL=cfg.id_handlers['PMC'].prefix .. ID_list['PMC']; -- set url to be the same as the PMC external link if not embargoed
 
URLorigin = cfg.id_handlers['PMC'].parameters[1]; -- set URLorigin to parameter name for use in error message if citation is missing a |title=
 
end
 
 
end
 
end
  
-- At this point fields may be nil if they weren't specified in the template use.  We can use that fact.
+
if in_array(config.CitationClass, {'web', 'news', 'journal', 'magazine', 'pressrelease', 'podcast', 'newsgroup', 'mailinglist', 'interview', 'arxiv', 'biorxiv', 'citeseerx'}) or
-- Test if citation has no title
+
('citation' == config.CitationClass and is_set (Periodical) and not is_set (Encyclopedia)) or
if not is_set(Title) and
+
('map' == config.CitationClass and is_set (Periodical)) then -- special case for cite map when the map is in a periodical treat as an article
not is_set(TransTitle) and
+
Title = kern_quotes (Title); -- if necessary, separate title's leading and trailing quote marks from Module provided quote marks
not is_set(ScriptTitle) then
+
Title = wrap_style ('quoted-title', Title);
if 'episode' == config.CitationClass then -- special case for cite episode; TODO: is there a better way to do this?
+
Title = script_concatenate (Title, ScriptTitle); -- <bdi> tags, lang atribute, categorization, etc; must be done after title is wrapped
table.insert( z.message_tail, { set_error( 'citation_missing_title', {'series'}, true ) } );
+
TransTitle= wrap_style ('trans-quoted-title', TransTitle );
else
+
elseif 'report' == config.CitationClass then -- no styling for cite report
table.insert( z.message_tail, { set_error( 'citation_missing_title', {'title'}, true ) } );
+
Title = script_concatenate (Title, ScriptTitle); -- <bdi> tags, lang atribute, categorization, etc; must be done after title is wrapped
end
+
TransTitle= wrap_style ('trans-quoted-title', TransTitle ); -- for cite report, use this form for trans-title
 +
else
 +
Title = wrap_style ('italic-title', Title);
 +
Title = script_concatenate (Title, ScriptTitle); -- <bdi> tags, lang atribute, categorization, etc; must be done after title is wrapped
 +
TransTitle = wrap_style ('trans-italic-title', TransTitle);
 +
end
 +
 
 +
local TransError = "";
 +
if is_set(TransTitle) then
 +
if is_set(Title) then
 +
TransTitle = " " .. TransTitle;
 +
else
 +
TransError = " " .. set_error( 'trans_missing_title', {'title'} );
 +
end
 
end
 
end
 
 
if 'none' == Title and in_array (config.CitationClass, {'journal', 'citation'}) and is_set (Periodical) and 'journal' == A:ORIGIN('Periodical') then -- special case for journal cites
+
if is_set(Title) then
Title = ''; -- set title to empty string
+
if not is_set(TitleLink) and is_set(URL) then
add_maint_cat ('untitled');
+
 +
Title = external_link( URL, Title, URLorigin, UrlAccess ) .. TransTitle .. TransError .. Format;
 +
URL = ''; -- unset these because no longer needed
 +
Format = "";
 +
else
 +
Title = Title .. TransTitle .. TransError;
 +
end
 +
else
 +
Title = TransTitle .. TransError;
 
end
 
end
  
check_for_url ({ -- add error message when any of these parameters contains a URL
+
if is_set(Place) then
['title']=Title,
+
Place = " " .. wrap_msg ('written', Place, use_lowercase) .. sepc .. " ";
[A:ORIGIN('Chapter')]=Chapter,
+
end
[A:ORIGIN('Periodical')]=Periodical,
 
[A:ORIGIN('PublisherName')] = PublisherName,
 
});
 
  
-- COinS metadata (see <http://ocoins.info/>) for automated parsing of citation information.
+
if is_set (Conference) then
-- handle the oddity that is cite encyclopedia and {{citation |encyclopedia=something}}. Here we presume that
+
if is_set (ConferenceURL) then
-- when Periodical, Title, and Chapter are all set, then Periodical is the book (encyclopedia) title, Title
+
Conference = external_link( ConferenceURL, Conference, ConferenceURLorigin, nil );
-- is the article title, and Chapter is a section within the article.  So, we remap
 
 
local coins_chapter = Chapter; -- default assuming that remapping not required
 
local coins_title = Title; -- et tu
 
if 'encyclopaedia' == config.CitationClass or ('citation' == config.CitationClass and is_set (Encyclopedia)) then
 
if is_set (Chapter) and is_set (Title) and is_set (Periodical) then -- if all are used then
 
coins_chapter = Title; -- remap
 
coins_title = Periodical;
 
 
end
 
end
 +
Conference = sepc .. " " .. Conference .. ConferenceFormat;
 +
elseif is_set(ConferenceURL) then
 +
Conference = sepc .. " " .. external_link( ConferenceURL, nil, ConferenceURLorigin, nil );
 
end
 
end
local coins_author = a; -- default for coins rft.au
 
if 0 < #c then -- but if contributor list
 
coins_author = c; -- use that instead
 
end
 
  
-- this is the function call to COinS()
+
if not is_set(Position) then
local OCinSoutput = COinS({
+
local Minutes = A['Minutes'];
['Periodical'] = Periodical,
+
local Time = A['Time'];
['Encyclopedia'] = Encyclopedia,
+
 
['Chapter'] = make_coins_title (coins_chapter, ScriptChapter), -- Chapter and ScriptChapter stripped of bold / italic wikimarkup
+
if is_set(Minutes) then
['Map'] = Map,
+
if is_set (Time) then
['Degree'] = Degree; -- cite thesis only
+
table.insert( z.message_tail, { set_error( 'redundant_parameters', {wrap_style ('parameter', 'minutes') .. ' and ' .. wrap_style ('parameter', 'time')}, true ) } );
['Title'] = make_coins_title (coins_title, ScriptTitle), -- Title and ScriptTitle stripped of bold / italic wikimarkup
+
end
['PublicationPlace'] = PublicationPlace,
+
Position = " " .. Minutes .. " " .. cfg.messages['minutes'];
['Date'] = COinS_date.rftdate, -- COinS_date has correctly formatted date if Date is valid;
+
else
['Season'] = COinS_date.rftssn,
+
if is_set(Time) then
['Chron'] =  COinS_date.rftchron or (not COinS_date.rftdate and Date) or '', -- chron but if not set and invalid date format use Date; keep this last bit?
+
local TimeCaption = A['TimeCaption']
['Series'] = Series,
+
if not is_set(TimeCaption) then
['Volume'] = Volume,
+
TimeCaption = cfg.messages['event'];
['Issue'] = Issue,
+
if sepc ~= '.' then
['Pages'] = get_coins_pages (first_set ({Sheet, Sheets, Page, Pages, At}, 5)), -- pages stripped of external links
+
TimeCaption = TimeCaption:lower();
['Edition'] = Edition,
+
end
['PublisherName'] = PublisherName,
+
end
['URL'] = first_set ({ChapterURL, URL}, 2),
+
Position = " " .. TimeCaption .. " " .. Time;
['Authors'] = coins_author,
+
end
['ID_list'] = ID_list,
+
end
['RawPage'] = this_page.prefixedText,
+
else
}, config.CitationClass);
+
Position = " " .. Position;
 +
At = '';
 +
end
  
-- Account for the oddities that are {{cite arxiv}}, AFTER generation of COinS data.
+
Page, Pages, Sheet, Sheets = format_pages_sheets (Page, Pages, Sheet, Sheets, config.CitationClass, Periodical_origin, sepc, NoPP, use_lowercase);
if 'arxiv' == config.CitationClass then -- we have set rft.jtitle in COinS to arXiv, now unset so it isn't displayed
+
 
Periodical = ''; -- periodical not allowed in cite arxiv; if article has been published, use cite journal
+
At = is_set(At) and (sepc .. " " .. At) or "";
end
+
Position = is_set(Position) and (sepc .. " " .. Position) or "";
 +
if config.CitationClass == 'map' then
 +
local Section = A['Section'];
 +
local Sections = A['Sections'];
 +
local Inset = A['Inset'];
 +
 +
if is_set( Inset ) then
 +
Inset = sepc .. " " .. wrap_msg ('inset', Inset, use_lowercase);
 +
end
  
-- special case for cite newsgroup.  Do this after COinS because we are modifying Publishername to include some static text
+
if is_set( Sections ) then
if 'newsgroup' == config.CitationClass then
+
Section = sepc .. " " .. wrap_msg ('sections', Sections, use_lowercase);
if is_set (PublisherName) then
+
elseif is_set( Section ) then
PublisherName = substitute (cfg.messages['newsgroup'], external_link( 'news:' .. PublisherName, PublisherName, A:ORIGIN('PublisherName') ));
+
Section = sepc .. " " .. wrap_msg ('section', Section, use_lowercase);
 
end
 
end
 +
At = At .. Inset .. Section;
 +
end
 +
 +
if is_set (Language) then
 +
Language = language_parameter (Language); -- format, categories, name from ISO639-1, etc
 +
else
 +
Language=""; -- language not specified so make sure this is an empty string;
 +
--[[ TODO: need to extract the wrap_msg from language_parameter
 +
so that we can solve parentheses bunching problem with Format/Language/TitleType
 +
]]
 
end
 
end
  
 +
Others = is_set(Others) and (sepc .. " " .. Others) or "";
 +
 +
if is_set (Translators) then
 +
Others = safe_join ({sepc .. ' ', wrap_msg ('translated', Translators, use_lowercase), Others}, sepc);
 +
end
 +
if is_set (Interviewers) then
 +
Others = safe_join ({sepc .. ' ', wrap_msg ('interview', Interviewers, use_lowercase), Others}, sepc);
 +
end
 +
 +
TitleNote = is_set(TitleNote) and (sepc .. " " .. TitleNote) or "";
 +
if is_set (Edition) then
 +
if Edition:match ('%f[%a][Ee]d%.?$') or Edition:match ('%f[%a][Ee]dition$') then
 +
add_maint_cat ('extra_text', 'edition');
 +
end
 +
Edition = " " .. wrap_msg ('edition', Edition);
 +
else
 +
Edition = '';
 +
end
 +
 +
Series = is_set(Series) and (sepc .. " " .. Series) or "";
 +
OrigYear = is_set(OrigYear) and (" [" .. OrigYear .. "]") or ""; -- TODO: presentation
  
 +
Agency = is_set(Agency) and (sepc .. " " .. Agency) or "";
  
-- Now perform various field substitutions.
+
Volume = format_volume_issue (Volume, Issue, config.CitationClass, Periodical_origin, sepc, use_lowercase);
-- We also add leading spaces and surrounding markup and punctuation to the
 
-- various parts of the citation, but only when they are non-nil.
 
local EditorCount; -- used only for choosing {ed.) or (eds.) annotation at end of editor name-list
 
do
 
local last_first_list;
 
local maximum;
 
local control = {
 
format = NameListFormat, -- empty string or 'vanc'
 
maximum = nil, -- as if display-authors or display-editors not set
 
lastauthoramp = LastAuthorAmp,
 
page_name = this_page.text -- get current page name so that we don't wikilink to it via editorlinkn
 
};
 
 
 
do -- do editor name list first because coauthors can modify control table
 
maximum , editor_etal = get_display_authors_editors (A['DisplayEditors'], #e, 'editors', editor_etal);
 
-- Preserve old-style implicit et al.
 
if not is_set(maximum) and #e == 4 then
 
maximum = 3;
 
table.insert( z.message_tail, { set_error('implict_etal_editor', {}, true) } );
 
end
 
 
 
control.maximum = maximum;
 
 
last_first_list, EditorCount = list_people(control, e, editor_etal, 'editor');
 
  
if is_set (Editors) then
+
------------------------------------ totally unrelated data
if editor_etal then
+
if is_set(Via) then
Editors = Editors .. ' ' .. cfg.messages['et al']; -- add et al. to editors parameter beause |display-editors=etal
+
Via = " " .. wrap_msg ('via', Via);
EditorCount = 2; -- with et al., |editors= is multiple names; spoof to display (eds.) annotation
+
end
else
 
EditorCount = 2; -- we don't know but assume |editors= is multiple names; spoof to display (eds.) annotation
 
end
 
else
 
Editors = last_first_list; -- either an author name list or an empty string
 
end
 
  
if 1 == EditorCount and (true == editor_etal or 1 < #e) then -- only one editor displayed but includes etal then
+
--[[
EditorCount = 2; -- spoof to display (eds.) annotation
+
Subscription implies paywall; Registration does not. If both are used in a citation, the subscription required link
end
+
note is displayed. There are no error messages for this condition.
end
+
do -- now do translators
+
]]
control.maximum = #t; -- number of translators
+
if is_set (SubscriptionRequired) then
Translators = list_people(control, t, false, 'translator'); -- et al not currently supported
+
SubscriptionRequired = sepc .. " " .. cfg.messages['subscription']; -- subscription required message
end
+
elseif is_set (RegistrationRequired) then
do -- now do contributors
+
SubscriptionRequired = sepc .. " " .. cfg.messages['registration']; -- registration required message
control.maximum = #c; -- number of contributors
+
else
Contributors = list_people(control, c, false, 'contributor'); -- et al not currently supported
+
SubscriptionRequired = ''; -- either or both might be set to something other than yes true y
end
+
end
do -- now do authors
 
control.maximum , author_etal = get_display_authors_editors (A['DisplayAuthors'], #a, 'authors', author_etal);
 
  
if is_set(Coauthors) then -- if the coauthor field is also used, prevent ampersand and et al. formatting.
+
if is_set(AccessDate) then
control.lastauthoramp = nil;
+
local retrv_text = " " .. cfg.messages['retrieved']
control.maximum = #a + 1;
 
end
 
 
last_first_list = list_people(control, a, author_etal, 'author');
 
  
if is_set (Authors) then
+
AccessDate = nowrap_date (AccessDate); -- wrap in nowrap span if date in appropriate format
Authors, author_etal = name_has_etal (Authors, author_etal, false); -- find and remove variations on et al.
+
if (sepc ~= ".") then retrv_text = retrv_text:lower() end -- if mode is cs2, lower case
if author_etal then
+
AccessDate = substitute (retrv_text, AccessDate); -- add retrieved text
Authors = Authors .. ' ' .. cfg.messages['et al']; -- add et al. to authors parameter
 
end
 
else
 
Authors = last_first_list; -- either an author name list or an empty string
 
end
 
end -- end of do
 
  
if not is_set(Authors) and is_set(Coauthors) then -- coauthors aren't displayed if one of authors=, authorn=, or lastn= isn't specified
+
AccessDate = substitute (cfg.presentation['accessdate'], {sepc, AccessDate}); -- allow editors to hide accessdates
table.insert( z.message_tail, { set_error('coauthors_missing_author', {}, true) } ); -- emit error message
+
end
end
+
 +
if is_set(ID) then ID = sepc .." ".. ID; end
 +
  if "thesis" == config.CitationClass and is_set(Docket) then
 +
ID = sepc .." Docket ".. Docket .. ID;
 +
end
 +
  if "report" == config.CitationClass and is_set(Docket) then -- for cite report when |docket= is set
 +
ID = sepc .. ' ' .. Docket; -- overwrite ID even if |id= is set
 
end
 
end
  
-- apply |[xx-]format= styling; at the end, these parameters hold correctly styled format annotation,
+
ID_list = build_id_list( ID_list, {IdAccessLevels=ID_access_levels, DoiBroken = DoiBroken, ASINTLD = ASINTLD, IgnoreISBN = IgnoreISBN, Embargo=Embargo, Class = Class} );
-- an error message if the associated url is not set, or an empty string for concatenation
 
ArchiveFormat = style_format (ArchiveFormat, ArchiveURL, 'archive-format', 'archive-url');
 
ConferenceFormat = style_format (ConferenceFormat, ConferenceURL, 'conference-format', 'conference-url');
 
Format = style_format (Format, URL, 'format', 'url');
 
LayFormat = style_format (LayFormat, LayURL, 'lay-format', 'lay-url');
 
TranscriptFormat = style_format (TranscriptFormat, TranscriptURL, 'transcript-format', 'transcripturl');
 
  
-- special case for chapter format so no error message or cat when chapter not supported
+
if is_set(URL) then
if not (in_array(config.CitationClass, {'web','news','journal', 'magazine', 'pressrelease','podcast', 'newsgroup', 'arxiv'}) or
+
URL = " " .. external_link( URL, nil, URLorigin, UrlAccess );
('citation' == config.CitationClass and is_set (Periodical) and not is_set (Encyclopedia))) then
 
ChapterFormat = style_format (ChapterFormat, ChapterURL, 'chapter-format', 'chapter-url');
 
 
end
 
end
  
if not is_set(URL) then --and
+
if is_set(Quote) then
if in_array(config.CitationClass, {"web","podcast", "mailinglist"}) then -- Test if cite web or cite podcast |url= is missing or empty
+
if Quote:sub(1,1) == '"' and Quote:sub(-1,-1) == '"' then -- if first and last characters of quote are quote marks
table.insert( z.message_tail, { set_error( 'cite_web_url', {}, true ) } );
+
Quote = Quote:sub(2,-2); -- strip them off
 
end
 
end
+
Quote = sepc .." " .. wrap_style ('quoted-text', Quote ); -- wrap in <q>...</q> tags
-- Test if accessdate is given without giving a URL
+
PostScript = ""; -- cs1|2 does not supply terminal punctuation when |quote= is set
if is_set(AccessDate) and not is_set(ChapterURL)then -- ChapterURL may be set when the others are not set; TODO: move this to a separate test?
+
end
table.insert( z.message_tail, { set_error( 'accessdate_missing_url', {}, true ) } );
+
AccessDate = '';
+
local Archived
 +
if is_set(ArchiveURL) then
 +
if not is_set(ArchiveDate) then
 +
ArchiveDate = set_error('archive_missing_date');
 
end
 
end
end
+
if "no" == DeadURL then
 
+
local arch_text = cfg.messages['archived'];
local OriginalURL, OriginalURLorigin, OriginalFormat; -- TODO: swap chapter and title here so that archive applies to most specific if both are set?
+
if sepc ~= "." then arch_text = arch_text:lower() end
DeadURL = DeadURL:lower(); -- used later when assembling archived text
+
Archived = sepc .. " " .. substitute( cfg.messages['archived-not-dead'],
if is_set( ArchiveURL ) then
+
{ external_link( ArchiveURL, arch_text, A:ORIGIN('ArchiveURL'), nil ) .. ArchiveFormat, ArchiveDate } );
if is_set (URL) then
+
if not is_set(OriginalURL) then
OriginalURL = URL; -- save copy of original source URL
+
Archived = Archived .. " " .. set_error('archive_missing_url');  
OriginalURLorigin = URLorigin; -- name of url parameter for error messages
 
OriginalFormat = Format; -- and original |format=
 
if 'no' ~= DeadURL then -- if URL set then archive-url applies to it
 
URL = ArchiveURL -- swap-in the archive's url
 
URLorigin = A:ORIGIN('ArchiveURL') -- name of archive url parameter for error messages
 
Format = ArchiveFormat or ''; -- swap in archive's format
 
end
 
elseif is_set (ChapterURL) then -- URL not set so if chapter-url is set apply archive url to it
 
OriginalURL = ChapterURL; -- save copy of source chapter's url for archive text
 
OriginalURLorigin = ChapterURLorigin; -- name of chapter-url parameter for error messages
 
OriginalFormat = ChapterFormat; -- and original |format=
 
if 'no' ~= DeadURL then
 
ChapterURL = ArchiveURL -- swap-in the archive's url
 
ChapterURLorigin = A:ORIGIN('ArchiveURL') -- name of archive-url parameter for error messages
 
ChapterFormat = ArchiveFormat or ''; -- swap in archive's format
 
 
end
 
end
 +
elseif is_set(OriginalURL) then -- DeadURL is empty, 'yes', 'true', 'y', 'unfit', 'usurped'
 +
local arch_text = cfg.messages['archived-dead'];
 +
if sepc ~= "." then arch_text = arch_text:lower() end
 +
if in_array (DeadURL, {'unfit', 'usurped', 'bot: unknown'}) then
 +
Archived = sepc .. " " .. 'Archived from the original on ' .. ArchiveDate; -- format already styled
 +
if 'bot: unknown' == DeadURL then
 +
add_maint_cat ('bot:_unknown'); -- and add a category if not already added
 +
else
 +
add_maint_cat ('unfit'); -- and add a category if not already added
 +
end
 +
else -- DeadURL is empty, 'yes', 'true', or 'y'
 +
Archived = sepc .. " " .. substitute( arch_text,
 +
{ external_link( OriginalURL, cfg.messages['original'], OriginalURLorigin, OriginalAccess ) .. OriginalFormat, ArchiveDate } ); -- format already styled
 +
end
 +
else
 +
local arch_text = cfg.messages['archived-missing'];
 +
if sepc ~= "." then arch_text = arch_text:lower() end
 +
Archived = sepc .. " " .. substitute( arch_text,
 +
{ set_error('archive_missing_url'), ArchiveDate } );
 +
end
 +
elseif is_set (ArchiveFormat) then
 +
Archived = ArchiveFormat; -- if set and ArchiveURL not set ArchiveFormat has error message
 +
else
 +
Archived = ""
 +
end
 +
 +
local Lay = '';
 +
if is_set(LayURL) then
 +
if is_set(LayDate) then LayDate = " (" .. LayDate .. ")" end
 +
if is_set(LaySource) then
 +
LaySource = " &ndash; ''" .. safe_for_italics(LaySource) .. "''";
 +
else
 +
LaySource = "";
 
end
 
end
 +
if sepc == '.' then
 +
Lay = sepc .. " " .. external_link( LayURL, cfg.messages['lay summary'], A:ORIGIN('LayURL'), nil ) .. LayFormat .. LaySource .. LayDate
 +
else
 +
Lay = sepc .. " " .. external_link( LayURL, cfg.messages['lay summary']:lower(), A:ORIGIN('LayURL'), nil ) .. LayFormat .. LaySource .. LayDate
 +
end
 +
elseif is_set (LayFormat) then -- Test if |lay-format= is given without giving a |lay-url=
 +
Lay = sepc .. LayFormat; -- if set and LayURL not set, then LayFormat has error message
 
end
 
end
  
if in_array(config.CitationClass, {'web','news','journal', 'magazine', 'pressrelease','podcast', 'newsgroup', 'arxiv'}) or -- if any of the 'periodical' cites except encyclopedia
+
if is_set(Transcript) then
('citation' == config.CitationClass and is_set (Periodical) and not is_set (Encyclopedia)) then
+
if is_set(TranscriptURL) then
local chap_param;
+
Transcript = external_link( TranscriptURL, Transcript, TranscriptURLorigin, nil );
if is_set (Chapter) then -- get a parameter name from one of these chapter related meta-parameters
+
end
chap_param = A:ORIGIN ('Chapter')
+
Transcript = sepc .. ' ' .. Transcript .. TranscriptFormat;
elseif is_set (TransChapter) then
+
elseif is_set(TranscriptURL) then
chap_param = A:ORIGIN ('TransChapter')
+
Transcript = external_link( TranscriptURL, nil, TranscriptURLorigin, nil );
elseif is_set (ChapterURL) then
+
end
chap_param = A:ORIGIN ('ChapterURL')
 
elseif is_set (ScriptChapter) then
 
chap_param = A:ORIGIN ('ScriptChapter')
 
else is_set (ChapterFormat)
 
chap_param = A:ORIGIN ('ChapterFormat')
 
end
 
  
if is_set (chap_param) then -- if we found one
+
local Publisher;
table.insert( z.message_tail, { set_error( 'chapter_ignored', {chap_param}, true ) } ); -- add error message
+
if is_set(PublicationDate) then
Chapter = ''; -- and set them to empty string to be safe with concatenation
+
PublicationDate = wrap_msg ('published', PublicationDate);
TransChapter = '';
 
ChapterURL = '';
 
ScriptChapter = '';
 
ChapterFormat = '';
 
end
 
else -- otherwise, format chapter / article title
 
local no_quotes = false; -- default assume that we will be quoting the chapter parameter value
 
if is_set (Contribution) and 0 < #c then -- if this is a contribution with contributor(s)
 
if in_array (Contribution:lower(), cfg.keywords.contribution) then -- and a generic contribution title
 
no_quotes = true; -- then render it unquoted
 
end
 
end
 
 
 
Chapter = format_chapter_title (ScriptChapter, Chapter, TransChapter, ChapterURL, ChapterURLorigin, no_quotes); -- Contribution is also in Chapter
 
if is_set (Chapter) then
 
if 'map' == config.CitationClass and is_set (TitleType) then
 
Chapter = Chapter .. ' ' .. TitleType;
 
end
 
Chapter = Chapter .. ChapterFormat .. sepc .. ' ';
 
elseif is_set (ChapterFormat) then -- |chapter= not set but |chapter-format= is so ...
 
Chapter = ChapterFormat .. sepc .. ' '; -- ... ChapterFormat has error message, we want to see it
 
end
 
 
end
 
end
 
+
if is_set(PublisherName) then
-- Format main title.
+
if is_set(PublicationPlace) then
if is_set(TitleLink) and is_set(Title) then
+
Publisher = sepc .. " " .. PublicationPlace .. ": " .. PublisherName .. PublicationDate;
Title = "[[" .. TitleLink .. "|" .. Title .. "]]"
+
else
 +
Publisher = sepc .. " " .. PublisherName .. PublicationDate; 
 +
end
 +
elseif is_set(PublicationPlace) then
 +
Publisher= sepc .. " " .. PublicationPlace .. PublicationDate;
 +
else
 +
Publisher = PublicationDate;
 
end
 
end
 
if in_array(config.CitationClass, {'web','news','journal', 'magazine', 'pressrelease','podcast', 'newsgroup', 'mailinglist', 'arxiv'}) or
 
('citation' == config.CitationClass and is_set (Periodical) and not is_set (Encyclopedia)) or
 
('map' == config.CitationClass and is_set (Periodical)) then -- special case for cite map when the map is in a periodical treat as an article
 
Title = kern_quotes (Title); -- if necessary, separate title's leading and trailing quote marks from Module provided quote marks
 
Title = wrap_style ('quoted-title', Title);
 
 
 
Title = script_concatenate (Title, ScriptTitle); -- <bdi> tags, lang atribute, categorization, etc; must be done after title is wrapped
+
-- Several of the above rely upon detecting this as nil, so do it last.
TransTitle= wrap_style ('trans-quoted-title', TransTitle );
+
if is_set(Periodical) then
elseif 'report' == config.CitationClass then -- no styling for cite report
+
if is_set(Title) or is_set(TitleNote) then
Title = script_concatenate (Title, ScriptTitle); -- <bdi> tags, lang atribute, categorization, etc; must be done after title is wrapped
+
Periodical = sepc .. " " .. wrap_style ('italic-title', Periodical)  
TransTitle= wrap_style ('trans-quoted-title', TransTitle ); -- for cite report, use this form for trans-title
+
else
else
+
Periodical = wrap_style ('italic-title', Periodical)
Title = wrap_style ('italic-title', Title);
+
end
Title = script_concatenate (Title, ScriptTitle); -- <bdi> tags, lang atribute, categorization, etc; must be done after title is wrapped
 
TransTitle = wrap_style ('trans-italic-title', TransTitle);
 
 
end
 
end
  
TransError = "";
+
--[[
if is_set(TransTitle) then
+
Handle the oddity that is cite speech.  This code overrides whatever may be the value assigned to TitleNote (through |department=) and forces it to be " (Speech)" so that
if is_set(Title) then
+
the annotation directly follows the |title= parameter value in the citation rather than the |event= parameter value (if provided).
TransTitle = " " .. TransTitle;
+
]]
else
+
if "speech" == config.CitationClass then -- cite speech only
TransError = " " .. set_error( 'trans_missing_title', {'title'} );
+
TitleNote = " (Speech)"; -- annotate the citation
 +
if is_set (Periodical) then -- if Periodical, perhaps because of an included |website= or |journal= parameter
 +
if is_set (Conference) then -- and if |event= is set
 +
Conference = Conference .. sepc .. " "; -- then add appropriate punctuation to the end of the Conference variable before rendering
 +
end
 
end
 
end
 
end
 
end
 +
 +
-- Piece all bits together at last.  Here, all should be non-nil.
 +
-- We build things this way because it is more efficient in LUA
 +
-- not to keep reassigning to the same string variable over and over.
 +
 +
local tcommon;
 +
local tcommon2; -- used for book cite when |contributor= is set
 
 
Title = Title .. TransTitle;
+
if in_array(config.CitationClass, {"journal","citation"}) and is_set(Periodical) then
+
if is_set(Others) then Others = safe_join ({Others, sepc .. " "}, sepc) end -- add terminal punctuation & space; check for dup sepc; TODO why do we need to do this here?
if is_set(Title) then
+
tcommon = safe_join( {Others, Title, TitleNote, Conference, Periodical, Format, TitleType, Series, Language, Edition, Publisher, Agency, Volume}, sepc );
if not is_set(TitleLink) and is_set(URL) then  
+
elseif in_array(config.CitationClass, {"book","citation"}) and not is_set(Periodical) then -- special cases for book cites
Title = external_link( URL, Title, URLorigin ) .. TransError .. Format;
+
if is_set (Contributors) then -- when we are citing foreword, preface, introduction, etc
URL = "";
+
tcommon = safe_join( {Title, TitleNote}, sepc ); -- author and other stuff will come after this and before tcommon2
Format = "";
+
tcommon2 = safe_join( {Conference, Periodical, Format, TitleType, Series, Language, Volume, Others, Edition, Publisher, Agency}, sepc );
 
else
 
else
Title = Title .. TransError;
+
tcommon = safe_join( {Title, TitleNote, Conference, Periodical, Format, TitleType, Series, Language, Volume, Others, Edition, Publisher, Agency}, sepc );
 
end
 
end
end
 
  
if is_set(Place) then
+
elseif 'map' == config.CitationClass then -- special cases for cite map
Place = " " .. wrap_msg ('written', Place, use_lowercase) .. sepc .. " ";
+
if is_set (Chapter) then -- map in a book; TitleType is part of Chapter
end
+
tcommon = safe_join( {Title, Format, Edition, Scale, Series, Language, Cartography, Others, Publisher, Volume}, sepc );
 
+
elseif is_set (Periodical) then -- map in a periodical
if is_set (Conference) then
+
tcommon = safe_join( {Title, TitleType, Format, Periodical, Scale, Series, Language, Cartography, Others, Publisher, Volume}, sepc );
if is_set (ConferenceURL) then
+
else -- a sheet or stand-alone map
Conference = external_link( ConferenceURL, Conference, ConferenceURLorigin );
+
tcommon = safe_join( {Title, TitleType, Format, Edition, Scale, Series, Language, Cartography, Others, Publisher}, sepc );
 
end
 
end
Conference = sepc .. " " .. Conference .. ConferenceFormat;
+
elseif is_set(ConferenceURL) then
+
elseif 'episode' == config.CitationClass then -- special case for cite episode
Conference = sepc .. " " .. external_link( ConferenceURL, nil, ConferenceURLorigin );
+
tcommon = safe_join( {Title, TitleNote, TitleType, Series, Transcript, Language, Edition, Publisher}, sepc );
 +
 
 +
else -- all other CS1 templates
 +
tcommon = safe_join( {Title, TitleNote, Conference, Periodical, Format, TitleType, Series, Language,
 +
Volume, Others, Edition, Publisher, Agency}, sepc );
 +
end
 +
 +
if #ID_list > 0 then
 +
ID_list = safe_join( { sepc .. " ",  table.concat( ID_list, sepc .. " " ), ID }, sepc );
 +
else
 +
ID_list = ID;
 
end
 
end
 +
 +
local idcommon = safe_join( { ID_list, URL, Archived, AccessDate, Via, SubscriptionRequired, Lay, Quote }, sepc );
 +
local text;
 +
local pgtext = Position .. Sheet .. Sheets .. Page .. Pages .. At;
  
if not is_set(Position) then
+
if is_set(Date) then
local Minutes = A['Minutes'];
+
if is_set (Authors) or is_set (Editors) then -- date follows authors or editors when authors not set
local Time = A['Time'];
+
Date = " (" .. Date ..")" .. OrigYear .. sepc .. " "; -- in paranetheses
 
+
else -- neither of authors and editors set
if is_set(Minutes) then
+
if (string.sub(tcommon,-1,-1) == sepc) then -- if the last character of tcommon is sepc
if is_set (Time) then
+
Date = " " .. Date .. OrigYear; -- Date does not begin with sepc
table.insert( z.message_tail, { set_error( 'redundant_parameters', {wrap_style ('parameter', 'minutes') .. ' and ' .. wrap_style ('parameter', 'time')}, true ) } );
+
else
 +
Date = sepc .. " " .. Date .. OrigYear; -- Date begins with sepc
 
end
 
end
Position = " " .. Minutes .. " " .. cfg.messages['minutes'];
+
end
else
+
end
if is_set(Time) then
+
if is_set(Authors) then
local TimeCaption = A['TimeCaption']
+
if (not is_set (Date)) then -- when date is set it's in parentheses; no Authors termination
if not is_set(TimeCaption) then
+
Authors = terminate_name_list (Authors, sepc); -- when no date, terminate with 0 or 1 sepc and a space
TimeCaption = cfg.messages['event'];
+
end
if sepc ~= '.' then
+
if is_set(Editors) then
TimeCaption = TimeCaption:lower();
+
local in_text = " ";
end
+
local post_text = "";
 +
if is_set(Chapter) and 0 == #c then
 +
in_text = in_text .. cfg.messages['in'] .. " "
 +
if (sepc ~= '.') then
 +
in_text = in_text:lower() -- lowercase for cs2
 +
end
 +
else
 +
if EditorCount <= 1 then
 +
post_text = ", " .. cfg.messages['editor'];
 +
else
 +
post_text = ", " .. cfg.messages['editors'];
 
end
 
end
Position = " " .. TimeCaption .. " " .. Time;
+
end
end
+
Editors = terminate_name_list (in_text .. Editors .. post_text, sepc); -- terminate with 0 or 1 sepc and a space
 
end
 
end
else
+
if is_set (Contributors) then -- book cite and we're citing the intro, preface, etc
Position = " " .. Position;
+
local by_text = sepc .. ' ' .. cfg.messages['by'] .. ' ';
At = '';
+
if (sepc ~= '.') then by_text = by_text:lower() end -- lowercase for cs2
end
+
Authors = by_text .. Authors; -- author follows title so tweak it here
 
+
if is_set (Editors) and is_set (Date) then -- when Editors make sure that Authors gets terminated
Page, Pages, Sheet, Sheets = format_pages_sheets (Page, Pages, Sheet, Sheets, config.CitationClass, Periodical_origin, sepc, NoPP, use_lowercase);
+
Authors = terminate_name_list (Authors, sepc); -- terminate with 0 or 1 sepc and a space
 
+
end
At = is_set(At) and (sepc .. " " .. At) or "";
+
if (not is_set (Date)) then -- when date is set it's in parentheses; no Contributors termination
Position = is_set(Position) and (sepc .. " " .. Position) or "";
+
Contributors = terminate_name_list (Contributors, sepc); -- terminate with 0 or 1 sepc and a space
if config.CitationClass == 'map' then
+
end
local Section = A['Section'];
+
text = safe_join( {Contributors, Date, Chapter, tcommon, Authors, Place, Editors, tcommon2, pgtext, idcommon }, sepc );
local Sections = A['Sections'];
+
else
local Inset = A['Inset'];
+
text = safe_join( {Authors, Date, Chapter, Place, Editors, tcommon, pgtext, idcommon }, sepc );
 
if is_set( Inset ) then
 
Inset = sepc .. " " .. wrap_msg ('inset', Inset, use_lowercase);
 
end
 
 
 
if is_set( Sections ) then
 
Section = sepc .. " " .. wrap_msg ('sections', Sections, use_lowercase);
 
elseif is_set( Section ) then
 
Section = sepc .. " " .. wrap_msg ('section', Section, use_lowercase);
 
 
end
 
end
At = At .. Inset .. Section;
+
elseif is_set(Editors) then
end
+
if is_set(Date) then
 
+
if EditorCount <= 1 then
if is_set (Language) then
+
Editors = Editors .. ", " .. cfg.messages['editor'];
Language = language_parameter (Language); -- format, categories, name from ISO639-1, etc
+
else
 +
Editors = Editors .. ", " .. cfg.messages['editors'];
 +
end
 +
else
 +
if EditorCount <= 1 then
 +
Editors = Editors .. " (" .. cfg.messages['editor'] .. ")" .. sepc .. " "
 +
else
 +
Editors = Editors .. " (" .. cfg.messages['editors'] .. ")" .. sepc .. " "
 +
end
 +
end
 +
text = safe_join( {Editors, Date, Chapter, Place, tcommon, pgtext, idcommon}, sepc );
 
else
 
else
Language=""; -- language not specified so make sure this is an empty string;
+
if in_array(config.CitationClass, {"journal","citation"}) and is_set(Periodical) then
 +
text = safe_join( {Chapter, Place, tcommon, pgtext, Date, idcommon}, sepc );
 +
else
 +
text = safe_join( {Chapter, Place, tcommon, Date, pgtext, idcommon}, sepc );
 +
end
 
end
 
end
 +
 +
if is_set(PostScript) and PostScript ~= sepc then
 +
text = safe_join( {text, sepc}, sepc );  --Deals with italics, spaces, etc.
 +
text = text:sub(1,-sepc:len()-1);
 +
end
 +
 +
text = safe_join( {text, PostScript}, sepc );
  
Others = is_set(Others) and (sepc .. " " .. Others) or "";
+
-- Now enclose the whole thing in a <cite/> element
 +
local options = {};
 
 
if is_set (Translators) then
+
if is_set(config.CitationClass) and config.CitationClass ~= "citation" then
Others = sepc .. ' Translated by ' .. Translators .. Others;  
+
options.class = config.CitationClass;
 +
options.class = "citation " .. config.CitationClass; -- class=citation required for blue highlight when used with |ref=
 +
else
 +
options.class = "citation";
 
end
 
end
 
+
TitleNote = is_set(TitleNote) and (sepc .. " " .. TitleNote) or "";
+
if is_set(Ref) and Ref:lower() ~= "none" then -- set reference anchor if appropriate
if is_set (Edition) then
+
local id = Ref
if Edition:match ('%f[%a][Ee]d%.?$') or Edition:match ('%f[%a][Ee]dition$') then
+
if ('harv' == Ref ) then
add_maint_cat ('extra_text', 'edition');
+
local namelist = {}; -- holds selected contributor, author, editor name list
 +
local year = first_set ({Year, anchor_year}, 2); -- Year first for legacy citations and for YMD dates that require disambiguation
 +
 
 +
if #c > 0 then -- if there is a contributor list
 +
namelist = c; -- select it
 +
elseif #a > 0 then -- or an author list
 +
namelist = a;
 +
elseif #e > 0 then -- or an editor list
 +
namelist = e;
 +
end
 +
if #namelist > 0 then -- if there are names in namelist
 +
id = anchor_id (namelist, year); -- go make the CITEREF anchor
 +
else
 +
id = ''; -- unset
 +
end
 
end
 
end
Edition = " " .. wrap_msg ('edition', Edition);
+
options.id = id;
else
+
end
Edition = '';
+
 +
if string.len(text:gsub("<span[^>/]*>(.-)</span>", "%1"):gsub("%b<>","")) <= 2 then -- remove <span> tags and other html-like markup; then get length of what remains
 +
z.error_categories = {};
 +
text = set_error('empty_citation');
 +
z.message_tail = {};
 
end
 
end
 +
 +
local render = {}; -- here we collect the final bits for concatenation into the rendered citation
  
Series = is_set(Series) and (sepc .. " " .. Series) or "";
+
if is_set(options.id) then -- here we wrap the rendered citation in <cite ...>...</cite> tags
OrigYear = is_set(OrigYear) and (" [" .. OrigYear .. "]") or "";
+
table.insert (render, substitute (cfg.presentation['cite-id'], {mw.uri.anchorEncode(options.id), mw.text.nowiki(options.class), text})); -- when |ref= is set
Agency = is_set(Agency) and (sepc .. " " .. Agency) or "";
+
else
 +
table.insert (render, substitute (cfg.presentation['cite'], {mw.text.nowiki(options.class), text})); -- all other cases
 +
end
  
Volume = format_volume_issue (Volume, Issue, config.CitationClass, Periodical_origin, sepc, use_lowercase);
+
table.insert (render, substitute (cfg.presentation['ocins'], {OCinSoutput})); -- append metadata to the citation
  
------------------------------------ totally unrelated data
+
if #z.message_tail ~= 0 then
if is_set(Via) then
+
table.insert (render, ' ');
Via = " " .. wrap_msg ('via', Via);
+
for i,v in ipairs( z.message_tail ) do
 +
if is_set(v[1]) then
 +
if i == #z.message_tail then
 +
table.insert (render, error_comment( v[1], v[2] ));
 +
else
 +
table.insert (render, error_comment( v[1] .. "; ", v[2] ));
 +
end
 +
end
 +
end
 +
end
 +
 
 +
if #z.maintenance_cats ~= 0 then
 +
table.insert (render, '<span class="citation-comment" style="display:none; color:#33aa33; margin-left:0.3em">');
 +
for _, v in ipairs( z.maintenance_cats ) do -- append maintenance categories
 +
table.insert (render, v);
 +
table.insert (render, ' (');
 +
table.insert (render, make_wikilink (':Category:' .. v, 'link'));
 +
table.insert (render, ') ');
 +
end
 +
table.insert (render, '</span>');
 +
end
 +
 +
no_tracking_cats = no_tracking_cats:lower();
 +
if in_array(no_tracking_cats, {"", "no", "false", "n"}) then
 +
for _, v in ipairs( z.error_categories ) do
 +
table.insert (render, make_wikilink ('Category:' .. v));
 +
end
 +
for _, v in ipairs( z.maintenance_cats ) do -- append maintenance categories
 +
table.insert (render, make_wikilink ('Category:' .. v));
 +
end
 +
for _, v in ipairs( z.properties_cats ) do -- append properties categories
 +
table.insert (render, make_wikilink ('Category:' .. v));
 +
end
 
end
 
end
  
--[[
+
return table.concat (render);
Subscription implies paywall; Registration does not.  If both are used in a citation, the subscription required link
+
end
note is displayed. There are no error messages for this condition.
 
  
]]
 
if is_set (SubscriptionRequired) then
 
SubscriptionRequired = sepc .. " " .. cfg.messages['subscription']; -- subscription required message
 
elseif is_set (RegistrationRequired) then
 
SubscriptionRequired = sepc .. " " .. cfg.messages['registration']; -- registration required message
 
else
 
SubscriptionRequired = ''; -- either or both might be set to something other than yes true y
 
end
 
  
if is_set(AccessDate) then
+
--[[--------------------------< V A L I D A T E >--------------------------------------------------------------
local retrv_text = " " .. cfg.messages['retrieved']
 
  
AccessDate = nowrap_date (AccessDate); -- wrap in nowrap span if date in appropriate format
+
Looks for a parameter's name in one of several whitelists.
if (sepc ~= ".") then retrv_text = retrv_text:lower() end -- if 'citation', lower case
+
 
AccessDate = substitute (retrv_text, AccessDate); -- add retrieved text
+
Parameters in the whitelist can have three values:
-- neither of these work; don't know why; it seems that substitute() isn't being called
+
true - active, supported parameters
AccessDate = substitute (cfg.presentation['accessdate'], {sepc, AccessDate}); -- allow editors to hide accessdates
+
false - deprecated, supported parameters
end
+
nil - unsupported parameters
 +
 +
]]
 +
 
 +
local function validate (name, cite_class)
 +
local name = tostring (name);
 +
local state;
 
 
if is_set(ID) then ID = sepc .." ".. ID; end
+
if in_array (cite_class, {'arxiv', 'biorxiv', 'citeseerx'}) then -- limited parameter sets allowed for these templates
  if "thesis" == config.CitationClass and is_set(Docket) then
+
state = whitelist.limited_basic_arguments[name];
ID = sepc .." Docket ".. Docket .. ID;
+
if true == state then return true; end -- valid actively supported parameter
end
+
if false == state then
  if "report" == config.CitationClass and is_set(Docket) then -- for cite report when |docket= is set
+
deprecated_parameter (name); -- parameter is deprecated but still supported
ID = sepc .. ' ' .. Docket; -- overwrite ID even if |id= is set
+
return true;
end
+
end
 +
 
 +
state = whitelist[cite_class .. '_basic_arguments'][name]; -- look in the parameter-list for the template identified by cite_class
  
ID_list = build_id_list( ID_list, {DoiBroken = DoiBroken, ASINTLD = ASINTLD, IgnoreISBN = IgnoreISBN, Embargo=Embargo, Class = Class} );
+
if true == state then return true; end -- valid actively supported parameter
 +
if false == state then
 +
deprecated_parameter (name); -- parameter is deprecated but still supported
 +
return true;
 +
end
 +
-- limited enumerated parameters list
 +
name = name:gsub("%d+", "#" ); -- replace digit(s) with # (last25 becomes last#) (mw.ustring because non-Western 'local' digits)
 +
state = whitelist.limited_numbered_arguments[name];
 +
if true == state then return true; end -- valid actively supported parameter
 +
if false == state then
 +
deprecated_parameter (name); -- parameter is deprecated but still supported
 +
return true;
 +
end
  
if is_set(URL) then
+
return false; -- not supported because not found or name is set to nil
URL = " " .. external_link( URL, nil, URLorigin );
+
end -- end limited parameter-set templates
 +
 +
state = whitelist.basic_arguments[name]; -- all other templates; all normal parameters allowed
 +
 +
if true == state then return true; end -- valid actively supported parameter
 +
if false == state then
 +
deprecated_parameter (name); -- parameter is deprecated but still supported
 +
return true;
 
end
 
end
 +
-- all enumerated parameters allowed
 +
name = name:gsub("%d+", "#" ); -- replace digit(s) with # (last25 becomes last#) (mw.ustring because non-Western 'local' digits)
 +
state = whitelist.numbered_arguments[name];
  
if is_set(Quote) then
+
if true == state then return true; end -- valid actively supported parameter
if Quote:sub(1,1) == '"' and Quote:sub(-1,-1) == '"' then -- if first and last characters of quote are quote marks
+
if false == state then
Quote = Quote:sub(2,-2); -- strip them off
+
deprecated_parameter (name); -- parameter is deprecated but still supported
end
+
return true;
Quote = sepc .." " .. wrap_style ('quoted-text', Quote ); -- wrap in <q>...</q> tags
 
PostScript = ""; -- cs1|2 does not supply terminal punctuation when |quote= is set
 
 
end
 
end
 
 
local Archived
+
return false; -- not supported because not found or name is set to nil
if is_set(ArchiveURL) then
+
end
if not is_set(ArchiveDate) then
+
 
ArchiveDate = set_error('archive_missing_date');
+
 
end
+
--[[--------------------------< M I S S I N G _ P I P E _ C H E C K >------------------------------------------
if "no" == DeadURL then
+
 
local arch_text = cfg.messages['archived'];
+
Look at the contents of a parameter. If the content has a string of characters and digits followed by an equal
if sepc ~= "." then arch_text = arch_text:lower() end
+
sign, compare the alphanumeric string to the list of cs1|2 parameters. If found, then the string is possibly a
Archived = sepc .. " " .. substitute( cfg.messages['archived-not-dead'],
+
parameter that is missing its pipe:
{ external_link( ArchiveURL, arch_text, A:ORIGIN('ArchiveURL') ) .. ArchiveFormat, ArchiveDate } );
+
{{cite ... |title=Title access-date=2016-03-17}}
if not is_set(OriginalURL) then
+
 
Archived = Archived .. " " .. set_error('archive_missing_url');  
+
cs1|2 shares some parameter names with xml/html atributes: class=, title=, etc. To prevent false positives xml/html
end
+
tags are removed before the search.
elseif is_set(OriginalURL) then -- DeadURL is empty, 'yes', 'true', 'y', 'unfit', 'usurped'
+
 
local arch_text = cfg.messages['archived-dead'];
+
If a missing pipe is detected, this function adds the missing pipe maintenance category.
if sepc ~= "." then arch_text = arch_text:lower() end
+
 
if in_array (DeadURL, {'unfit', 'usurped'}) then
+
]]
Archived = sepc .. " " .. 'Archived from the original on ' .. ArchiveDate; -- format already styled
+
 
else -- DeadURL is empty, 'yes', 'true', or 'y'
+
local function missing_pipe_check (value)
Archived = sepc .. " " .. substitute( arch_text,
+
local capture;
{ external_link( OriginalURL, cfg.messages['original'], OriginalURLorigin ) .. OriginalFormat, ArchiveDate } ); -- format already styled
+
value = value:gsub ('%b<>', ''); -- remove xml/html tags because attributes: class=, title=, etc
end
+
 
else
+
capture = value:match ('%s+(%a[%a%d]+)%s*=') or value:match ('^(%a[%a%d]+)%s*='); -- find and categorize parameters with possible missing pipes
local arch_text = cfg.messages['archived-missing'];
+
if capture and validate (capture) then -- if the capture is a valid parameter name
if sepc ~= "." then arch_text = arch_text:lower() end
+
add_maint_cat ('missing_pipe');
Archived = sepc .. " " .. substitute( arch_text,
+
end
{ set_error('archive_missing_url'), ArchiveDate } );
+
end
end
+
 
elseif is_set (ArchiveFormat) then
+
 
Archived = ArchiveFormat; -- if set and ArchiveURL not set ArchiveFormat has error message
+
--[[--------------------------< C S 1 . C I T A T I O N >------------------------------------------------------
else
+
 
Archived = ""
+
This is used by templates such as {{cite book}} to create the actual citation text.
end
+
 
 +
]]
 +
 
 +
function cs1.citation(frame)
 +
Frame = frame; -- save a copy incase we need to display an error message in preview mode
 +
local pframe = frame:getParent()
 +
local validation, utilities, identifiers, metadata, styles;
 
 
local Lay = '';
+
if nil ~= string.find (frame:getTitle(), 'sandbox', 1, true) then -- did the {{#invoke:}} use sandbox version?
if is_set(LayURL) then
+
cfg = mw.loadData ('Module:Citation/CS1/Configuration/sandbox'); -- load sandbox versions of support modules
if is_set(LayDate) then LayDate = " (" .. LayDate .. ")" end
+
whitelist = mw.loadData ('Module:Citation/CS1/Whitelist/sandbox');
if is_set(LaySource) then
+
utilities = require ('Module:Citation/CS1/Utilities/sandbox');
LaySource = " &ndash; ''" .. safe_for_italics(LaySource) .. "''";
+
validation = require ('Module:Citation/CS1/Date_validation/sandbox');
else
+
identifiers = require ('Module:Citation/CS1/Identifiers/sandbox');
LaySource = "";
+
metadata = require ('Module:Citation/CS1/COinS/sandbox');
end
+
styles = 'Module:Citation/CS1/sandbox/styles.css';
if sepc == '.' then
+
Lay = sepc .. " " .. external_link( LayURL, cfg.messages['lay summary'], A:ORIGIN('LayURL') ) .. LayFormat .. LaySource .. LayDate
+
else -- otherwise
else
+
cfg = mw.loadData ('Module:Citation/CS1/Configuration'); -- load live versions of support modules
Lay = sepc .. " " .. external_link( LayURL, cfg.messages['lay summary']:lower(), A:ORIGIN('LayURL') ) .. LayFormat .. LaySource .. LayDate
+
whitelist = mw.loadData ('Module:Citation/CS1/Whitelist');
end
+
utilities = require ('Module:Citation/CS1/Utilities');
elseif is_set (LayFormat) then -- Test if |lay-format= is given without giving a |lay-url=
+
validation = require ('Module:Citation/CS1/Date_validation');
Lay = sepc .. LayFormat; -- if set and LayURL not set, then LayFormat has error message
+
identifiers = require ('Module:Citation/CS1/Identifiers');
 +
metadata = require ('Module:Citation/CS1/COinS');
 +
styles = 'Module:Citation/CS1/styles.css';
 +
 
 
end
 
end
  
if is_set(Transcript) then
+
utilities.set_selected_modules (cfg); -- so that functions in Utilities can see the cfg tables
if is_set(TranscriptURL) then
+
identifiers.set_selected_modules (cfg, utilities); -- so that functions in Identifiers can see the selected cfg tables and selected Utilities module
Transcript = external_link( TranscriptURL, Transcript, TranscriptURLorigin );
+
validation.set_selected_modules (cfg, utilities); -- so that functions in Date validataion can see selected cfg tables and the selected Utilities module
end
+
metadata.set_selected_modules (cfg, utilities); -- so that functions in COinS can see the selected cfg tables and selected Utilities module
Transcript = sepc .. ' ' .. Transcript .. TranscriptFormat;
+
 
elseif is_set(TranscriptURL) then
+
dates = validation.dates; -- imported functions from Module:Citation/CS1/Date validation
Transcript = external_link( TranscriptURL, nil, TranscriptURLorigin );
+
year_date_check = validation.year_date_check;
end
+
reformat_dates = validation.reformat_dates;
 +
date_hyphen_to_dash = validation.date_hyphen_to_dash;
 +
date_name_xlate = validation.date_name_xlate;
 +
 
 +
is_set = utilities.is_set; -- imported functions from Module:Citation/CS1/Utilities
 +
in_array = utilities.in_array;
 +
substitute = utilities.substitute;
 +
error_comment = utilities.error_comment;
 +
set_error = utilities.set_error;
 +
select_one = utilities.select_one;
 +
add_maint_cat = utilities.add_maint_cat;
 +
wrap_style = utilities.wrap_style;
 +
safe_for_italics = utilities.safe_for_italics;
 +
is_wikilink = utilities.is_wikilink;
 +
make_wikilink = utilities.make_wikilink;
 +
 
 +
z = utilities.z; -- table of error and category tables in Module:Citation/CS1/Utilities
  
local Publisher;
+
extract_ids = identifiers.extract_ids; -- imported functions from Module:Citation/CS1/Identifiers
if is_set(Periodical) and
+
build_id_list = identifiers.build_id_list;
not in_array(config.CitationClass, {"encyclopaedia","web","pressrelease","podcast"}) then
+
is_embargoed = identifiers.is_embargoed;
if is_set(PublisherName) then
+
extract_id_access_levels = identifiers.extract_id_access_levels;
if is_set(PublicationPlace) then
 
Publisher = PublicationPlace .. ": " .. PublisherName;
 
else
 
Publisher = PublisherName; 
 
end
 
elseif is_set(PublicationPlace) then
 
Publisher= PublicationPlace;
 
else
 
Publisher = "";
 
end
 
if is_set(PublicationDate) then
 
if is_set(Publisher) then
 
Publisher = Publisher .. ", " .. wrap_msg ('published', PublicationDate);
 
else
 
Publisher = PublicationDate;
 
end
 
end
 
if is_set(Publisher) then
 
Publisher = " (" .. Publisher .. ")";
 
end
 
else
 
if is_set(PublicationDate) then
 
PublicationDate = " (" .. wrap_msg ('published', PublicationDate) .. ")";
 
end
 
if is_set(PublisherName) then
 
if is_set(PublicationPlace) then
 
Publisher = sepc .. " " .. PublicationPlace .. ": " .. PublisherName .. PublicationDate;
 
else
 
Publisher = sepc .. " " .. PublisherName .. PublicationDate; 
 
end
 
elseif is_set(PublicationPlace) then
 
Publisher= sepc .. " " .. PublicationPlace .. PublicationDate;
 
else
 
Publisher = PublicationDate;
 
end
 
end
 
 
 
-- Several of the above rely upon detecting this as nil, so do it last.
+
make_coins_title = metadata.make_coins_title; -- imported functions from Module:Citation/CS1/COinS
if is_set(Periodical) then
+
get_coins_pages = metadata.get_coins_pages;
if is_set(Title) or is_set(TitleNote) then
+
COinS = metadata.COinS;
Periodical = sepc .. " " .. wrap_style ('italic-title', Periodical)
+
 
else
+
local args = {}; -- table where we store all of the template's arguments
Periodical = wrap_style ('italic-title', Periodical)
+
local suggestions = {}; -- table where we store suggestions if we need to loadData them
end
+
local error_text, error_state;
end
 
  
--[[
+
local config = {}; -- table to store parameters from the module {{#invoke:}}
Handle the oddity that is cite speech.  This code overrides whatever may be the value assigned to TitleNote (through |department=) and forces it to be " (Speech)" so that
+
for k, v in pairs( frame.args ) do
the annotation directly follows the |title= parameter value in the citation rather than the |event= parameter value (if provided).
+
config[k] = v;
]]
+
-- args[k] = v; -- debug tool that allows us to render a citation from module {{#invoke:}}
if "speech" == config.CitationClass then -- cite speech only
+
end
TitleNote = " (Speech)"; -- annotate the citation
 
if is_set (Periodical) then -- if Periodical, perhaps because of an included |website= or |journal= parameter
 
if is_set (Conference) then -- and if |event= is set
 
Conference = Conference .. sepc .. " "; -- then add appropriate punctuation to the end of the Conference variable before rendering
 
end
 
end
 
end
 
  
-- Piece all bits together at last.  Here, all should be non-nil.
+
local capture; -- the single supported capture when matching unknown parameters using patterns
-- We build things this way because it is more efficient in LUA
+
for k, v in pairs( pframe.args ) do
-- not to keep reassigning to the same string variable over and over.
+
if v ~= '' then
 
+
if ('string' == type (k)) then
local tcommon;
+
k = mw.ustring.gsub (k, '%d', cfg.date_names.local_digits); -- for enumerated parameters, translate 'local' digits to Western 0-9
local tcommon2; -- used for book cite when |contributor= is set
 
 
if in_array(config.CitationClass, {"journal","citation"}) and is_set(Periodical) then
 
if is_set(Others) then Others = Others .. sepc .. " " end
 
tcommon = safe_join( {Others, Title, TitleNote, Conference, Periodical, Format, TitleType, Series,
 
Language, Edition, Publisher, Agency, Volume}, sepc );
 
 
elseif in_array(config.CitationClass, {"book","citation"}) and not is_set(Periodical) then -- special cases for book cites
 
if is_set (Contributors) then -- when we are citing foreword, preface, introduction, etc
 
tcommon = safe_join( {Title, TitleNote}, sepc ); -- author and other stuff will come after this and before tcommon2
 
tcommon2 = safe_join( {Conference, Periodical, Format, TitleType, Series, Language, Volume, Others, Edition, Publisher, Agency}, sepc );
 
else
 
tcommon = safe_join( {Title, TitleNote, Conference, Periodical, Format, TitleType, Series, Language, Volume, Others, Edition, Publisher, Agency}, sepc );
 
end
 
 
 
elseif 'map' == config.CitationClass then -- special cases for cite map
 
if is_set (Chapter) then -- map in a book; TitleType is part of Chapter
 
tcommon = safe_join( {Title, Format, Edition, Scale, Series, Language, Cartography, Others, Publisher, Volume}, sepc );
 
elseif is_set (Periodical) then -- map in a periodical
 
tcommon = safe_join( {Title, TitleType, Format, Periodical, Scale, Series, Language, Cartography, Others, Publisher, Volume}, sepc );
 
else -- a sheet or stand-alone map
 
tcommon = safe_join( {Title, TitleType, Format, Edition, Scale, Series, Language, Cartography, Others, Publisher}, sepc );
 
end
 
 
elseif 'episode' == config.CitationClass then -- special case for cite episode
 
tcommon = safe_join( {Title, TitleNote, TitleType, Series, Transcript, Language, Edition, Publisher}, sepc );
 
else -- all other CS1 templates
 
tcommon = safe_join( {Title, TitleNote, Conference, Periodical, Format, TitleType, Series, Language,
 
Volume, Others, Edition, Publisher, Agency}, sepc );
 
end
 
 
if #ID_list > 0 then
 
ID_list = safe_join( { sepc .. " ",  table.concat( ID_list, sepc .. " " ), ID }, sepc );
 
else
 
ID_list = ID;
 
end
 
 
local idcommon = safe_join( { ID_list, URL, Archived, AccessDate, Via, SubscriptionRequired, Lay, Quote }, sepc );
 
local text;
 
local pgtext = Position .. Sheet .. Sheets .. Page .. Pages .. At;
 
 
 
if is_set(Date) then
 
if is_set (Authors) or is_set (Editors) then -- date follows authors or editors when authors not set
 
Date = " (" .. Date ..")" .. OrigYear .. sepc .. " "; -- in paranetheses
 
else -- neither of authors and editors set
 
if (string.sub(tcommon,-1,-1) == sepc) then -- if the last character of tcommon is sepc
 
Date = " " .. Date .. OrigYear; -- Date does not begin with sepc
 
else
 
Date = sepc .. " " .. Date .. OrigYear; -- Date begins with sepc
 
end
 
end
 
end
 
if is_set(Authors) then
 
if is_set(Coauthors) then
 
if 'vanc' == NameListFormat then -- separate authors and coauthors with proper name-list-separator
 
Authors = Authors .. ', ' .. Coauthors;
 
else
 
Authors = Authors .. '; ' .. Coauthors;
 
end
 
end
 
if not is_set (Date) then -- when date is set it's in parentheses; no Authors termination
 
Authors = terminate_name_list (Authors, sepc); -- when no date, terminate with 0 or 1 sepc and a space
 
end
 
if is_set(Editors) then
 
local in_text = " ";
 
local post_text = "";
 
if is_set(Chapter) and 0 == #c then
 
in_text = in_text .. cfg.messages['in'] .. " "
 
if (sepc ~= '.') then in_text = in_text:lower() end -- lowercase for cs2
 
else
 
if EditorCount <= 1 then
 
post_text = ", " .. cfg.messages['editor'];
 
else
 
post_text = ", " .. cfg.messages['editors'];
 
end
 
end
 
Editors = terminate_name_list (in_text .. Editors .. post_text, sepc); -- terminate with 0 or 1 sepc and a space
 
end
 
if is_set (Contributors) then -- book cite and we're citing the intro, preface, etc
 
local by_text = sepc .. ' ' .. cfg.messages['by'] .. ' ';
 
if (sepc ~= '.') then by_text = by_text:lower() end -- lowercase for cs2
 
Authors = by_text .. Authors; -- author follows title so tweak it here
 
if is_set (Editors) then -- when Editors make sure that Authors gets terminated
 
Authors = terminate_name_list (Authors, sepc); -- terminate with 0 or 1 sepc and a space
 
end
 
if not is_set (Date) then -- when date is set it's in parentheses; no Contributors termination
 
Contributors = terminate_name_list (Contributors, sepc); -- terminate with 0 or 1 sepc and a space
 
end
 
text = safe_join( {Contributors, Date, Chapter, tcommon, Authors, Place, Editors, tcommon2, pgtext, idcommon }, sepc );
 
else
 
text = safe_join( {Authors, Date, Chapter, Place, Editors, tcommon, pgtext, idcommon }, sepc );
 
end
 
elseif is_set(Editors) then
 
if is_set(Date) then
 
if EditorCount <= 1 then
 
Editors = Editors .. ", " .. cfg.messages['editor'];
 
else
 
Editors = Editors .. ", " .. cfg.messages['editors'];
 
end
 
else
 
if EditorCount <= 1 then
 
Editors = Editors .. " (" .. cfg.messages['editor'] .. ")" .. sepc .. " "
 
else
 
Editors = Editors .. " (" .. cfg.messages['editors'] .. ")" .. sepc .. " "
 
end
 
end
 
text = safe_join( {Editors, Date, Chapter, Place, tcommon, pgtext, idcommon}, sepc );
 
else
 
if config.CitationClass=="journal" and is_set(Periodical) then
 
text = safe_join( {Chapter, Place, tcommon, pgtext, Date, idcommon}, sepc );
 
else
 
text = safe_join( {Chapter, Place, tcommon, Date, pgtext, idcommon}, sepc );
 
end
 
end
 
 
if is_set(PostScript) and PostScript ~= sepc then
 
text = safe_join( {text, sepc}, sepc );  --Deals with italics, spaces, etc.
 
text = text:sub(1,-sepc:len()-1);
 
end
 
 
text = safe_join( {text, PostScript}, sepc );
 
 
 
-- Now enclose the whole thing in a <cite/> element
 
local options = {};
 
 
if is_set(config.CitationClass) and config.CitationClass ~= "citation" then
 
options.class = config.CitationClass;
 
options.class = "citation " .. config.CitationClass; -- class=citation required for blue highlight when used with |ref=
 
else
 
options.class = "citation";
 
end
 
 
if is_set(Ref) and Ref:lower() ~= "none" then -- set reference anchor if appropriate
 
local id = Ref
 
if ('harv' == Ref ) then
 
local namelist = {}; -- holds selected contributor, author, editor name list
 
-- local year = first_set (Year, anchor_year); -- Year first for legacy citations and for YMD dates that require disambiguation
 
local year = first_set ({Year, anchor_year}, 2); -- Year first for legacy citations and for YMD dates that require disambiguation
 
 
 
if #c > 0 then -- if there is a contributor list
 
namelist = c; -- select it
 
elseif #a > 0 then -- or an author list
 
namelist = a;
 
elseif #e > 0 then -- or an editor list
 
namelist = e;
 
end
 
id = anchor_id (namelist, year); -- go make the CITEREF anchor
 
end
 
options.id = id;
 
end
 
 
if string.len(text:gsub("<span[^>/]*>.-</span>", ""):gsub("%b<>","")) <= 2 then
 
z.error_categories = {};
 
text = set_error('empty_citation');
 
z.message_tail = {};
 
end
 
 
if is_set(options.id) then
 
text = '<cite id="' .. mw.uri.anchorEncode(options.id) ..'" class="' .. mw.text.nowiki(options.class) .. '">' .. text .. "</cite>";
 
else
 
text = '<cite class="' .. mw.text.nowiki(options.class) .. '">' .. text .. "</cite>";
 
end
 
 
 
local empty_span = '<span style="display:none;">&nbsp;</span>';
 
 
-- Note: Using display: none on the COinS span breaks some clients.
 
local OCinS = '<span title="' .. OCinSoutput .. '" class="Z3988">' .. empty_span .. '</span>';
 
text = text .. OCinS;
 
 
if #z.message_tail ~= 0 then
 
text = text .. " ";
 
for i,v in ipairs( z.message_tail ) do
 
if is_set(v[1]) then
 
if i == #z.message_tail then
 
text = text .. error_comment( v[1], v[2] );
 
else
 
text = text .. error_comment( v[1] .. "; ", v[2] );
 
end
 
 
end
 
end
end
+
if not validate( k, config.CitationClass ) then
end
 
 
 
if #z.maintenance_cats ~= 0 then
 
text = text .. '<span class="citation-comment" style="display:none; color:#33aa33">';
 
for _, v in ipairs( z.maintenance_cats ) do -- append maintenance categories
 
text = text .. ' ' .. v .. ' ([[:Category:' .. v ..'|link]])';
 
end
 
text = text .. '</span>'; -- maintenance mesages (realy just the names of the categories for now)
 
end
 
 
no_tracking_cats = no_tracking_cats:lower();
 
if in_array(no_tracking_cats, {"", "no", "false", "n"}) then
 
for _, v in ipairs( z.error_categories ) do
 
text = text .. '[[Category:' .. v ..']]';
 
end
 
for _, v in ipairs( z.maintenance_cats ) do -- append maintenance categories
 
text = text .. '[[Category:' .. v ..']]';
 
end
 
for _, v in ipairs( z.properties_cats ) do -- append maintenance categories
 
text = text .. '[[Category:' .. v ..']]';
 
end
 
end
 
 
return text
 
end
 
 
 
--[[--------------------------< H A S _ I N V I S I B L E _ C H A R S >----------------------------------------
 
 
 
This function searches a parameter's value for nonprintable or invisible characters.  The search stops at the first match.
 
 
 
Sometime after this module is done with rendering a citation, some C0 control characters are replaced with the
 
replacement character.  That replacement character is not detected by this test though it is visible to readers
 
of the rendered citation.  This function will detect the replacement character when it is part of the wikisource.
 
 
 
Output of this function is an error message that identifies the character or the Unicode group that the character
 
belongs to along with its position in the parameter value.
 
 
 
]]
 
--[[
 
local function has_invisible_chars (param, v)
 
local position = '';
 
local i=1;
 
 
 
while cfg.invisible_chars[i] do
 
local char=cfg.invisible_chars[i][1] -- the character or group name
 
local pattern=cfg.invisible_chars[i][2] -- the pattern used to find it
 
v = mw.text.unstripNoWiki( v ); -- remove nowiki stripmarkers
 
position = mw.ustring.find (v, pattern) -- see if the parameter value contains characters that match the pattern
 
if position then
 
table.insert( z.message_tail, { set_error( 'invisible_char', {char, wrap_style ('parameter', param), position}, true ) } ); -- add error message
 
return; -- and done with this parameter
 
end
 
i=i+1; -- bump our index
 
end
 
end
 
]]
 
 
 
--[[--------------------------< Z . C I T A T I O N >----------------------------------------------------------
 
 
 
This is used by templates such as {{cite book}} to create the actual citation text.
 
 
 
]]
 
 
 
function z.citation(frame)
 
local pframe = frame:getParent()
 
local validation;
 
 
if nil ~= string.find (frame:getTitle(), 'sandbox', 1, true) then -- did the {{#invoke:}} use sandbox version?
 
cfg = mw.loadData ('Module:Citation/CS1/Configuration/sandbox'); -- load sandbox versions of Configuration and Whitelist and ...
 
whitelist = mw.loadData ('Module:Citation/CS1/Whitelist/sandbox');
 
validation = require ('Module:Citation/CS1/Date_validation/sandbox'); -- ... sandbox version of date validation code
 
 
 
else -- otherwise
 
cfg = mw.loadData ('Module:Citation/CS1/Configuration'); -- load live versions of Configuration and Whitelist and ...
 
whitelist = mw.loadData ('Module:Citation/CS1/Whitelist');
 
validation = require ('Module:Citation/CS1/Date_validation'); -- ... live version of date validation code
 
end
 
 
 
dates = validation.dates; -- imported functions
 
year_date_check = validation.year_date_check;
 
 
 
local args = {};
 
local suggestions = {};
 
local error_text, error_state;
 
 
 
local config = {};
 
for k, v in pairs( frame.args ) do
 
config[k] = v;
 
args[k] = v;  
 
end
 
 
 
local capture; -- the single supported capture when matching unknown parameters using patterns
 
for k, v in pairs( pframe.args ) do
 
if v ~= '' then
 
if not validate( k ) then
 
 
error_text = "";
 
error_text = "";
 
if type( k ) ~= 'string' then
 
if type( k ) ~= 'string' then
Line 4,065: Line 3,570:
 
error_text, error_state = set_error( 'text_ignored', {v}, true );
 
error_text, error_state = set_error( 'text_ignored', {v}, true );
 
end
 
end
elseif validate( k:lower() ) then  
+
elseif validate( k:lower(), config.CitationClass ) then  
error_text, error_state = set_error( 'parameter_ignored_suggest', {k, k:lower()}, true );
+
error_text, error_state = set_error( 'parameter_ignored_suggest', {k, k:lower()}, true ); -- suggest the lowercase version of the parameter
 
else
 
else
 
if nil == suggestions.suggestions then -- if this table is nil then we need to load it
 
if nil == suggestions.suggestions then -- if this table is nil then we need to load it
Line 4,078: Line 3,583:
 
capture = k:match (pattern); -- the whole match if no caputre in pattern else the capture if a match
 
capture = k:match (pattern); -- the whole match if no caputre in pattern else the capture if a match
 
if capture then -- if the pattern matches  
 
if capture then -- if the pattern matches  
param = substitute( param, capture ); -- add the capture to the suggested parameter (typically the enumerator)
+
param = substitute (param, capture); -- add the capture to the suggested parameter (typically the enumerator)
error_text, error_state = set_error( 'parameter_ignored_suggest', {k, param}, true ); -- set the error message
+
if validate (param, config.CitationClass) then -- validate the suggestion to make sure that the suggestion is supported by this template (necessary for limited parameter lists)
 +
error_text, error_state = set_error ('parameter_ignored_suggest', {k, param}, true); -- set the suggestion error message
 +
else
 +
error_text, error_state = set_error( 'parameter_ignored', {param}, true ); -- suggested param not supported by this template
 +
end
 
end
 
end
 
end
 
end
Line 4,087: Line 3,596:
 
else
 
else
 
error_text, error_state = set_error( 'parameter_ignored', {k}, true );
 
error_text, error_state = set_error( 'parameter_ignored', {k}, true );
 +
v = ''; -- unset value assigned to unrecognized parameters (this for the limited parameter lists)
 
end
 
end
 
end
 
end
Line 4,094: Line 3,604:
 
end
 
end
 
end
 
end
 +
missing_pipe_check (v); -- do we think that there is a parameter that is missing a pipe?
 +
-- TODO: is this the best place for this translation?
 
args[k] = v;
 
args[k] = v;
elseif args[k] ~= nil or (k == 'postscript') then
+
elseif args[k] ~= nil or (k == 'postscript') then -- here when v is empty string
args[k] = v;
+
args[k] = v; -- why do we do this?  we don't support 'empty' parameters
 
end
 
end
 
end
 
end
Line 4,105: Line 3,617:
 
end
 
end
 
end
 
end
return citation0( config, args)
+
return table.concat ({citation0( config, args), frame:extensionTag ('templatestyles', '', {src=styles})});
 
end
 
end
  
return z
+
return cs1;

Latest revision as of 20:03, 31 December 2018

local cs1 ={};

--[[--------------------------< F O R W A R D D E C L A R A T I O N S >-------------------------------------- ]]

local dates, year_date_check, reformat_dates, date_hyphen_to_dash, -- functions in Module:Citation/CS1/Date_validation date_name_xlate

local is_set, in_array, substitute, error_comment, set_error, select_one, -- functions in Module:Citation/CS1/Utilities add_maint_cat, wrap_style, safe_for_italics, is_wikilink, make_wikilink;

local z ={}; -- tables in Module:Citation/CS1/Utilities

local extract_ids, extract_id_access_levels, build_id_list, is_embargoed; -- functions in Module:Citation/CS1/Identifiers

local make_coins_title, get_coins_pages, COinS; -- functions in Module:Citation/CS1/COinS

local cfg = {}; -- table of configuration tables that are defined in Module:Citation/CS1/Configuration local whitelist = {}; -- table of tables listing valid template parameter names; defined in Module:Citation/CS1/Whitelist


--[[--------------------------< P A G E S C O P E V A R I A B L E S >--------------------------------------

delare variables here that have page-wide scope that are not brought in from other modules; thatare created here and used here

]]

local added_deprecated_cat; -- boolean flag so that the category is added only once local added_prop_cats = {}; -- list of property categories that have been added to z.properties_cats local added_vanc_errs; -- boolean flag so we only emit one Vancouver error / category

local Frame; -- holds the module's frame table


--[[--------------------------< F I R S T _ S E T >------------------------------------------------------------

Locates and returns the first set value in a table of values where the order established in the table, left-to-right (or top-to-bottom), is the order in which the values are evaluated. Returns nil if none are set.

This version replaces the original 'for _, val in pairs do' and a similar version that used ipairs. With the pairs version the order of evaluation could not be guaranteed. With the ipairs version, a nil value would terminate the for-loop before it reached the actual end of the list.

]]

local function first_set (list, count) local i = 1; while i <= count do -- loop through all items in list if is_set( list[i] ) then return list[i]; -- return the first set list member end i = i + 1; -- point to next end end


--[[--------------------------< A D D _ P R O P _ C A T >--------------------------------------------------------

Adds a category to z.properties_cats using names from the configuration file with additional text if any.

foreign_lang_source and foreign_lang_source_2 keys have a language code appended to them so that multiple languages may be categorized but multiples of the same language are not categorized.

added_prop_cats is a table declared in page scope variables above

]]

local function add_prop_cat (key, arguments) if not added_prop_cats [key] then added_prop_cats [key] = true; -- note that we've added this category key = key:gsub ('(foreign_lang_source_?2?)%a%a%a?', '%1'); -- strip lang code from keyname table.insert( z.properties_cats, substitute (cfg.prop_cats [key], arguments)); -- make name then add to table end end


--[[--------------------------< A D D _ V A N C _ E R R O R >----------------------------------------------------

Adds a single Vancouver system error message to the template's output regardless of how many error actually exist. To prevent duplication, added_vanc_errs is nil until an error message is emitted.

added_vanc_errs is a boolean declared in page scope variables above

]]

local function add_vanc_error (source) if not added_vanc_errs then added_vanc_errs = true; -- note that we've added this category table.insert( z.message_tail, { set_error( 'vancouver', {source}, true ) } ); end end


--[[--------------------------< I S _ S C H E M E >------------------------------------------------------------

does this thing that purports to be a uri scheme seem to be a valid scheme? The scheme is checked to see if it is in agreement with http://tools.ietf.org/html/std66#section-3.1 which says: Scheme names consist of a sequence of characters beginning with a

  letter and followed by any combination of letters, digits, plus
  ("+"), period ("."), or hyphen ("-").

returns true if it does, else false

]]

local function is_scheme (scheme) return scheme and scheme:match ('^%a[%a%d%+%.%-]*:'); -- true if scheme is set and matches the pattern end


--[=[-------------------------< I S _ D O M A I N _ N A M E >--------------------------------------------------

Does this thing that purports to be a domain name seem to be a valid domain name?

Syntax defined here: http://tools.ietf.org/html/rfc1034#section-3.5 BNF defined here: https://tools.ietf.org/html/rfc4234 Single character names are generally reserved; see https://tools.ietf.org/html/draft-ietf-dnsind-iana-dns-01#page-15; see also Single-letter second-level domain list of tlds: https://www.iana.org/domains/root/db

rfc952 (modified by rfc 1123) requires the first and last character of a hostname to be a letter or a digit. Between the first and last characters the name may use letters, digits, and the hyphen.

Also allowed are IPv4 addresses. IPv6 not supported

domain is expected to be stripped of any path so that the last character in the last character of the tld. tld is two or more alpha characters. Any preceding '//' (from splitting a url with a scheme) will be stripped here. Perhaps not necessary but retained incase it is necessary for IPv4 dot decimal.

There are several tests: the first character of the whole domain name including subdomains must be a letter or a digit internationalized domain name (ascii characters with .xn-- ASCII Compatible Encoding (ACE) prefix xn-- in the tld) see https://tools.ietf.org/html/rfc3490 single-letter/digit second-level domains in the .org and .cash TLDs q, x, and z SL domains in the .com TLD i and q SL domains in the .net TLD single-letter SL domains in the ccTLDs (where the ccTLD is two letters) two-character SL domains in gTLDs (where the gTLD is two or more letters) three-plus-character SL domains in gTLDs (where the gTLD is two or more letters) IPv4 dot-decimal address format; TLD not allowed

returns true if domain appears to be a proper name and tld or IPv4 address, else false

]=]

local function is_domain_name (domain) if not domain then return false; -- if not set, abandon end

domain = domain:gsub ('^//', ); -- strip '//' from domain name if present; done here so we only have to do it once

if not domain:match ('^[%a%d]') then -- first character must be letter or digit return false; end -- Do most common case first if domain:match ('%f[%a%d][%a%d][%a%d%-]+[%a%d]%.%a%a+$') then -- three or more character hostname.hostname or hostname.tld return true; elseif domain:match ('%f[%a%d][%a%d][%a%d%-]+[%a%d]%.xn%-%-[%a%d]+$') then -- internationalized domain name with ACE prefix return true; elseif domain:match ('%f[%a%d][%a%d]%.cash$') then -- one character/digit .cash hostname return true; elseif domain:match ('%f[%a%d][%a%d]%.org$') then -- one character/digit .org hostname return true; elseif domain:match ('%f[%a][qxz]%.com$') then -- assigned one character .com hostname (x.com times out 2015-12-10) return true; elseif domain:match ('%f[%a][iq]%.net$') then -- assigned one character .net hostname (q.net registered but not active 2015-12-10) return true; elseif domain:match ('%f[%a%d][%a%d]%.%a%a$') then -- one character hostname and cctld (2 chars) return true; elseif domain:match ('%f[%a%d][%a%d][%a%d]%.%a%a+$') then -- two character hostname and tld return true; elseif domain:match ('^%d%d?%d?%.%d%d?%d?%.%d%d?%d?%.%d%d?%d?') then -- IPv4 address return true; else return false; end end


--[[--------------------------< I S _ U R L >------------------------------------------------------------------

returns true if the scheme and domain parts of a url appear to be a valid url; else false.

This function is the last step in the validation process. This function is separate because there are cases that are not covered by split_url(), for example is_parameter_ext_wikilink() which is looking for bracketted external wikilinks.

]]

local function is_url (scheme, domain) if is_set (scheme) then -- if scheme is set check it and domain return is_scheme (scheme) and is_domain_name (domain); else return is_domain_name (domain); -- scheme not set when url is protocol relative end end


--[[--------------------------< S P L I T _ U R L >------------------------------------------------------------

Split a url into a scheme, authority indicator, and domain.

First remove Fully Qualified Domain Name terminator (a dot following tld) (if any) and any path(/), query(?) or fragment(#).

If protocol relative url, return nil scheme and domain else return nil for both scheme and domain.

When not protocol relative, get scheme, authority indicator, and domain. If there is an authority indicator (one or more '/' characters immediately following the scheme's colon), make sure that there are only 2.

Strip off any port and path;

]]

local function split_url (url_str) local scheme, authority, domain;

url_str = url_str:gsub ('([%a%d])%.?[/%?#].*$', '%1'); -- strip FQDN terminator and path(/), query(?), fragment (#) (the capture prevents false replacement of '//')

if url_str:match ('^//%S*') then -- if there is what appears to be a protocol relative url domain = url_str:match ('^//(%S*)') elseif url_str:match ('%S-:/*%S+') then -- if there is what appears to be a scheme, optional authority indicator, and domain name scheme, authority, domain = url_str:match ('(%S-:)(/*)(%S+)'); -- extract the scheme, authority indicator, and domain portions authority = authority:gsub ('//', , 1); -- replace place 1 pair of '/' with nothing; if is_set(authority) then -- if anything left (1 or 3+ '/' where authority should be) then return scheme; -- return scheme only making domain nil which will cause an error message end domain = domain:gsub ('(%a):%d+', '%1'); -- strip port number if present end

return scheme, domain; end


--[[--------------------------< L I N K _ P A R A M _ O K >---------------------------------------------------

checks the content of |title-link=, |series-link=, |author-link= etc for properly formatted content: no wikilinks, no urls

Link parameters are to hold the title of a wikipedia article so none of the WP:TITLESPECIALCHARACTERS are allowed: # < > [ ] | { } _ except the underscore which is used as a space in wiki urls and # which is used for section links

returns false when the value contains any of these characters.

When there are no illegal characters, this function returns TRUE if value DOES NOT appear to be a valid url (the |<param>-link= parameter is ok); else false when value appears to be a valid url (the |<param>-link= parameter is NOT ok).

]]

local function link_param_ok (value) local scheme, domain; if value:find ('[<>%[%]|{}]') then -- if any prohibited characters return false; end

scheme, domain = split_url (value); -- get scheme or nil and domain or nil from url; return not is_url (scheme, domain); -- return true if value DOES NOT appear to be a valid url end


--[[--------------------------< L I N K _ T I T L E _ O K >---------------------------------------------------

Use link_param_ok() to validate |<param>-link= value and its matching |<title>= value.

|<title>= may be wikilinked but not when |<param>-link= has a value. This function emits an error message when that condition exists

]]

local function link_title_ok (link, lorig, title, torig) local orig;

if is_set (link) then -- don't bother if <param>-link doesn't have a value if not link_param_ok (link) then -- check |<param>-link= markup orig = lorig; -- identify the failing link parameter elseif title:find ('%[%[') then -- check |title= for wikilink markup orig = torig; -- identify the failing |title= parameter end end

if is_set (orig) then table.insert( z.message_tail, { set_error( 'bad_paramlink', orig)}); -- url or wikilink in |title= with |title-link=; end end


--[[--------------------------< C H E C K _ U R L >------------------------------------------------------------

Determines whether a URL string appears to be valid.

First we test for space characters. If any are found, return false. Then split the url into scheme and domain portions, or for protocol relative (//example.com) urls, just the domain. Use is_url() to validate the two portions of the url. If both are valid, or for protocol relative if domain is valid, return true, else false.

Because it is different from a standard url, and because this module used external_link() to make external links that work for standard and news: links, we validate newsgroup names here. The specification for a newsgroup name is at https://tools.ietf.org/html/rfc5536#section-3.1.4

]]

local function check_url( url_str ) if nil == url_str:match ("^%S+$") then -- if there are any spaces in |url=value it can't be a proper url return false; end local scheme, domain;

scheme, domain = split_url (url_str); -- get scheme or nil and domain or nil from url;

if 'news:' == scheme then -- special case for newsgroups return domain:match('^[%a%d%+%-_]+%.[%a%d%+%-_%.]*[%a%d%+%-_]$'); end

return is_url (scheme, domain); -- return true if value appears to be a valid url end


--[=[-------------------------< I S _ P A R A M E T E R _ E X T _ W I K I L I N K >----------------------------

Return true if a parameter value has a string that begins and ends with square brackets [ and ] and the first non-space characters following the opening bracket appear to be a url. The test will also find external wikilinks that use protocol relative urls. Also finds bare urls.

The frontier pattern prevents a match on interwiki links which are similar to scheme:path urls. The tests that find bracketed urls are required because the parameters that call this test (currently |title=, |chapter=, |work=, and |publisher=) may have wikilinks and there are articles or redirects like '//Hus' so, while uncommon, |title=[[1]] is possible as might be.

]=]

local function is_parameter_ext_wikilink (value) local scheme, domain;

if value:match ('%f[%[]%[%a%S*:%S+.*%]') then -- if ext wikilink with scheme and domain: [xxxx://yyyyy.zzz] scheme, domain = split_url (value:match ('%f[%[]%[(%a%S*:%S+).*%]')); elseif value:match ('%f[%[]%[2]') then -- if protocol relative ext wikilink: [3] scheme, domain = split_url (value:match ('%f[%[]%[(//%S+).*%]')); elseif value:match ('%a%S*:%S+') then -- if bare url with scheme; may have leading or trailing plain text scheme, domain = split_url (value:match ('(%a%S*:%S+)')); elseif value:match ('//%S+') then -- if protocol relative bare url: //yyyyy.zzz; may have leading or trailing plain text scheme, domain = split_url (value:match ('(//%S+)')); -- what is left should be the domain else return false; -- didn't find anything that is obviously a url end

return is_url (scheme, domain); -- return true if value appears to be a valid url end


--[[-------------------------< C H E C K _ F O R _ U R L >-----------------------------------------------------

loop through a list of parameters and their values. Look at the value and if it has an external link, emit an error message.

]]

local function check_for_url (parameter_list) local error_message = ; for k, v in pairs (parameter_list) do -- for each parameter in the list if is_parameter_ext_wikilink (v) then -- look at the value; if there is a url add an error message if is_set(error_message) then -- once we've added the first portion of the error message ... error_message=error_message .. ", "; -- ... add a comma space separator end error_message=error_message .. "|" .. k .. "="; -- add the failed parameter end end if is_set (error_message) then -- done looping, if there is an error message, display it table.insert( z.message_tail, { set_error( 'param_has_ext_link', {error_message}, true ) } ); end end


--[[--------------------------< S A F E _ F O R _ U R L >------------------------------------------------------

Escape sequences for content that will be used for URL descriptions

]]

local function safe_for_url( str ) if str:match( "%[%[.-%]%]" ) ~= nil then table.insert( z.message_tail, { set_error( 'wikilink_in_url', {}, true ) } ); end

return str:gsub( '[%[%]\n]', { ['['] = '[', [']'] = ']', ['\n'] = ' ' } ); end


--[[--------------------------< E X T E R N A L _ L I N K >----------------------------------------------------

Format an external link with error checking

]]

local function external_link( URL, label, source, access) local error_str = ""; local domain; local path; local base_url;

if not is_set( label ) then label = URL; if is_set( source ) then error_str = set_error( 'bare_url_missing_title', { wrap_style ('parameter', source) }, false, " " ); else error( cfg.messages["bare_url_no_origin"] ); end end if not check_url( URL ) then error_str = set_error( 'bad_url', {wrap_style ('parameter', source)}, false, " " ) .. error_str; end

domain, path = URL:match ('^([/%.%-%+:%a%d]+)([/%?#].*)$'); -- split the url into scheme plus domain and path if path then -- if there is a path portion path = path:gsub ('[%[%]]', {['[']='%5b',[']']='%5d'}); -- replace '[' and ']' with their percent encoded values URL = table.concat ({domain, path}); -- and reassemble end

base_url = table.concat({ "[", URL, " ", safe_for_url (label), "]" }); -- assemble a wikimarkup url

if is_set (access) then -- access level (subscription, registration, limited) base_url = substitute (cfg.presentation['ext-link-access-signal'], {cfg.presentation[access].class, cfg.presentation[access].title, base_url}); -- add the appropriate icon end

return table.concat ({base_url, error_str}); end


--[[--------------------------< D E P R E C A T E D _ P A R A M E T E R >--------------------------------------

Categorize and emit an error message when the citation contains one or more deprecated parameters. The function includes the offending parameter name to the error message. Only one error message is emitted regardless of the number of deprecated parameters in the citation.

added_deprecated_cat is a boolean declared in page scope variables above

]]

local function deprecated_parameter(name) if not added_deprecated_cat then added_deprecated_cat = true; -- note that we've added this category table.insert( z.message_tail, { set_error( 'deprecated_params', {name}, true ) } ); -- add error message end end


--[=[-------------------------< K E R N _ Q U O T E S >--------------------------------------------------------

Apply kerning to open the space between the quote mark provided by the Module and a leading or trailing quote mark contained in a |title= or |chapter= parameter's value.

This function will positive kern either single or double quotes: "'Unkerned title with leading and trailing single quote marks'" " 'Kerned title with leading and trailing single quote marks' " (in real life the kerning isn't as wide as this example) Double single quotes (italic or bold wikimarkup) are not kerned.

Replaces unicode quotemarks in plain text or in the label portion of a D style wikilink with typewriter quote marks regardless of the need for kerning. Unicode quote marks are not replaced in simple D wikilinks.

Call this function for chapter titles, for website titles, etc; not for book titles.

]=]

local function kern_quotes (str) local cap=; local cap2=; local wl_type, label, link;

wl_type, label, link = is_wikilink (str); -- wl_type is: 0, no wl (text in label variable); 1, D; 2, D

if 1 == wl_type then -- D simple wikilink with or without quote marks if mw.ustring.match (str, '%[%[[\"“”\'‘’].+[\"“”\'‘’]%]%]') then -- leading and trailing quote marks str = substitute (cfg.presentation['kern-wl-both'], str); elseif mw.ustring.match (str, '%[%[[\"“”\'‘’].+%]%]') then -- leading quote marks str = substitute (cfg.presentation['kern-wl-left'], str); elseif mw.ustring.match (str, '%[%[.+[\"“”\'‘’]%]%]') then -- trailing quote marks str = substitute (cfg.presentation['kern-wl-right'], str); end

else -- plain text or D; text in label variable label= mw.ustring.gsub (label, '[“”]', '\"'); -- replace “” (U+201C & U+201D) with " (typewriter double quote mark) label= mw.ustring.gsub (label, '[‘’]', '\); -- replace ‘’ (U+2018 & U+2019) with ' (typewriter single quote mark)

cap, cap2 = mw.ustring.match (label, "^([\"\'])([^\'].+)"); -- match leading double or single quote but not doubled single quotes (italic markup) if is_set (cap) then label = substitute (cfg.presentation['kern-left'], {cap, cap2}); end

cap, cap2 = mw.ustring.match (label, "^(.+[^\'])([\"\'])$") -- match trailing double or single quote but not doubled single quotes (italic markup) if is_set (cap) then label = substitute (cfg.presentation['kern-right'], {cap, cap2}); end

if 2 == wl_type then str = make_wikilink (link, label); -- reassemble the wikilink else str = label; end end return str; end


--[[--------------------------< F O R M A T _ S C R I P T _ V A L U E >----------------------------------------

|script-title= holds title parameters that are not written in Latin based scripts: Chinese, Japanese, Arabic, Hebrew, etc. These scripts should not be italicized and may be written right-to-left. The value supplied by |script-title= is concatenated onto Title after Title has been wrapped in italic markup.

Regardless of language, all values provided by |script-title= are wrapped in ... tags to isolate rtl languages from the English left to right.

|script-title= provides a unique feature. The value in |script-title= may be prefixed with a two-character ISO639-1 language code and a colon: |script-title=ja:*** *** (where * represents a Japanese character) Spaces between the two-character code and the colon and the colon and the first script character are allowed: |script-title=ja : *** *** |script-title=ja: *** *** |script-title=ja :*** *** Spaces preceding the prefix are allowed: |script-title = ja:*** ***

The prefix is checked for validity. If it is a valid ISO639-1 language code, the lang attribute (lang="ja") is added to the tag so that browsers can know the language the tag contains. This may help the browser render the script more correctly. If the prefix is invalid, the lang attribute is not added. At this time there is no error message for this condition.

Supports |script-title= and |script-chapter=

TODO: error messages when prefix is invalid ISO639-1 code; when script_value has prefix but no script; ]]

local function format_script_value (script_value) local lang=; -- initialize to empty string local name; if script_value:match('^%l%l%s*:') then -- if first 3 non-space characters are script language prefix lang = script_value:match('^(%l%l)%s*:%s*%S.*'); -- get the language prefix or nil if there is no script if not is_set (lang) then return ; -- script_value was just the prefix so return empty string end -- if we get this far we have prefix and script name = cfg.lang_code_remap[lang] or mw.language.fetchLanguageName( lang, "en" ); -- get language name so that we can use it to categorize if is_set (name) then -- is prefix a proper ISO 639-1 language code? script_value = script_value:gsub ('^%l%l%s*:%s*', ); -- strip prefix from script -- is prefix one of these language codes? if in_array (lang, cfg.script_lang_codes) then add_prop_cat ('script_with_name', {name, lang}) else add_prop_cat ('script') end lang = ' lang="' .. lang .. '" '; -- convert prefix into a lang attribute else lang = ; -- invalid so set lang to empty string end end script_value = substitute (cfg.presentation['bdi'], {lang, script_value}); -- isolate in case script is rtl

return script_value; end


--[[--------------------------< S C R I P T _ C O N C A T E N A T E >------------------------------------------

Initially for |title= and |script-title=, this function concatenates those two parameter values after the script value has been wrapped in tags. ]]

local function script_concatenate (title, script) if is_set (script) then script = format_script_value (script); -- tags, lang atribute, categorization, etc; returns empty string on error if is_set (script) then title = title .. ' ' .. script; -- concatenate title and script title end end return title; end


--[[--------------------------< W R A P _ M S G >--------------------------------------------------------------

Applies additional message text to various parameter values. Supplied string is wrapped using a message_list configuration taking one argument. Supports lower case text for Template:Citation templates. Additional text taken from citation_config.messages - the reason this function is similar to but separate from wrap_style().

]]

local function wrap_msg (key, str, lower) if not is_set( str ) then return ""; end if true == lower then local msg; msg = cfg.messages[key]:lower(); -- set the message to lower case before return substitute( msg, str ); -- including template text else return substitute( cfg.messages[key], str ); end end


--[[--------------------------< F O R M A T _ C H A P T E R _ T I T L E >--------------------------------------

Format the four chapter parameters: |script-chapter=, |chapter=, |trans-chapter=, and |chapter-url= into a single Chapter meta- parameter (chapter_url_source used for error messages).

]]

local function format_chapter_title (scriptchapter, chapter, transchapter, chapterurl, chapter_url_source, no_quotes, access) local chapter_error = ;

if not is_set (chapter) then chapter = ; -- to be safe for concatenation else if false == no_quotes then chapter = kern_quotes (chapter); -- if necessary, separate chapter title's leading and trailing quote marks from Module provided quote marks chapter = wrap_style ('quoted-title', chapter); end end

chapter = script_concatenate (chapter, scriptchapter) -- tags, lang atribute, categorization, etc; must be done after title is wrapped

if is_set (chapterurl) then chapter = external_link (chapterurl, chapter, chapter_url_source, access); -- adds bare_url_missing_title error if appropriate end

if is_set (transchapter) then transchapter = wrap_style ('trans-quoted-title', transchapter); if is_set (chapter) then chapter = chapter .. ' ' .. transchapter; else -- here when transchapter without chapter or script-chapter chapter = transchapter; -- chapter_error = ' ' .. set_error ('trans_missing_title', {'chapter'}); end end

-- if is_set (chapterurl) then -- chapter = external_link (chapterurl, chapter, chapter_url_source, access); -- adds bare_url_missing_title error if appropriate -- end

return chapter .. chapter_error; end


--[[--------------------------< H A S _ I N V I S I B L E _ C H A R S >----------------------------------------

This function searches a parameter's value for nonprintable or invisible characters. The search stops at the first match.

This function will detect the visible replacement character when it is part of the wikisource.

Detects but ignores nowiki and math stripmarkers. Also detects other named stripmarkers (gallery, math, pre, ref) and identifies them with a slightly different error message. See also coins_cleanup().

Detects but ignores the character pattern that results from the transclusion of Template:' templates.

Output of this function is an error message that identifies the character or the Unicode group, or the stripmarker that was detected along with its position (or, for multi-byte characters, the position of its first byte) in the parameter value.

]]

local function has_invisible_chars (param, v) local position = ; -- position of invisible char or starting position of stripmarker local dummy; -- end of matching string; not used but required to hold end position when a capture is returned local capture; -- used by stripmarker detection to hold name of the stripmarker local i=1; local stripmarker, apostrophe;

capture = string.match (v, '[%w%p ]*'); -- Test for values that are simple ASCII text and bypass other tests if true if capture == v then -- if same there are no unicode characters return; end

while cfg.invisible_chars[i] do local char=cfg.invisible_chars[i][1] -- the character or group name local pattern=cfg.invisible_chars[i][2] -- the pattern used to find it position, dummy, capture = mw.ustring.find (v, pattern) -- see if the parameter value contains characters that match the pattern

if position and (char == 'zero width joiner') then -- if we found a zero width joiner character if mw.ustring.find (v, cfg.indic_script) then -- its ok if one of the indic scripts position = nil; -- unset position end end

if position then if 'nowiki' == capture or 'math' == capture or -- nowiki and math stripmarkers (not an error condition) ('templatestyles' == capture and in_array (param, {'id', 'quote'})) then -- templatestyles stripmarker allowed in these parameters stripmarker = true; -- set a flag elseif true == stripmarker and 'delete' == char then -- because stripmakers begin and end with the delete char, assume that we've found one end of a stripmarker position = nil; -- unset else local err_msg; if capture then err_msg = capture .. ' ' .. char; else err_msg = char .. ' ' .. 'character'; end

table.insert( z.message_tail, { set_error( 'invisible_char', {err_msg, wrap_style ('parameter', param), position}, true ) } ); -- add error message return; -- and done with this parameter end end i=i+1; -- bump our index end end


--[[--------------------------< A R G U M E N T _ W R A P P E R >----------------------------------------------

Argument wrapper. This function provides support for argument mapping defined in the configuration file so that multiple names can be transparently aliased to single internal variable.

]]

local function argument_wrapper( args ) local origin = {};

return setmetatable({ ORIGIN = function( self, k ) local dummy = self[k]; --force the variable to be loaded. return origin[k]; end }, { __index = function ( tbl, k ) if origin[k] ~= nil then return nil; end

local args, list, v = args, cfg.aliases[k];

if type( list ) == 'table' then v, origin[k] = select_one( args, list, 'redundant_parameters' ); if origin[k] == nil then origin[k] = ; -- Empty string, not nil end elseif list ~= nil then v, origin[k] = args[list], list; else -- maybe let through instead of raising an error? -- v, origin[k] = args[k], k; error( cfg.messages['unknown_argument_map'] ); end

-- Empty strings, not nil; if v == nil then v = cfg.defaults[k] or ; origin[k] = ; end

tbl = rawset( tbl, k, v ); return v; end, }); end


--[[--------------------------< N O W R A P _ D A T E >--------------------------------------------------------

When date is YYYY-MM-DD format wrap in nowrap span: YYYY-MM-DD. When date is DD MMMM YYYY or is MMMM DD, YYYY then wrap in nowrap span: DD MMMM YYYY or MMMM DD, YYYY

DOES NOT yet support MMMM YYYY or any of the date ranges.

]]

local function nowrap_date (date) local cap=; local cap2=;

if date:match("^%d%d%d%d%-%d%d%-%d%d$") then date = substitute (cfg.presentation['nowrap1'], date);

elseif date:match("^%a+%s*%d%d?,%s+%d%d%d%d$") or date:match ("^%d%d?%s*%a+%s+%d%d%d%d$") then cap, cap2 = string.match (date, "^(.*)%s+(%d%d%d%d)$"); date = substitute (cfg.presentation['nowrap2'], {cap, cap2}); end

return date; end


--[[--------------------------< S E T _ T I T L E T Y P E >----------------------------------------------------

This function sets default title types (equivalent to the citation including |type=<default value>) for those templates that have defaults. Also handles the special case where it is desirable to omit the title type from the rendered citation (|type=none).

]]

local function set_titletype (cite_class, title_type) if is_set(title_type) then if "none" == title_type then title_type = ""; -- if |type=none then type parameter not displayed end return title_type; -- if |type= has been set to any other value use that value end

return cfg.title_types [cite_class] or ; -- set template's default title type; else empty string for concatenation end


--[[--------------------------< H Y P H E N _ T O _ D A S H >--------------------------------------------------

Converts a hyphen to a dash under certain conditions. The hyphen must separate like items; unlike items are returned unmodified. These forms are modified: letter - letter (A - B) digit - digit (4-5) digit separator digit - digit separator digit (4.1-4.5 or 4-1-4-5) letterdigit - letterdigit (A1-A5) (an optional separator between letter and digit is supported – a.1-a.5 or a-1-a-5) digitletter - digitletter (5a - 5d) (an optional separator between letter and digit is supported – 5.a-5.d or 5-a-5-d)

any other forms are returned unmodified.

str may be a comma- or semicolon-separated list

]]

local function hyphen_to_dash( str ) if not is_set (str) then return str; end

str, count = str:gsub ('^%(%((.+)%)%)$', '%1'); -- remove accept-this-as-written markup when it wraps all of str if 0 ~= count then -- non-zero when markup removed; zero else return str; -- nothing to do, we're done end

local out = {}; local list = mw.text.split (str, '%s*[,;]%s*'); -- split str at comma or semicolon separators if there are any

for _, item in ipairs (list) do -- for each item in the list if mw.ustring.match (item, '^%w*[%.%-]?%w+%s*[%-–—]%s*%w*[%.%-]?%w+$') then -- if a hyphenated range or has endash or emdash separators if item:match ('%a+[%.%-]?%d+%s*%-%s*%a+[%.%-]?%d+') or -- letterdigit hyphen letterdigit (optional separator between letter and digit) item:match ('%d+[%.%-]?%a+%s*%-%s*%d+[%.%-]?%a+') or -- digitletter hyphen digitletter (optional separator between digit and letter) item:match ('%d+[%.%-]%d+%s*%-%s*%d+[%.%-]%d+') or -- digit separator digit hyphen digit separator digit item:match ('%d+%s*%-%s*%d+') or -- digit hyphen digit item:match ('%a+%s*%-%s*%a+') then -- letter hyphen letter item = item:gsub ('(%w*[%.%-]?%w+)%s*%-%s*(%w*[%.%-]?%w+)', '%1–%2'); -- replace hyphen, remove extraneous space characters else item = mw.ustring.gsub (item, '%s*[–—]%s*', '–'); -- for endash or emdash separated ranges, replace em with en, remove extraneous white space end end item = item:gsub ('^%(%((.+)%)%)$', '%1'); -- remove the accept-this-as-written markup table.insert (out, item); -- add the (possibly modified) item to the output table end

return table.concat (out, ', '); -- concatenate the output table into a comma separated string end


--[[--------------------------< S A F E _ J O I N >------------------------------------------------------------

Joins a sequence of strings together while checking for duplicate separation characters.

]]

local function safe_join( tbl, duplicate_char ) local f = {}; -- create a function table appropriate to type of 'dupicate character' if 1 == #duplicate_char then -- for single byte ascii characters use the string library functions f.gsub=string.gsub f.match=string.match f.sub=string.sub else -- for multi-byte characters use the ustring library functions f.gsub=mw.ustring.gsub f.match=mw.ustring.match f.sub=mw.ustring.sub end

local str = ; -- the output string local comp = ; -- what does 'comp' mean? local end_chr = ; local trim; for _, value in ipairs( tbl ) do if value == nil then value = ; end

if str == then -- if output string is empty str = value; -- assign value to it (first time through the loop) elseif value ~= then if value:sub(1,1) == '<' then -- Special case of values enclosed in spans and other markup. comp = value:gsub( "%b<>", "" ); -- remove html markup (string -> string) else comp = value; end -- typically duplicate_char is sepc if f.sub(comp, 1,1) == duplicate_char then -- is first character same as duplicate_char? why test first character? -- Because individual string segments often (always?) begin with terminal punct for the -- preceding segment: 'First element' .. 'sepc next element' .. etc? trim = false; end_chr = f.sub(str, -1,-1); -- get the last character of the output string -- str = str .. "<HERE(enchr=" .. end_chr.. ")" -- debug stuff? if end_chr == duplicate_char then -- if same as separator str = f.sub(str, 1,-2); -- remove it elseif end_chr == "'" then -- if it might be wikimarkup if f.sub(str, -3,-1) == duplicate_char .. "" then -- if last three chars of str are sepc str = f.sub(str, 1, -4) .. ""; -- remove them and add back elseif f.sub(str, -5,-1) == duplicate_char .. "]]" then -- if last five chars of str are sepc]] trim = true; -- why? why do this and next differently from previous? elseif f.sub(str, -4,-1) == duplicate_char .. "]" then -- if last four chars of str are sepc] trim = true; -- same question end elseif end_chr == "]" then -- if it might be wikimarkup if f.sub(str, -3,-1) == duplicate_char .. "]]" then -- if last three chars of str are sepc]] wikilink trim = true; elseif f.sub(str, -3,-1) == duplicate_char .. '"]' then -- if last three chars of str are sepc"] quoted external link trim = true; elseif f.sub(str, -2,-1) == duplicate_char .. "]" then -- if last two chars of str are sepc] external link trim = true; elseif f.sub(str, -4,-1) == duplicate_char .. "]" then -- normal case when |url=something & |title=Title. trim = true; end elseif end_chr == " " then -- if last char of output string is a space if f.sub(str, -2,-1) == duplicate_char .. " " then -- if last two chars of str are <sepc><space> str = f.sub(str, 1,-3); -- remove them both end end

if trim then if value ~= comp then -- value does not equal comp when value contains html markup local dup2 = duplicate_char; if f.match(dup2, "%A" ) then dup2 = "%" .. dup2; end -- if duplicate_char not a letter then escape it

value = f.gsub(value, "(%b<>)" .. dup2, "%1", 1 ) -- remove duplicate_char if it follows html markup else value = f.sub(value, 2, -1 ); -- remove duplicate_char when it is first character end end end str = str .. value; --add it to the output string end end return str; end


--[[--------------------------< I S _ S U F F I X >------------------------------------------------------------

returns true is suffix is properly formed Jr, Sr, or ordinal in the range 2–9. Puncutation not allowed.

]]

local function is_suffix (suffix) if in_array (suffix, {'Jr', 'Sr', '2nd', '3rd'}) or suffix:match ('^%dth$') then return true; end return false; end


--[[--------------------------< I S _ G O O D _ V A N C _ N A M E >--------------------------------------------

For Vancouver Style, author/editor names are supposed to be rendered in Latin (read ASCII) characters. When a name uses characters that contain diacritical marks, those characters are to converted to the corresponding Latin character. When a name is written using a non-Latin alphabet or logogram, that name is to be transliterated into Latin characters. These things are not currently possible in this module so are left to the editor to do.

This test allows |first= and |last= names to contain any of the letters defined in the four Unicode Latin character sets C0 Controls and Basic Latin 0041–005A, 0061–007A C1 Controls and Latin-1 Supplement 00C0–00D6, 00D8–00F6, 00F8–00FF Latin Extended-A 0100–017F Latin Extended-B 0180–01BF, 01C4–024F

|lastn= also allowed to contain hyphens, spaces, and apostrophes. (http://www.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/books/NBK7271/box/A35029/) |firstn= also allowed to contain hyphens, spaces, apostrophes, and periods

This original test: if nil == mw.ustring.find (last, "^[A-Za-zÀ-ÖØ-öø-ƿDŽ-ɏ%-%s%']*$") or nil == mw.ustring.find (first, "^[A-Za-zÀ-ÖØ-öø-ƿDŽ-ɏ%-%s%'%.]+[2-6%a]*$") then was written ouside of the code editor and pasted here because the code editor gets confused between character insertion point and cursor position. The test has been rewritten to use decimal character escape sequence for the individual bytes of the unicode characters so that it is not necessary to use an external editor to maintain this code.

\195\128-\195\150 – À-Ö (U+00C0–U+00D6 – C0 controls) \195\152-\195\182 – Ø-ö (U+00D8-U+00F6 – C0 controls) \195\184-\198\191 – ø-ƿ (U+00F8-U+01BF – C0 controls, Latin extended A & B) \199\132-\201\143 – DŽ-ɏ (U+01C4-U+024F – Latin extended B)

]]

local function is_good_vanc_name (last, first) local first, suffix = first:match ('(.-),?%s*([%dJS][%drndth]+)%.?$') or first; -- if first has something that looks like a generational suffix, get it

if is_set (suffix) then if not is_suffix (suffix) then add_vanc_error ('suffix'); return false; -- not a name with an appropriate suffix end end if nil == mw.ustring.find (last, "^[A-Za-z\195\128-\195\150\195\152-\195\182\195\184-\198\191\199\132-\201\143%-%s%']*$") or nil == mw.ustring.find (first, "^[A-Za-z\195\128-\195\150\195\152-\195\182\195\184-\198\191\199\132-\201\143%-%s%'%.]*$") then add_vanc_error ('non-Latin character'); return false; -- not a string of latin characters; Vancouver requires Romanization end; return true; end


--[[--------------------------< R E D U C E _ T O _ I N I T I A L S >------------------------------------------

Attempts to convert names to initials in support of |name-list-format=vanc.

Names in |firstn= may be separated by spaces or hyphens, or for initials, a period. See http://www.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/books/NBK7271/box/A35062/.

Vancouver style requires family rank designations (Jr, II, III, etc) to be rendered as Jr, 2nd, 3rd, etc. See http://www.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/books/NBK7271/box/A35085/. This code only accepts and understands generational suffix in the Vancouver format because Roman numerals look like, and can be mistaken for, initials.

This function uses ustring functions because firstname initials may be any of the unicode Latin characters accepted by is_good_vanc_name ().

]]

local function reduce_to_initials(first) local name, suffix = mw.ustring.match(first, "^(%u+) ([%dJS][%drndth]+)$");

if not name then -- if not initials and a suffix name = mw.ustring.match(first, "^(%u+)$"); -- is it just intials? end

if name then -- if first is initials with or without suffix if 3 > mw.ustring.len (name) then -- if one or two initials if suffix then -- if there is a suffix if is_suffix (suffix) then -- is it legitimate? return first; -- one or two initials and a valid suffix so nothing to do else add_vanc_error ('suffix'); -- one or two initials with invalid suffix so error message return first; -- and return first unmolested end else return first; -- one or two initials without suffix; nothing to do end end end -- if here then name has 3 or more uppercase letters so treat them as a word


local initials, names = {}, {}; -- tables to hold name parts and initials local i = 1; -- counter for number of initials

names = mw.text.split (first, '[%s,]+'); -- split into a table of names and possible suffix

while names[i] do -- loop through the table if 1 < i and names[i]:match ('[%dJS][%drndth]+%.?$') then -- if not the first name, and looks like a suffix (may have trailing dot) names[i] = names[i]:gsub ('%.', ); -- remove terminal dot if present if is_suffix (names[i]) then -- if a legitimate suffix table.insert (initials, ' ' .. names[i]); -- add a separator space, insert at end of initials table break; -- and done because suffix must fall at the end of a name end -- no error message if not a suffix; possibly because of Romanization end if 3 > i then table.insert (initials, mw.ustring.sub(names[i],1,1)); -- insert the intial at end of initials table end i = i+1; -- bump the counter end

return table.concat(initials) -- Vancouver format does not include spaces. end


--[[--------------------------< L I S T _ P E O P L E >-------------------------------------------------------

Formats a list of people (e.g. authors / editors)

]]

local function list_people(control, people, etal) local sep; local namesep; local format = control.format local maximum = control.maximum local lastauthoramp = control.lastauthoramp; local text = {}

if 'vanc' == format then -- Vancouver-like author/editor name styling? sep = cfg.presentation['sep_nl_vanc']; -- name-list separator between authors is a comma namesep = cfg.presentation['sep_name_vanc']; -- last/first separator is a space else sep = cfg.presentation['sep_nl']; -- name-list separator between authors is a semicolon namesep = cfg.presentation['sep_name']; -- last/first separator is <comma><space> end

if sep:sub(-1,-1) ~= " " then sep = sep .. " " end if is_set (maximum) and maximum < 1 then return "", 0; end -- returned 0 is for EditorCount; not used for authors

for i,person in ipairs(people) do if is_set(person.last) then local mask = person.mask local one local sep_one = sep; if is_set (maximum) and i > maximum then etal = true; break; elseif (mask ~= nil) then local n = tonumber(mask) if (n ~= nil) then one = string.rep("—",n) else one = mask; sep_one = " "; end else one = person.last local first = person.first if is_set(first) then if ( "vanc" == format ) then -- if vancouver format one = one:gsub ('%.', ); -- remove periods from surnames (http://www.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/books/NBK7271/box/A35029/) if not person.corporate and is_good_vanc_name (one, first) then -- and name is all Latin characters; corporate authors not tested first = reduce_to_initials(first) -- attempt to convert first name(s) to initials end end one = one .. namesep .. first; end if is_set(person.link) and person.link ~= control.page_name then one = make_wikilink (person.link, one); -- link author/editor if this page is not the author's/editor's page end end table.insert( text, one ) table.insert( text, sep_one ) end end

local count = #text / 2; -- (number of names + number of separators) divided by 2 if count > 0 then if count > 1 and is_set(lastauthoramp) and not etal then text[#text-2] = " & "; -- replace last separator with ampersand text end text[#text] = nil; -- erase the last separator end

local result = table.concat(text) -- construct list if etal and is_set (result) then -- etal may be set by |display-authors=etal but we might not have a last-first list result = result .. sep .. ' ' .. cfg.messages['et al']; -- we've go a last-first list and etal so add et al. end

return result, count end


--[[--------------------------< A N C H O R _ I D >------------------------------------------------------------

Generates a CITEREF anchor ID if we have at least one name or a date. Otherwise returns an empty string.

namelist is one of the contributor-, author-, or editor-name lists chosen in that order. year is Year or anchor_year.

]] local function anchor_id (namelist, year) local names={}; -- a table for the one to four names and year for i,v in ipairs (namelist) do -- loop through the list and take up to the first four last names names[i] = v.last if i == 4 then break end -- if four then done end table.insert (names, year); -- add the year at the end local id = table.concat(names); -- concatenate names and year for CITEREF id if is_set (id) then -- if concatenation is not an empty string return "CITEREF" .. id; -- add the CITEREF portion else return ; -- return an empty string; no reason to include CITEREF id in this citation end end


--[[--------------------------< N A M E _ H A S _ E T A L >----------------------------------------------------

Evaluates the content of author and editor name parameters for variations on the theme of et al. If found, the et al. is removed, a flag is set to true and the function returns the modified name and the flag.

This function never sets the flag to false but returns it's previous state because it may have been set by previous passes through this function or by the parameters |display-authors=etal or |display-editors=etal

]]

local function name_has_etal (name, etal, nocat)

if is_set (name) then -- name can be nil in which case just return local etal_pattern = "[;,]? *[\"']*%f[%a][Ee][Tt] *[Aa][Ll][%.\"']*$" -- variations on the 'et al' theme local others_pattern = "[;,]? *%f[%a]and [Oo]thers"; -- and alternate to et al.

if name:match (etal_pattern) then -- variants on et al. name = name:gsub (etal_pattern, ); -- if found, remove etal = true; -- set flag (may have been set previously here or by |display-authors=etal) if not nocat then -- no categorization for |vauthors= add_maint_cat ('etal'); -- and add a category if not already added end elseif name:match (others_pattern) then -- if not 'et al.', then 'and others'? name = name:gsub (others_pattern, ); -- if found, remove etal = true; -- set flag (may have been set previously here or by |display-authors=etal) if not nocat then -- no categorization for |vauthors= add_maint_cat ('etal'); -- and add a category if not already added end end end return name, etal; -- end


--[[--------------------------< N A M E _ H A S _ E D _ M A R K U P >------------------------------------------

Evaluates the content of author and editor parameters for extranious editor annotations: ed, ed., eds, (Ed.), etc. These annotation do not belong in author parameters and are redundant in editor parameters. If found, the function adds the editor markup maintenance category.

]]

local function name_has_ed_markup (name, list_name) local _, pattern; local patterns = { -- these patterns match annotations at end of name '%f[%(%[][%(%[]%s*[Ee][Dd][Ss]?%.?%s*[%)%]]?$', -- (ed) or (eds): leading '(', case insensitive 'ed', optional 's', '.' and/or ')' '[,%.%s]%f[e]eds?%.?$', -- ed or eds: without '('or ')'; case sensitive (ED could be initials Ed could be name) '%f[%(%[][%(%[]%s*[Ee][Dd][Ii][Tt][Oo][Rr][Ss]?%.?%s*[%)%]]?$', -- (editor) or (editors): leading '(', case insensitive, optional '.' and/or ')' '[,%.%s]%f[Ee][Ee][Dd][Ii][Tt][Oo][Rr][Ss]?%.?$', -- editor or editors: without '('or ')'; case insensitive

-- these patterns match annotations at beginning of name '^eds?[%.,;]', -- ed. or eds.: lower case only, optional 's', requires '.' '^[%(%[]%s*[Ee][Dd][Ss]?%.?%s*[%)%]]', -- (ed) or (eds): also sqare brackets, case insensitive, optional 's', '.' '^[%(%[]?%s*[Ee][Dd][Ii][Tt][Oo][Rr][Ss]?%A', -- (editor or (editors: also sq brackets, case insensitive, optional brackets, 's' '^[%(%[]?%s*[Ee][Dd][Ii][Tt][Ee][Dd]%A', -- (edited: also sq brackets, case insensitive, optional brackets }

if is_set (name) then for _, pattern in ipairs (patterns) do -- spin through patterns table and if name:match (pattern) then add_maint_cat ('extra_text_names', cfg.special_case_translation [list_name]); -- add a maint cat for this template break; end end end return name; -- and done end


--[[--------------------------< N A M E _ H A S _ M U L T _ N A M E S >----------------------------------------

Evaluates the content of author and editor (surnames only) parameters for multiple names. Multiple names are indicated if there is more than one comma and or semicolon. If found, the function adds the multiple name (author or editor) maintenance category.

]]

local function name_has_mult_names (name, list_name) local count, _; if is_set (name) then _, count = name:gsub ('[;,]', ); -- count the number of separator-like characters

if 1 < count then -- param could be |author= or |editor= so one separator character is acceptable add_maint_cat ('mult_names', cfg.special_case_translation [list_name]); -- more than one separator indicates multiple names so add a maint cat for this template end end return name; -- and done end


--[[--------------------------< N A M E _ C H E C K S >-------------------------------------------------------- This function calls various name checking functions used to validate the content of the various name-holding parameters.

]]

local function name_checks (last, first, list_name) if is_set (last) then if last:match ('^%(%(.*%)%)$') then -- if wrapped in doubled parentheses, accept as written last = last:match ('^%(%((.*)%)%)$'); -- strip parens else last = name_has_mult_names (last, list_name); -- check for multiple names in the parameter (last only) last = name_has_ed_markup (last, list_name); -- check for extraneous 'editor' annotation end end if is_set (first) then if first:match ('^%(%(.*%)%)$') then -- if wrapped in doubled parentheses, accept as written first = first:match ('^%(%((.*)%)%)$'); -- strip parens else first = name_has_ed_markup (first, list_name); -- check for extraneous 'editor' annotation end end return last, first; -- done end


--[[--------------------------< E X T R A C T _ N A M E S >---------------------------------------------------- Gets name list from the input arguments

Searches through args in sequential order to find |lastn= and |firstn= parameters (or their aliases), and their matching link and mask parameters. Stops searching when both |lastn= and |firstn= are not found in args after two sequential attempts: found |last1=, |last2=, and |last3= but doesn't find |last4= and |last5= then the search is done.

This function emits an error message when there is a |firstn= without a matching |lastn=. When there are 'holes' in the list of last names, |last1= and |last3= are present but |last2= is missing, an error message is emitted. |lastn= is not required to have a matching |firstn=.

When an author or editor parameter contains some form of 'et al.', the 'et al.' is stripped from the parameter and a flag (etal) returned that will cause list_people() to add the static 'et al.' text from Module:Citation/CS1/Configuration. This keeps 'et al.' out of the template's metadata. When this occurs, the page is added to a maintenance category.

]]

local function extract_names(args, list_name) local names = {}; -- table of names local last; -- individual name components local first; local link; local mask; local i = 1; -- loop counter/indexer local n = 1; -- output table indexer local count = 0; -- used to count the number of times we haven't found a |last= (or alias for authors, |editor-last or alias for editors) local etal=false; -- return value set to true when we find some form of et al. in an author parameter

local err_msg_list_name = list_name:match ("(%w+)List") .. 's list'; -- modify AuthorList or EditorList for use in error messages if necessary while true do last = select_one( args, cfg.aliases[list_name .. '-Last'], 'redundant_parameters', i ); -- search through args for name components beginning at 1 first = select_one( args, cfg.aliases[list_name .. '-First'], 'redundant_parameters', i ); link = select_one( args, cfg.aliases[list_name .. '-Link'], 'redundant_parameters', i ); mask = select_one( args, cfg.aliases[list_name .. '-Mask'], 'redundant_parameters', i );

last, etal = name_has_etal (last, etal, false); -- find and remove variations on et al. first, etal = name_has_etal (first, etal, false); -- find and remove variations on et al. last, first= name_checks (last, first, list_name); -- multiple names, extraneous annotation, etc checks

if first and not last then -- if there is a firstn without a matching lastn table.insert( z.message_tail, { set_error( 'first_missing_last', {err_msg_list_name, i}, true ) } ); -- add this error message elseif not first and not last then -- if both firstn and lastn aren't found, are we done? count = count + 1; -- number of times we haven't found last and first if 2 <= count then -- two missing names and we give up break; -- normal exit or there is a two-name hole in the list; can't tell which end else -- we have last with or without a first link_title_ok (link, list_name:match ("(%w+)List"):lower() .. '-link' .. i, last, list_name:match ("(%w+)List"):lower() .. '-last' .. i); -- check for improper wikimarkup

names[n] = {last = last, first = first, link = link, mask = mask, corporate=false}; -- add this name to our names list (corporate for |vauthors= only) n = n + 1; -- point to next location in the names table if 1 == count then -- if the previous name was missing table.insert( z.message_tail, { set_error( 'missing_name', {err_msg_list_name, i-1}, true ) } ); -- add this error message end count = 0; -- reset the counter, we're looking for two consecutive missing names end i = i + 1; -- point to next args location end

return names, etal; -- all done, return our list of names end


--[[--------------------------< G E T _ I S O 6 3 9 _ C O D E >------------------------------------------------

Validates language names provided in |language= parameter if not an ISO639-1 or 639-2 code.

Returns the language name and associated two- or three-character code. Because case of the source may be incorrect or different from the case that WikiMedia uses, the name comparisons are done in lower case and when a match is found, the Wikimedia version (assumed to be correct) is returned along with the code. When there is no match, we return the original language name string.

mw.language.fetchLanguageNames(<local wiki language>, 'all') returns a list of languages that in some cases may include extensions. For example, code 'cbk-zam' and its associated name 'Chavacano de Zamboanga' (MediaWiki does not support code 'cbk' or name 'Chavacano'. Most (all?) of these languages are not used a 'language' codes per se, rather they are used as sub-domain names: cbk-zam.wikipedia.org. These names can be found (for the time being) at https://phabricator.wikimedia.org/diffusion/ECLD/browse/master/LocalNames/LocalNamesEn.php

Names but that are included in the list will be found if that name is provided in the |language= parameter. For example, if |language=Chavacano de Zamboanga, that name will be found with the associated code 'cbk-zam'. When names are found and the associated code is not two or three characters, this function returns only the Wikimedia language name.

Adapted from code taken from Module:Check ISO 639-1.

]]

local function get_iso639_code (lang, this_wiki_code) if cfg.lang_name_remap[lang:lower()] then -- if there is a remapped name (because MediaWiki uses something that we don't think is correct) return cfg.lang_name_remap[lang:lower()][1], cfg.lang_name_remap[lang:lower()][2]; -- for this language 'name', return a possibly new name and appropriate code end

local languages = mw.language.fetchLanguageNames(this_wiki_code, 'all') -- get a list of language names known to Wikimedia -- ('all' is required for North Ndebele, South Ndebele, and Ojibwa) local langlc = mw.ustring.lower(lang); -- lower case version for comparisons

for code, name in pairs(languages) do -- scan the list to see if we can find our language if langlc == mw.ustring.lower(name) then if 2 ~= code:len() and 3 ~= code:len() then -- two- or three-character codes only; extensions not supported return name; -- so return the name but not the code end return name, code; -- found it, return name to ensure proper capitalization and the the code end end return lang; -- not valid language; return language in original case and nil for the code end


--[[--------------------------< L A N G U A G E _ P A R A M E T E R >------------------------------------------

Gets language name from a provided two- or three-character ISO 639 code. If a code is recognized by MediaWiki, use the returned name; if not, then use the value that was provided with the language parameter.

When |language= contains a recognized language (either code or name), the page is assigned to the category for that code: Category:Norwegian-language sources (no). For valid three-character code languages, the page is assigned to the single category for '639-2' codes: Category:CS1 ISO 639-2 language sources.

Languages that are the same as the local wiki are not categorized. MediaWiki does not recognize three-character equivalents of two-character codes: code 'ar' is recognized bit code 'ara' is not.

This function supports multiple languages in the form |language=nb, French, th where the language names or codes are separated from each other by commas.

]]

local function language_parameter (lang) local code; -- the two- or three-character language code local name; -- the language name local language_list = {}; -- table of language names to be rendered local names_table = {}; -- table made from the value assigned to |language=

local this_wiki = mw.getContentLanguage(); -- get a language object for this wiki local this_wiki_code = this_wiki:getCode() -- get this wiki's language code local this_wiki_name = mw.language.fetchLanguageName(this_wiki_code, this_wiki_code); -- get this wiki's language name

names_table = mw.text.split (lang, '%s*,%s*'); -- names should be a comma separated list

for _, lang in ipairs (names_table) do -- reuse lang

if lang:match ('^%a%a%-') then -- strip ietf language tags from code; TODO: is there a need to support 3-char with tag? lang = lang:match ('(%a%a)%-') -- keep only 639-1 code portion to lang; TODO: do something with 3166 alpha 2 country code? end if 2 == lang:len() or 3 == lang:len() then -- if two-or three-character code name = mw.language.fetchLanguageName( lang:lower(), this_wiki_code); -- get language name if |language= is a proper code if not is_set (name) then name = cfg.lang_code_remap[lang]; -- not supported by MediaWiki; is it in remap? end end

if is_set (name) then -- if |language= specified a valid code code = lang:lower(); -- save it else name, code = get_iso639_code (lang, this_wiki_code); -- attempt to get code from name (assign name here so that we are sure of proper capitalization) end

if is_set (code) then -- only 2- or 3-character codes name = cfg.lang_code_remap[code] or name; -- override wikimedia when they misuse language codes/names

if this_wiki_code ~= code then -- when the language is not the same as this wiki's language if 2 == code:len() then -- and is a two-character code add_prop_cat ('foreign_lang_source' .. code, {name, code}) -- categorize it else -- or is a recognized language (but has a three-character code) add_prop_cat ('foreign_lang_source_2' .. code, {code}) -- categorize it differently TODO: support mutliple three-character code categories per cs1|2 template end end else add_maint_cat ('unknown_lang'); -- add maint category if not already added end

table.insert (language_list, name); name = ; -- so we can reuse it end

code = #language_list -- reuse code as number of languages in the list if 2 >= code then name = table.concat (language_list, ' and ') -- insert '<space>and<space>' between two language names elseif 2 < code then language_list[code] = 'and ' .. language_list[code]; -- prepend last name with 'and<space>' name = table.concat (language_list, ', ') -- and concatenate with '<comma><space>' separators end if this_wiki_name == name then return ; -- if one language and that language is this wiki's return an empty string (no annotation) end return (" " .. wrap_msg ('language', name)); -- otherwise wrap with '(in ...)' --[[ TODO: should only return blank or name rather than full list so we can clean up the bunched parenthetical elements Language, Type, Format ]] end


--[[--------------------------< S E T _ C S 1 _ S T Y L E >----------------------------------------------------

Set style settings for CS1 citation templates. Returns separator and postscript settings At en.wiki, for cs1: ps gets: '.' sep gets: '.'

]]

local function set_cs1_style (ps) if not is_set (ps) then -- unless explicitely set to something ps = cfg.presentation['ps_cs1']; -- terminate the rendered citation end return cfg.presentation['sep_cs1'], ps; -- element separator end


--[[--------------------------< S E T _ C S 2 _ S T Y L E >----------------------------------------------------

Set style settings for CS2 citation templates. Returns separator, postscript, ref settings At en.wiki, for cs2: ps gets: (empty string - no terminal punctuation) sep gets: ','

]]

local function set_cs2_style (ps, ref) if not is_set (ps) then -- if |postscript= has not been set, set cs2 default ps = cfg.presentation['ps_cs2']; -- terminate the rendered citation end if not is_set (ref) then -- if |ref= is not set ref = "harv"; -- set default |ref=harv end return cfg.presentation['sep_cs2'], ps, ref; -- element separator end


--[[--------------------------< G E T _ S E T T I N G S _ F R O M _ C I T E _ C L A S S >----------------------

When |mode= is not set or when its value is invalid, use config.CitationClass and parameter values to establish rendered style.

]]

local function get_settings_from_cite_class (ps, ref, cite_class) local sep; if (cite_class == "citation") then -- for citation templates (CS2) sep, ps, ref = set_cs2_style (ps, ref); else -- not a citation template so CS1 sep, ps = set_cs1_style (ps); end

return sep, ps, ref -- return them all end


--[[--------------------------< S E T _ S T Y L E >------------------------------------------------------------

Establish basic style settings to be used when rendering the citation. Uses |mode= if set and valid or uses config.CitationClass from the template's #invoke: to establish style.

]]

local function set_style (mode, ps, ref, cite_class) local sep; if 'cs2' == mode then -- if this template is to be rendered in CS2 (citation) style sep, ps, ref = set_cs2_style (ps, ref); elseif 'cs1' == mode then -- if this template is to be rendered in CS1 (cite xxx) style sep, ps = set_cs1_style (ps); else -- anything but cs1 or cs2 sep, ps, ref = get_settings_from_cite_class (ps, ref, cite_class); -- get settings based on the template's CitationClass end if 'none' == ps:lower() then -- if assigned value is 'none' then ps = ; -- set to empty string end

return sep, ps, ref end


--[=[-------------------------< I S _ P D F >------------------------------------------------------------------

Determines if a url has the file extension that is one of the pdf file extensions used by MediaWiki:Common.css when applying the pdf icon to external links.

returns true if file extension is one of the recognized extensions, else false

]=]

local function is_pdf (url) return url:match ('%.pdf$') or url:match ('%.PDF$') or url:match ('%.pdf[%?#]') or url:match ('%.PDF[%?#]'); end


--[[--------------------------< S T Y L E _ F O R M A T >------------------------------------------------------

Applies css style to |format=, |chapter-format=, etc. Also emits an error message if the format parameter does not have a matching url parameter. If the format parameter is not set and the url contains a file extension that is recognized as a pdf document by MediaWiki's commons.css, this code will set the format parameter to (PDF) with the appropriate styling.

]]

local function style_format (format, url, fmt_param, url_param) if is_set (format) then format = wrap_style ('format', format); -- add leading space, parentheses, resize if not is_set (url) then format = format .. set_error( 'format_missing_url', {fmt_param, url_param} ); -- add an error message end elseif is_pdf (url) then -- format is not set so if url is a pdf file then format = wrap_style ('format', 'PDF'); -- set format to pdf else format = ; -- empty string for concatenation end return format; end


--[[--------------------------< G E T _ D I S P L A Y _ A U T H O R S _ E D I T O R S >------------------------

Returns a number that defines the number of names displayed for author and editor name lists and a boolean flag to indicate when et al. should be appended to the name list.

When the value assigned to |display-xxxxors= is a number greater than or equal to zero, return the number and the previous state of the 'etal' flag (false by default but may have been set to true if the name list contains some variant of the text 'et al.').

When the value assigned to |display-xxxxors= is the keyword 'etal', return a number that is one greater than the number of authors in the list and set the 'etal' flag true. This will cause the list_people() to display all of the names in the name list followed by 'et al.'

In all other cases, returns nil and the previous state of the 'etal' flag.

inputs: max: A['DisplayAuthors'] or A['DisplayEditors']; a number or some flavor of etal count: #a or #e list_name: 'authors' or 'editors' etal: author_etal or editor_etal

]]

local function get_display_authors_editors (max, count, list_name, etal) if is_set (max) then if 'etal' == max:lower():gsub("[ '%.]", ) then -- the :gsub() portion makes 'etal' from a variety of 'et al.' spellings and stylings max = count + 1; -- number of authors + 1 so display all author name plus et al. etal = true; -- overrides value set by extract_names() elseif max:match ('^%d+$') then -- if is a string of numbers max = tonumber (max); -- make it a number if max >= count then -- if |display-xxxxors= value greater than or equal to number of authors/editors add_maint_cat ('disp_auth_ed', cfg.special_case_translation [list_name]); end else -- not a valid keyword or number table.insert( z.message_tail, { set_error( 'invalid_param_val', {'display-' .. list_name, max}, true ) } ); -- add error message max = nil; -- unset; as if |display-xxxxors= had not been set end end

return max, etal; end


--[[--------------------------< E X T R A _ T E X T _ I N _ P A G E _ C H E C K >------------------------------

Adds page to Category:CS1 maint: extra text if |page= or |pages= has what appears to be some form of p. or pp. abbreviation in the first characters of the parameter content.

check Page and Pages for extraneous p, p., pp, and pp. at start of parameter value: good pattern: '^P[^%.P%l]' matches when |page(s)= begins PX or P# but not Px where x and X are letters and # is a dgiit bad pattern: '^[Pp][Pp]' matches matches when |page(s)= begins pp or pP or Pp or PP

]]

local function extra_text_in_page_check (page) local good_pattern = '^P[^%.Pp]'; -- ok to begin with uppercase P: P7 (pg 7 of section P) but not p123 (page 123) TODO: add Gg for PG or Pg? local bad_pattern = '^[Pp]?[Pp]%.?[ %d]';

if not page:match (good_pattern) and (page:match (bad_pattern) or page:match ('^[Pp]ages?')) then add_maint_cat ('extra_text'); end end


--[=[-------------------------< G E T _ V _ N A M E _ T A B L E >----------------------------------------------

split apart a |vauthors= or |veditors= parameter. This function allows for corporate names, wrapped in doubled parentheses to also have commas; in the old version of the code, the doubled parnetheses were included in the rendered citation and in the metadata. Individual author names may be wikilinked

|vauthors=Jones AB, White EB, ((Black, Brown, and Co.))

]=]

local function get_v_name_table (vparam, output_table, output_link_table) local name_table = mw.text.split(vparam, "%s*,%s*"); -- names are separated by commas local wl_type, label, link; -- wl_type not used here; just a place holder

local i = 1;

while name_table[i] do if name_table[i]:match ('^%(%(.*[^%)][^%)]$') then -- first segment of corporate with one or more commas; this segment has the opening doubled parens local name = name_table[i]; i=i+1; -- bump indexer to next segment while name_table[i] do name = name .. ', ' .. name_table[i]; -- concatenate with previous segments if name_table[i]:match ('^.*%)%)$') then -- if this table member has the closing doubled parens break; -- and done reassembling so end i=i+1; -- bump indexer end table.insert (output_table, name); -- and add corporate name to the output table table.insert (output_link_table, ); -- no wikilink else wl_type, label, link = is_wikilink (name_table[i]); -- wl_type is: 0, no wl (text in label variable); 1, D; 2, D table.insert (output_table, label); -- add this name if 1 == wl_type then table.insert (output_link_table, label); -- simple wikilink D else table.insert (output_link_table, link); -- no wikilink or D; add this link if there is one, else empty string end end i = i+1; end return output_table; end


--[[--------------------------< P A R S E _ V A U T H O R S _ V E D I T O R S >--------------------------------

This function extracts author / editor names from |vauthors= or |veditors= and finds matching |xxxxor-maskn= and |xxxxor-linkn= in args. It then returns a table of assembled names just as extract_names() does.

Author / editor names in |vauthors= or |veditors= must be in Vancouver system style. Corporate or institutional names may sometimes be required and because such names will often fail the is_good_vanc_name() and other format compliance tests, are wrapped in doubled paranethese ((corporate name)) to suppress the format tests.

Supports generational suffixes Jr, 2nd, 3rd, 4th–6th.

This function sets the vancouver error when a reqired comma is missing and when there is a space between an author's initials.

]]

local function parse_vauthors_veditors (args, vparam, list_name) local names = {}; -- table of names assembled from |vauthors=, |author-maskn=, |author-linkn= local v_name_table = {}; local v_link_table = {}; -- when name is wikilinked, targets go in this table local etal = false; -- return value set to true when we find some form of et al. vauthors parameter local last, first, link, mask, suffix; local corporate = false;

vparam, etal = name_has_etal (vparam, etal, true); -- find and remove variations on et al. do not categorize (do it here because et al. might have a period) v_name_table = get_v_name_table (vparam, v_name_table, v_link_table); -- names are separated by commas

for i, v_name in ipairs(v_name_table) do if v_name:match ('^%(%(.+%)%)$') then -- corporate authors are wrapped in doubled parentheses to supress vanc formatting and error detection first = ; -- set to empty string for concatenation and because it may have been set for previous author/editor last = v_name:match ('^%(%((.+)%)%)$') -- remove doubled parntheses corporate = true; -- flag used in list_people() elseif string.find(v_name, "%s") then if v_name:find('[;%.]') then -- look for commonly occurring punctuation characters; add_vanc_error ('punctuation'); end local lastfirstTable = {} lastfirstTable = mw.text.split(v_name, "%s") first = table.remove(lastfirstTable); -- removes and returns value of last element in table which should be author intials if is_suffix (first) then -- if a valid suffix suffix = first -- save it as a suffix and first = table.remove(lastfirstTable); -- get what should be the initials from the table end -- no suffix error message here because letter combination may be result of Romanization; check for digits? last = table.concat(lastfirstTable, " ") -- returns a string that is the concatenation of all other names that are not initials if mw.ustring.match (last, '%a+%s+%u+%s+%a+') then add_vanc_error ('missing comma'); -- matches last II last; the case when a comma is missing end if mw.ustring.match (v_name, ' %u %u$') then -- this test is in the wrong place TODO: move or replace with a more appropriate test add_vanc_error ('name'); -- matches a space between two intiials end else first = ; -- set to empty string for concatenation and because it may have been set for previous author/editor last = v_name; -- last name or single corporate name? Doesn't support multiword corporate names? do we need this? end

if is_set (first) then if not mw.ustring.match (first, "^%u?%u$") then -- first shall contain one or two upper-case letters, nothing else add_vanc_error ('initials'); -- too many initials; mixed case initials (which may be ok Romanization); hyphenated initials end is_good_vanc_name (last, first); -- check first and last before restoring the suffix which may have a non-Latin digit if is_set (suffix) then first = first .. ' ' .. suffix; -- if there was a suffix concatenate with the initials suffix = ; -- unset so we don't add this suffix to all subsequent names end else if not corporate then is_good_vanc_name (last, ); end end

link = select_one( args, cfg.aliases[list_name .. '-Link'], 'redundant_parameters', i ) or v_link_table[i]; mask = select_one( args, cfg.aliases[list_name .. '-Mask'], 'redundant_parameters', i ); names[i] = {last = last, first = first, link = link, mask = mask, corporate=corporate}; -- add this assembled name to our names list end return names, etal; -- all done, return our list of names end


--[[--------------------------< S E L E C T _ A U T H O R _ E D I T O R _ S O U R C E >------------------------

Select one of |authors=, |authorn= / |lastn / firstn=, or |vauthors= as the source of the author name list or select one of |editors=, |editorn= / editor-lastn= / |editor-firstn= or |veditors= as the source of the editor name list.

Only one of these appropriate three will be used. The hierarchy is: |authorn= (and aliases) highest and |authors= lowest and similarly, |editorn= (and aliases) highest and |editors= lowest

When looking for |authorn= / |editorn= parameters, test |xxxxor1= and |xxxxor2= (and all of their aliases); stops after the second test which mimicks the test used in extract_names() when looking for a hole in the author name list. There may be a better way to do this, I just haven't discovered what that way is.

Emits an error message when more than one xxxxor name source is provided.

In this function, vxxxxors = vauthors or veditors; xxxxors = authors or editors as appropriate.

]]

local function select_author_editor_source (vxxxxors, xxxxors, args, list_name) local lastfirst = false; if select_one( args, cfg.aliases[list_name .. '-Last'], 'none', 1 ) or -- do this twice incase we have a |first1= without a |last1=; this ... select_one( args, cfg.aliases[list_name .. '-First'], 'none', 1 ) or -- ... also catches the case where |first= is used with |vauthors= select_one( args, cfg.aliases[list_name .. '-Last'], 'none', 2 ) or select_one( args, cfg.aliases[list_name .. '-First'], 'none', 2 ) then lastfirst=true; end

if (is_set (vxxxxors) and true == lastfirst) or -- these are the three error conditions (is_set (vxxxxors) and is_set (xxxxors)) or (true == lastfirst and is_set (xxxxors)) then local err_name; if 'AuthorList' == list_name then -- figure out which name should be used in error message err_name = 'author'; else err_name = 'editor'; end table.insert( z.message_tail, { set_error( 'redundant_parameters', {err_name .. '-name-list parameters'}, true ) } ); -- add error message end

if true == lastfirst then return 1 end; -- return a number indicating which author name source to use if is_set (vxxxxors) then return 2 end; if is_set (xxxxors) then return 3 end; return 1; -- no authors so return 1; this allows missing author name test to run in case there is a first without last end


--[[--------------------------< I S _ V A L I D _ P A R A M E T E R _ V A L U E >------------------------------

This function is used to validate a parameter's assigned value for those parameters that have only a limited number of allowable values (yes, y, true, no, etc). When the parameter value has not been assigned a value (missing or empty in the source template) the function returns true. If the parameter value is one of the list of allowed values returns true; else, emits an error message and returns false.

]]

local function is_valid_parameter_value (value, name, possible) if not is_set (value) then return true; -- an empty parameter is ok elseif in_array(value:lower(), possible) then return true; else table.insert( z.message_tail, { set_error( 'invalid_param_val', {name, value}, true ) } ); -- not an allowed value so add error message return false end end


--[[--------------------------< T E R M I N A T E _ N A M E _ L I S T >----------------------------------------

This function terminates a name list (author, contributor, editor) with a separator character (sepc) and a space when the last character is not a sepc character or when the last three characters are not sepc followed by two closing square brackets (close of a wikilink). When either of these is true, the name_list is terminated with a single space character.

]]

local function terminate_name_list (name_list, sepc) if (string.sub (name_list,-3,-1) == sepc .. '. ') then -- if already properly terminated return name_list; -- just return the name list elseif (string.sub (name_list,-1,-1) == sepc) or (string.sub (name_list,-3,-1) == sepc .. ']]') then -- if last name in list ends with sepc char return name_list .. " "; -- don't add another else return name_list .. sepc .. ' '; -- otherwise terninate the name list end end


--[[-------------------------< F O R M A T _ V O L U M E _ I S S U E >----------------------------------------

returns the concatenation of the formatted volume and issue parameters as a single string; or formatted volume or formatted issue, or an empty string if neither are set.

]]

local function format_volume_issue (volume, issue, cite_class, origin, sepc, lower) if not is_set (volume) and not is_set (issue) then return ; end

if 'magazine' == cite_class or (in_array (cite_class, {'citation', 'map'}) and 'magazine' == origin) then if is_set (volume) and is_set (issue) then return wrap_msg ('vol-no', {sepc, volume, issue}, lower); elseif is_set (volume) then return wrap_msg ('vol', {sepc, volume}, lower); else return wrap_msg ('issue', {sepc, issue}, lower); end end

local vol = ;

if is_set (volume) then if (4 < mw.ustring.len(volume)) then vol = substitute (cfg.messages['j-vol'], {sepc, volume}); else vol = substitute (cfg.presentation['vol-bold'], {sepc, hyphen_to_dash(volume)}); end end if is_set (issue) then return vol .. substitute (cfg.messages['j-issue'], issue); end return vol; end


--[[-------------------------< F O R M A T _ P A G E S _ S H E E T S >-----------------------------------------

adds static text to one of |page(s)= or |sheet(s)= values and returns it with all of the others set to empty strings. The return order is: page, pages, sheet, sheets

Singular has priority over plural when both are provided.

]]

local function format_pages_sheets (page, pages, sheet, sheets, cite_class, origin, sepc, nopp, lower) if 'map' == cite_class then -- only cite map supports sheet(s) as in-source locators if is_set (sheet) then if 'journal' == origin then return , , wrap_msg ('j-sheet', sheet, lower), ; else return , , wrap_msg ('sheet', {sepc, sheet}, lower), ; end elseif is_set (sheets) then if 'journal' == origin then return , , , wrap_msg ('j-sheets', sheets, lower); else return , , , wrap_msg ('sheets', {sepc, sheets}, lower); end end end

local is_journal = 'journal' == cite_class or (in_array (cite_class, {'citation', 'map', 'interview'}) and 'journal' == origin);

if is_set (page) then if is_journal then return substitute (cfg.messages['j-page(s)'], page), , , ; elseif not nopp then return substitute (cfg.messages['p-prefix'], {sepc, page}), , , ; else return substitute (cfg.messages['nopp'], {sepc, page}), , , ; end elseif is_set(pages) then if is_journal then return substitute (cfg.messages['j-page(s)'], pages), , , ; elseif tonumber(pages) ~= nil and not nopp then -- if pages is only digits, assume a single page number return , substitute (cfg.messages['p-prefix'], {sepc, pages}), , ; elseif not nopp then return , substitute (cfg.messages['pp-prefix'], {sepc, pages}), , ; else return , substitute (cfg.messages['nopp'], {sepc, pages}), , ; end end

return , , , ; -- return empty strings end


--[=[-------------------------< A R C H I V E _ U R L _ C H E C K >--------------------------------------------

Check archive.org urls to make sure they at least look like they are pointing at valid archives and not to the save snapshot url or to calendar pages. When the archive url is 'https://web.archive.org/save/' (or http://...) archive.org saves a snapshot of the target page in the url. That is something that Wikipedia should not allow unwitting readers to do.

When the archive.org url does not have a complete timestamp, archive.org chooses a snapshot according to its own algorithm or provides a calendar 'search' result. WP:ELNO discourages links to search results.

This function looks at the value assigned to |archive-url= and returns empty strings for |archive-url= and |archive-date= and an error message when: |archive-url= holds an archive.org save command url |archive-url= is an archive.org url that does not have a complete timestamp (YYYYMMDDhhmmss 14 digits) in the correct place otherwise returns |archive-url= and |archive-date=

There are two mostly compatible archive.org urls: //web.archive.org/<timestamp>... -- the old form //web.archive.org/web/<timestamp>... -- the new form

The old form does not support or map to the new form when it contains a display flag. There are four identified flags ('id_', 'js_', 'cs_', 'im_') but since archive.org ignores others following the same form (two letters and an underscore) we don't check for these specific flags but we do check the form.

This function supports a preview mode. When the article is rendered in preview mode, this funct may return a modified archive url: for save command errors, return undated wildcard (/*/) for timestamp errors when the timestamp has a wildcard, return the url unmodified for timestamp errors when the timestamp does not have a wildcard, return with timestamp limited to six digits plus wildcard (/yyyymm*/)

]=]

local function archive_url_check (url, date) local err_msg = ; -- start with the error message empty local path, timestamp, flag; -- portions of the archive.or url

if (not url:match('//web%.archive%.org/')) and (not url:match('//liveweb%.archive%.org/')) then -- also deprecated liveweb Wayback machine url return url, date; -- not an archive.org archive, return ArchiveURL and ArchiveDate end

if url:match('//web%.archive%.org/save/') then -- if a save command url, we don't want to allow saving of the target page err_msg = 'save command'; url = url:gsub ('(//web%.archive%.org)/save/', '%1/*/', 1); -- for preview mode: modify ArchiveURL elseif url:match('//liveweb%.archive%.org/') then err_msg = 'liveweb'; else path, timestamp, flag = url:match('//web%.archive%.org/([^%d]*)(%d+)([^/]*)/'); -- split out some of the url parts for evaluation

if not is_set(timestamp) or 14 ~= timestamp:len() then -- path and flag optional, must have 14-digit timestamp here err_msg = 'timestamp'; if '*' ~= flag then url=url:gsub ('(//web%.archive%.org/[^%d]*%d?%d?%d?%d?%d?%d?)[^/]*', '%1*', 1) -- for preview, modify ts to be yearmo* max (0-6 digits plus splat) end elseif is_set(path) and 'web/' ~= path then -- older archive urls do not have the extra 'web/' path element err_msg = 'path'; elseif is_set (flag) and not is_set (path) then -- flag not allowed with the old form url (without the 'web/' path element) err_msg = 'flag'; elseif is_set (flag) and not flag:match ('%a%a_') then -- flag if present must be two alpha characters and underscore (requires 'web/' path element) err_msg = 'flag'; else return url, date; -- return archiveURL and ArchiveDate end end -- if here, something not right so table.insert( z.message_tail, { set_error( 'archive_url', {err_msg}, true ) } ); -- add error message and if is_set (Frame:preprocess('12674')) then return , ; -- return empty strings for archiveURL and ArchiveDate else return url, date; -- preview mode so return archiveURL and ArchiveDate end end


--[[--------------------------< C I T A T I O N 0 >------------------------------------------------------------

This is the main function doing the majority of the citation formatting.

]]

local function citation0( config, args) --[[ Load Input Parameters The argument_wrapper facilitates the mapping of multiple aliases to single internal variable. ]] local A = argument_wrapper( args ); local i

-- Pick out the relevant fields from the arguments. Different citation templates -- define different field names for the same underlying things.

-- set default parameter values defined by |mode= parameter. local Mode = A['Mode']; if not is_valid_parameter_value (Mode, 'mode', cfg.keywords['mode']) then Mode = ; end

local author_etal; local a = {}; -- authors list from |lastn= / |firstn= pairs or |vauthors= local Authors; local NameListFormat = A['NameListFormat']; local Collaboration = A['Collaboration'];

do -- to limit scope of selected local selected = select_author_editor_source (A['Vauthors'], A['Authors'], args, 'AuthorList'); if 1 == selected then a, author_etal = extract_names (args, 'AuthorList'); -- fetch author list from |authorn= / |lastn= / |firstn=, |author-linkn=, and |author-maskn= elseif 2 == selected then NameListFormat = 'vanc'; -- override whatever |name-list-format= might be a, author_etal = parse_vauthors_veditors (args, args.vauthors, 'AuthorList'); -- fetch author list from |vauthors=, |author-linkn=, and |author-maskn= elseif 3 == selected then Authors = A['Authors']; -- use content of |authors= if 'authors' == A:ORIGIN('Authors') then -- but add a maint cat if the parameter is |authors= add_maint_cat ('authors'); -- because use of this parameter is discouraged; what to do about the aliases is a TODO: end end if is_set (Collaboration) then author_etal = true; -- so that |display-authors=etal not required end end

local Others = A['Others'];

local editor_etal; local e = {}; -- editors list from |editor-lastn= / |editor-firstn= pairs or |veditors= local Editors;

do -- to limit scope of selected local selected = select_author_editor_source (A['Veditors'], A['Editors'], args, 'EditorList'); if 1 == selected then e, editor_etal = extract_names (args, 'EditorList'); -- fetch editor list from |editorn= / |editor-lastn= / |editor-firstn=, |editor-linkn=, and |editor-maskn= elseif 2 == selected then NameListFormat = 'vanc'; -- override whatever |name-list-format= might be e, editor_etal = parse_vauthors_veditors (args, args.veditors, 'EditorList'); -- fetch editor list from |veditors=, |editor-linkn=, and |editor-maskn= elseif 3 == selected then Editors = A['Editors']; -- use content of |editors= add_maint_cat ('editors'); -- but add a maint cat because use of this parameter is discouraged end end

local t = {}; -- translators list from |translator-lastn= / translator-firstn= pairs local Translators; -- assembled translators name list t = extract_names (args, 'TranslatorList'); -- fetch translator list from |translatorn= / |translator-lastn=, -firstn=, -linkn=, -maskn=

local interviewers_list = {}; local Interviewers = A['Interviewers'] if is_set (Interviewers) then -- add a maint cat if the |interviewers= is used add_maint_cat ('interviewers'); -- because use of this parameter is discouraged else interviewers_list = extract_names (args, 'InterviewerList'); -- else, process preferred interviewers parameters end

local c = {}; -- contributors list from |contributor-lastn= / contributor-firstn= pairs local Contributors; -- assembled contributors name list local Contribution = A['Contribution']; if in_array(config.CitationClass, {"book","citation"}) and not is_set(A['Periodical']) then -- |contributor= and |contribution= only supported in book cites c = extract_names (args, 'ContributorList'); -- fetch contributor list from |contributorn= / |contributor-lastn=, -firstn=, -linkn=, -maskn=

if 0 < #c then if not is_set (Contribution) then -- |contributor= requires |contribution= table.insert( z.message_tail, { set_error( 'contributor_missing_required_param', 'contribution')}); -- add missing contribution error message c = {}; -- blank the contributors' table; it is used as a flag later end if 0 == #a then -- |contributor= requires |author= table.insert( z.message_tail, { set_error( 'contributor_missing_required_param', 'author')}); -- add missing author error message c = {}; -- blank the contributors' table; it is used as a flag later end end else -- if not a book cite if select_one (args, cfg.aliases['ContributorList-Last'], 'redundant_parameters', 1 ) then -- are there contributor name list parameters? table.insert( z.message_tail, { set_error( 'contributor_ignored')}); -- add contributor ignored error message end Contribution = nil; -- unset end

if not is_valid_parameter_value (NameListFormat, 'name-list-format', cfg.keywords['name-list-format']) then -- only accepted value for this parameter is 'vanc' NameListFormat = ; -- anything else, set to empty string end

local Year = A['Year']; local PublicationDate = A['PublicationDate']; local OrigYear = A['OrigYear']; local Date = A['Date']; local LayDate = A['LayDate']; ------------------------------------------------- Get title data local Title = A['Title']; local ScriptTitle = A['ScriptTitle']; local BookTitle = A['BookTitle']; local Conference = A['Conference']; local TransTitle = A['TransTitle']; local TitleNote = A['TitleNote']; local TitleLink = A['TitleLink']; link_title_ok (TitleLink, A:ORIGIN ('TitleLink'), Title, 'title'); -- check for wikimarkup in |title-link= or wikimarkup in |title= when |title-link= is set

local Chapter = A['Chapter']; local ScriptChapter = A['ScriptChapter']; local ChapterLink -- = A['ChapterLink']; -- deprecated as a parameter but still used internally by cite episode local TransChapter = A['TransChapter']; local TitleType = A['TitleType']; local Degree = A['Degree']; local Docket = A['Docket']; local ArchiveFormat = A['ArchiveFormat'];

local ArchiveDate; local ArchiveURL;

ArchiveURL, ArchiveDate = archive_url_check (A['ArchiveURL'], A['ArchiveDate'])

local DeadURL = A['DeadURL'] if not is_valid_parameter_value (DeadURL, 'dead-url', cfg.keywords ['deadurl']) then -- set in config.defaults to 'yes' DeadURL = ; -- anything else, set to empty string end

local URL = A['URL'] local URLorigin = A:ORIGIN('URL'); -- get name of parameter that holds URL local ChapterURL = A['ChapterURL']; local ChapterURLorigin = A:ORIGIN('ChapterURL'); -- get name of parameter that holds ChapterURL local ConferenceFormat = A['ConferenceFormat']; local ConferenceURL = A['ConferenceURL']; local ConferenceURLorigin = A:ORIGIN('ConferenceURL'); -- get name of parameter that holds ConferenceURL local Periodical = A['Periodical']; local Periodical_origin = A:ORIGIN('Periodical'); -- get the name of the periodical parameter

local Series = A['Series'];

local Volume; local Issue; local Page; local Pages; local At;

if in_array (config.CitationClass, cfg.templates_using_volume) then Volume = A['Volume']; end -- conference & map books do not support issue if in_array (config.CitationClass, cfg.templates_using_issue) and not (in_array (config.CitationClass, {'conference', 'map'}) and not is_set (Periodical))then Issue = hyphen_to_dash (A['Issue']); end local Position = ; if not in_array (config.CitationClass, cfg.templates_not_using_page) then Page = A['Page']; Pages = hyphen_to_dash (A['Pages']); At = A['At']; end

local Edition = A['Edition']; local PublicationPlace = A['PublicationPlace'] local Place = A['Place'];

local PublisherName = A['PublisherName']; local RegistrationRequired = A['RegistrationRequired']; if not is_valid_parameter_value (RegistrationRequired, 'registration', cfg.keywords ['yes_true_y']) then RegistrationRequired=nil; end

local SubscriptionRequired = A['SubscriptionRequired']; if not is_valid_parameter_value (SubscriptionRequired, 'subscription', cfg.keywords ['yes_true_y']) then SubscriptionRequired=nil; end

local UrlAccess = A['UrlAccess']; if not is_valid_parameter_value (UrlAccess, 'url-access', cfg.keywords ['url-access']) then UrlAccess = nil; end if not is_set(URL) and is_set(UrlAccess) then UrlAccess = nil; table.insert( z.message_tail, { set_error( 'param_access_requires_param', {'url'}, true ) } ); end

if is_set (UrlAccess) and is_set (SubscriptionRequired) then -- while not aliases, these are much the same so if both are set table.insert( z.message_tail, { set_error( 'redundant_parameters', {wrap_style ('parameter', 'url-access') .. ' and ' .. wrap_style ('parameter', 'subscription')}, true ) } ); -- add error message SubscriptionRequired = nil; -- unset; prefer |access= over |subscription= end if is_set (UrlAccess) and is_set (RegistrationRequired) then -- these are not the same but contradictory so if both are set table.insert( z.message_tail, { set_error( 'redundant_parameters', {wrap_style ('parameter', 'url-access') .. ' and ' .. wrap_style ('parameter', 'registration')}, true ) } ); -- add error message RegistrationRequired = nil; -- unset; prefer |access= over |registration= end

local ChapterUrlAccess = A['ChapterUrlAccess']; if not is_valid_parameter_value (ChapterUrlAccess, 'chapter-url-access', cfg.keywords ['url-access']) then -- same as url-access ChapterUrlAccess = nil; end if not is_set(ChapterURL) and is_set(ChapterUrlAccess) then ChapterUrlAccess = nil; table.insert( z.message_tail, { set_error( 'param_access_requires_param', {'chapter-url'}, true ) } ); end

local Via = A['Via']; local AccessDate = A['AccessDate']; local Agency = A['Agency'];

local Language = A['Language']; local Format = A['Format']; local ChapterFormat = A['ChapterFormat']; local DoiBroken = A['DoiBroken']; local ID = A['ID']; local ASINTLD = A['ASINTLD']; local IgnoreISBN = A['IgnoreISBN']; if not is_valid_parameter_value (IgnoreISBN, 'ignore-isbn-error', cfg.keywords ['yes_true_y']) then IgnoreISBN = nil; -- anything else, set to empty string end local Embargo = A['Embargo']; local Class = A['Class']; -- arxiv class identifier

local ID_list = extract_ids( args ); local ID_access_levels = extract_id_access_levels( args, ID_list );

local Quote = A['Quote'];

local LayFormat = A['LayFormat']; local LayURL = A['LayURL']; local LaySource = A['LaySource']; local Transcript = A['Transcript']; local TranscriptFormat = A['TranscriptFormat']; local TranscriptURL = A['TranscriptURL'] local TranscriptURLorigin = A:ORIGIN('TranscriptURL'); -- get name of parameter that holds TranscriptURL

local LastAuthorAmp = A['LastAuthorAmp']; if not is_valid_parameter_value (LastAuthorAmp, 'last-author-amp', cfg.keywords ['yes_true_y']) then LastAuthorAmp = nil; -- set to empty string end

local no_tracking_cats = A['NoTracking']; if not is_valid_parameter_value (no_tracking_cats, 'no-tracking', cfg.keywords ['yes_true_y']) then no_tracking_cats = nil; -- set to empty string end

--local variables that are not cs1 parameters local use_lowercase; -- controls capitalization of certain static text local this_page = mw.title.getCurrentTitle(); -- also used for COinS and for language local anchor_year; -- used in the CITEREF identifier local COinS_date = {}; -- holds date info extracted from |date= for the COinS metadata by Module:Date verification

local DF = A['DF']; -- date format set in cs1|2 template if not is_valid_parameter_value (DF, 'df', cfg.keywords['date-format']) then -- validate reformatting keyword DF = ; -- not valid, set to empty string end

local sepc; -- separator between citation elements for CS1 a period, for CS2, a comma local PostScript; local Ref; sepc, PostScript, Ref = set_style (Mode:lower(), A['PostScript'], A['Ref'], config.CitationClass); use_lowercase = ( sepc == ',' ); -- used to control capitalization for certain static text

--check this page to see if it is in one of the namespaces that cs1 is not supposed to add to the error categories if not is_set (no_tracking_cats) then -- ignore if we are already not going to categorize this page if in_array (this_page.nsText, cfg.uncategorized_namespaces) then no_tracking_cats = "true"; -- set no_tracking_cats end for _,v in ipairs (cfg.uncategorized_subpages) do -- cycle through page name patterns if this_page.text:match (v) then -- test page name against each pattern no_tracking_cats = "true"; -- set no_tracking_cats break; -- bail out if one is found end end end

-- check for extra |page=, |pages= or |at= parameters. (also sheet and sheets while we're at it) select_one( args, {'page', 'p', 'pp', 'pages', 'at', 'sheet', 'sheets'}, 'redundant_parameters' ); -- this is a dummy call simply to get the error message and category

local NoPP = A['NoPP'] if is_set (NoPP) and is_valid_parameter_value (NoPP, 'nopp', cfg.keywords ['yes_true_y']) then NoPP = true; else NoPP = nil; -- unset, used as a flag later end

if is_set(Page) then if is_set(Pages) or is_set(At) then Pages = ; -- unset the others At = ; end extra_text_in_page_check (Page); -- add this page to maint cat if |page= value begins with what looks like p. or pp. elseif is_set(Pages) then if is_set(At) then At = ; -- unset end extra_text_in_page_check (Pages); -- add this page to maint cat if |pages= value begins with what looks like p. or pp. end

-- both |publication-place= and |place= (|location=) allowed if different if not is_set(PublicationPlace) and is_set(Place) then PublicationPlace = Place; -- promote |place= (|location=) to |publication-place end

if PublicationPlace == Place then Place = ; end -- don't need both if they are the same

--[[ Parameter remapping for cite encyclopedia: When the citation has these parameters: |encyclopedia and |title then map |title to |article and |encyclopedia to |title |encyclopedia and |article then map |encyclopedia to |title |encyclopedia then map |encyclopedia to |title

|trans-title maps to |trans-chapter when |title is re-mapped |url maps to |chapterurl when |title is remapped

All other combinations of |encyclopedia, |title, and |article are not modified

]]

local Encyclopedia = A['Encyclopedia'];

if ( config.CitationClass == "encyclopaedia" ) or ( config.CitationClass == "citation" and is_set (Encyclopedia)) then -- test code for citation if is_set(Periodical) then -- Periodical is set when |encyclopedia is set if is_set(Title) or is_set (ScriptTitle) then if not is_set(Chapter) then Chapter = Title; -- |encyclopedia and |title are set so map |title to |article and |encyclopedia to |title ScriptChapter = ScriptTitle; TransChapter = TransTitle; ChapterURL = URL; ChapterUrlAccess = UrlAccess;

if not is_set (ChapterURL) and is_set (TitleLink) then Chapter = make_wikilink (TitleLink, Chapter); end Title = Periodical; ChapterFormat = Format; Periodical = ; -- redundant so unset TransTitle = ; URL = ; Format = ; TitleLink = ; ScriptTitle = ; end else -- |title not set Title = Periodical; -- |encyclopedia set and |article set or not set so map |encyclopedia to |title Periodical = ; -- redundant so unset end end end

-- Special case for cite techreport. if (config.CitationClass == "techreport") then -- special case for cite techreport if is_set(A['Number']) then -- cite techreport uses 'number', which other citations alias to 'issue' if not is_set(ID) then -- can we use ID for the "number"? ID = A['Number']; -- yes, use it else -- ID has a value so emit error message table.insert( z.message_tail, { set_error('redundant_parameters', {wrap_style ('parameter', 'id') .. ' and ' .. wrap_style ('parameter', 'number')}, true )}); end end end

-- special case for cite mailing list if (config.CitationClass == "mailinglist") then Periodical = A ['MailingList']; elseif 'mailinglist' == A:ORIGIN('Periodical') then Periodical = ; -- unset because mailing list is only used for cite mailing list end

-- Account for the oddity that is Template:Cite conference, before generation of COinS data. if 'conference' == config.CitationClass then if is_set(BookTitle) then Chapter = Title; -- ChapterLink = TitleLink; -- |chapterlink= is deprecated ChapterURL = URL; ChapterUrlAccess = UrlAccess; ChapterURLorigin = URLorigin; URLorigin = ; ChapterFormat = Format; TransChapter = TransTitle; Title = BookTitle; Format = ; -- TitleLink = ; TransTitle = ; URL = ; end elseif 'speech' ~= config.CitationClass then Conference = ; -- not cite conference or cite speech so make sure this is empty string end

-- cite map oddities local Cartography = ""; local Scale = ""; local Sheet = A['Sheet'] or ; local Sheets = A['Sheets'] or ; if config.CitationClass == "map" then Chapter = A['Map']; ChapterURL = A['MapURL']; ChapterUrlAccess = UrlAccess; TransChapter = A['TransMap']; ChapterURLorigin = A:ORIGIN('MapURL'); ChapterFormat = A['MapFormat'];

Cartography = A['Cartography']; if is_set( Cartography ) then Cartography = sepc .. " " .. wrap_msg ('cartography', Cartography, use_lowercase); end Scale = A['Scale']; if is_set( Scale ) then Scale = sepc .. " " .. Scale; end end

-- Account for the oddities that are Template:Cite episode and Template:Cite serial, before generation of COinS data. if 'episode' == config.CitationClass or 'serial' == config.CitationClass then local AirDate = A['AirDate']; local SeriesLink = A['SeriesLink'];

link_title_ok (SeriesLink, A:ORIGIN ('SeriesLink'), Series, 'series'); -- check for wikimarkup in |series-link= or wikimarkup in |series= when |series-link= is set

local Network = A['Network']; local Station = A['Station']; local s, n = {}, {}; -- do common parameters first if is_set(Network) then table.insert(n, Network); end if is_set(Station) then table.insert(n, Station); end ID = table.concat(n, sepc .. ' ');

if not is_set (Date) and is_set (AirDate) then -- promote airdate to date Date = AirDate; end

if 'episode' == config.CitationClass then -- handle the oddities that are strictly Template:Cite episode local Season = A['Season']; local SeriesNumber = A['SeriesNumber'];

if is_set (Season) and is_set (SeriesNumber) then -- these are mutually exclusive so if both are set table.insert( z.message_tail, { set_error( 'redundant_parameters', {wrap_style ('parameter', 'season') .. ' and ' .. wrap_style ('parameter', 'seriesno')}, true ) } ); -- add error message SeriesNumber = ; -- unset; prefer |season= over |seriesno= end -- assemble a table of parts concatenated later into Series if is_set(Season) then table.insert(s, wrap_msg ('season', Season, use_lowercase)); end if is_set(SeriesNumber) then table.insert(s, wrap_msg ('series', SeriesNumber, use_lowercase)); end if is_set(Issue) then table.insert(s, wrap_msg ('episode', Issue, use_lowercase)); end Issue = ; -- unset because this is not a unique parameter

Chapter = Title; -- promote title parameters to chapter ScriptChapter = ScriptTitle; ChapterLink = TitleLink; -- alias episodelink TransChapter = TransTitle; ChapterURL = URL; ChapterUrlAccess = UrlAccess; ChapterURLorigin = A:ORIGIN('URL');

Title = Series; -- promote series to title TitleLink = SeriesLink; Series = table.concat(s, sepc .. ' '); -- this is concatenation of season, seriesno, episode number

if is_set (ChapterLink) and not is_set (ChapterURL) then -- link but not URL Chapter = make_wikilink (ChapterLink, Chapter); elseif is_set (ChapterLink) and is_set (ChapterURL) then -- if both are set, URL links episode; Series = make_wikilink (ChapterLink, Series); end URL = ; -- unset TransTitle = ; ScriptTitle = ;

else -- now oddities that are cite serial Issue = ; -- unset because this parameter no longer supported by the citation/core version of cite serial Chapter = A['Episode']; -- TODO: make |episode= available to cite episode someday? if is_set (Series) and is_set (SeriesLink) then Series = make_wikilink (SeriesLink, Series); end Series = wrap_style ('italic-title', Series); -- series is italicized end end -- end of Template:Cite episode stuff

-- Account for the oddities that are Template:Cite arxiv, Template:Cite biorxiv, Template:Cite citeseerx, before generation of COinS data. do if in_array (config.CitationClass, {'arxiv', 'biorxiv', 'citeseerx'}) then if not is_set (ID_list[config.CitationClass:upper()]) then -- |arxiv= or |eprint= required for cite arxiv; |biorxiv= & |citeseerx= required for their templates table.insert( z.message_tail, { set_error( config.CitationClass .. '_missing', {}, true ) } ); -- add error message end

if 'arxiv' == config.CitationClass then Periodical = 'arXiv'; -- set to arXiv for COinS; after that, must be set to empty string end

if 'biorxiv' == config.CitationClass then Periodical = 'bioRxiv'; -- set to bioRxiv for COinS; after that, must be set to empty string end

if 'citeseerx' == config.CitationClass then Periodical = 'CiteSeerX'; -- set to CiteSeerX for COinS; after that, must be set to empty string end end end

-- handle type parameter for those CS1 citations that have default values if in_array(config.CitationClass, {"AV-media-notes", "interview", "mailinglist", "map", "podcast", "pressrelease", "report", "techreport", "thesis"}) then TitleType = set_titletype (config.CitationClass, TitleType); if is_set(Degree) and "Thesis" == TitleType then -- special case for cite thesis TitleType = Degree .. ' ' .. cfg.title_types ['thesis']:lower(); end end

if is_set(TitleType) then -- if type parameter is specified TitleType = substitute( cfg.messages['type'], TitleType); -- display it in parentheses -- TODO: Hack on TitleType to fix bunched parentheses problem end

-- legacy: promote PublicationDate to Date if neither Date nor Year are set.

	local Date_origin;															-- to hold the name of parameter promoted to Date; required for date error messaging

if not is_set (Date) then Date = Year; -- promote Year to Date Year = nil; -- make nil so Year as empty string isn't used for CITEREF if not is_set (Date) and is_set(PublicationDate) then -- use PublicationDate when |date= and |year= are not set Date = PublicationDate; -- promote PublicationDate to Date PublicationDate = ; -- unset, no longer needed Date_origin = A:ORIGIN('PublicationDate'); -- save the name of the promoted parameter else Date_origin = A:ORIGIN('Year'); -- save the name of the promoted parameter end else Date_origin = A:ORIGIN('Date'); -- not a promotion; name required for error messaging end

if PublicationDate == Date then PublicationDate = ; end -- if PublicationDate is same as Date, don't display in rendered citation

--[[ Go test all of the date-holding parameters for valid MOS:DATE format and make sure that dates are real dates. This must be done before we do COinS because here is where we get the date used in the metadata.

Date validation supporting code is in Module:Citation/CS1/Date_validation ]] do -- create defined block to contain local variables error_message, date_parameters_list, mismatch local error_message = ; -- AirDate has been promoted to Date so not necessary to check it local date_parameters_list = { ['access-date'] = {val=AccessDate, name=A:ORIGIN ('AccessDate')}, ['archive-date'] = {val=ArchiveDate, name=A:ORIGIN ('ArchiveDate')}, ['date'] = {val=Date, name=Date_origin}, ['doi-broken-date'] = {val=DoiBroken, name=A:ORIGIN ('DoiBroken')}, ['embargo'] = {val=Embargo, name=A:ORIGIN ('Embargo')}, ['lay-date'] = {val=LayDate, name=A:ORIGIN ('LayDate')}, ['publication-date'] ={val=PublicationDate, name=A:ORIGIN ('PublicationDate')}, ['year'] = {val=Year, name=A:ORIGIN ('Year')}, }; anchor_year, Embargo, error_message = dates(date_parameters_list, COinS_date);

-- start temporary Julian / Gregorian calendar uncertainty categorization if COinS_date.inter_cal_cat then add_prop_cat ('jul_greg_uncertainty'); end -- end temporary Julian / Gregorian calendar uncertainty categorization

if is_set (Year) and is_set (Date) then -- both |date= and |year= not normally needed; local mismatch = year_date_check (Year, Date) if 0 == mismatch then -- |year= does not match a year-value in |date= if is_set (error_message) then -- if there is already an error message error_message = error_message .. ', '; -- tack on this additional message end error_message = error_message .. '|year= / |date= mismatch'; elseif 1 == mismatch then -- |year= matches year-value in |date= add_maint_cat ('date_year'); end end

if not is_set(error_message) then -- error free dates only local modified = false; -- flag

if is_set (DF) then -- if we need to reformat dates modified = reformat_dates (date_parameters_list, DF, false); -- reformat to DF format, use long month names if appropriate end

if true == date_hyphen_to_dash (date_parameters_list) then -- convert hyphens to dashes where appropriate modified = true; add_maint_cat ('date_format'); -- hyphens were converted so add maint category end

-- for those wikis that can and want to have English date names translated to the local language, -- uncomment these three lines. Not supported by en.wiki (for obvious reasons) -- set date_name_xlate() second argument to true to translate English digits to local digits (will translate ymd dates) -- if date_name_xlate (date_parameters_list, false) then -- modified = true; -- end

if modified then -- if the date_parameters_list values were modified AccessDate = date_parameters_list['access-date'].val; -- overwrite date holding parameters with modified values ArchiveDate = date_parameters_list['archive-date'].val; Date = date_parameters_list['date'].val; DoiBroken = date_parameters_list['doi-broken-date'].val; LayDate = date_parameters_list['lay-date'].val; PublicationDate = date_parameters_list['publication-date'].val; end else table.insert( z.message_tail, { set_error( 'bad_date', {error_message}, true ) } ); -- add this error message end end -- end of do

-- Account for the oddity that is Template:Cite journal with |pmc= set and |url= not set. Do this after date check but before COInS. -- Here we unset Embargo if PMC not embargoed (|embargo= not set in the citation) or if the embargo time has expired. Otherwise, holds embargo date Embargo = is_embargoed (Embargo);

if config.CitationClass == "journal" and not is_set(URL) and is_set(ID_list['PMC']) then if not is_set (Embargo) then -- if not embargoed or embargo has expired URL=cfg.id_handlers['PMC'].prefix .. ID_list['PMC']; -- set url to be the same as the PMC external link if not embargoed URLorigin = cfg.id_handlers['PMC'].parameters[1]; -- set URLorigin to parameter name for use in error message if citation is missing a |title= if is_set(AccessDate) then -- access date requires |url=; pmc created url is not |url= table.insert( z.message_tail, { set_error( 'accessdate_missing_url', {}, true ) } ); AccessDate = ; -- unset end

end end

-- At this point fields may be nil if they weren't specified in the template use. We can use that fact. -- Test if citation has no title if not is_set(Title) and not is_set(TransTitle) and not is_set(ScriptTitle) then if 'episode' == config.CitationClass then -- special case for cite episode; TODO: is there a better way to do this? table.insert( z.message_tail, { set_error( 'citation_missing_title', {'series'}, true ) } ); else table.insert( z.message_tail, { set_error( 'citation_missing_title', {'title'}, true ) } ); end end

if 'none' == Title and in_array (config.CitationClass, {'journal', 'citation'}) and is_set (Periodical) and 'journal' == A:ORIGIN('Periodical') then -- special case for journal cites Title = ; -- set title to empty string add_maint_cat ('untitled'); end

check_for_url ({ -- add error message when any of these parameters contains a URL ['title']=Title, [A:ORIGIN('Chapter')]=Chapter, [A:ORIGIN('Periodical')]=Periodical, [A:ORIGIN('PublisherName')] = PublisherName });

-- COinS metadata (see <http://ocoins.info/>) for automated parsing of citation information. -- handle the oddity that is cite encyclopedia and Template:Citation. Here we presume that -- when Periodical, Title, and Chapter are all set, then Periodical is the book (encyclopedia) title, Title -- is the article title, and Chapter is a section within the article. So, we remap

local coins_chapter = Chapter; -- default assuming that remapping not required local coins_title = Title; -- et tu if 'encyclopaedia' == config.CitationClass or ('citation' == config.CitationClass and is_set (Encyclopedia)) then if is_set (Chapter) and is_set (Title) and is_set (Periodical) then -- if all are used then coins_chapter = Title; -- remap coins_title = Periodical; end end local coins_author = a; -- default for coins rft.au if 0 < #c then -- but if contributor list coins_author = c; -- use that instead end

-- this is the function call to COinS() local OCinSoutput = COinS({ ['Periodical'] = Periodical, ['Encyclopedia'] = Encyclopedia, ['Chapter'] = make_coins_title (coins_chapter, ScriptChapter), -- Chapter and ScriptChapter stripped of bold / italic wikimarkup ['Degree'] = Degree; -- cite thesis only ['Title'] = make_coins_title (coins_title, ScriptTitle), -- Title and ScriptTitle stripped of bold / italic wikimarkup ['PublicationPlace'] = PublicationPlace, ['Date'] = COinS_date.rftdate, -- COinS_date has correctly formatted date if Date is valid; ['Season'] = COinS_date.rftssn, ['Chron'] = COinS_date.rftchron or (not COinS_date.rftdate and Date) or , -- chron but if not set and invalid date format use Date; keep this last bit? ['Series'] = Series, ['Volume'] = Volume, ['Issue'] = Issue, ['Pages'] = get_coins_pages (first_set ({Sheet, Sheets, Page, Pages, At}, 5)), -- pages stripped of external links ['Edition'] = Edition, ['PublisherName'] = PublisherName, ['URL'] = first_set ({ChapterURL, URL}, 2), ['Authors'] = coins_author, ['ID_list'] = ID_list, ['RawPage'] = this_page.prefixedText, }, config.CitationClass);

-- Account for the oddities that are Template:Cite arxiv, Template:Cite biorxiv, and Template:Cite citeseerx AFTER generation of COinS data. if in_array (config.CitationClass, {'arxiv', 'biorxiv', 'citeseerx'}) then -- we have set rft.jtitle in COinS to arXiv, bioRxiv, or CiteSeerX now unset so it isn't displayed Periodical = ; -- periodical not allowed in these templates; if article has been published, use cite journal end

-- special case for cite newsgroup. Do this after COinS because we are modifying Publishername to include some static text if 'newsgroup' == config.CitationClass then if is_set (PublisherName) then PublisherName = substitute (cfg.messages['newsgroup'], external_link( 'news:' .. PublisherName, PublisherName, A:ORIGIN('PublisherName'), nil )); end end


-- Now perform various field substitutions. -- We also add leading spaces and surrounding markup and punctuation to the -- various parts of the citation, but only when they are non-nil. local EditorCount; -- used only for choosing {ed.) or (eds.) annotation at end of editor name-list do local last_first_list; local control = { format = NameListFormat, -- empty string or 'vanc' maximum = nil, -- as if display-authors or display-editors not set lastauthoramp = LastAuthorAmp, page_name = this_page.text, -- get current page name so that we don't wikilink to it via editorlinkn mode = Mode };

do -- do editor name list first because the now unsupported coauthors used to modify control table control.maximum , editor_etal = get_display_authors_editors (A['DisplayEditors'], #e, 'editors', editor_etal); last_first_list, EditorCount = list_people(control, e, editor_etal);

if is_set (Editors) then if editor_etal then Editors = Editors .. ' ' .. cfg.messages['et al']; -- add et al. to editors parameter beause |display-editors=etal EditorCount = 2; -- with et al., |editors= is multiple names; spoof to display (eds.) annotation else EditorCount = 2; -- we don't know but assume |editors= is multiple names; spoof to display (eds.) annotation end else Editors = last_first_list; -- either an author name list or an empty string end

if 1 == EditorCount and (true == editor_etal or 1 < #e) then -- only one editor displayed but includes etal then EditorCount = 2; -- spoof to display (eds.) annotation end end do -- now do interviewers control.maximum = #interviewers_list; -- number of interviewerss Interviewers = list_people(control, interviewers_list, false); -- et al not currently supported end do -- now do translators control.maximum = #t; -- number of translators Translators = list_people(control, t, false); -- et al not currently supported end do -- now do contributors control.maximum = #c; -- number of contributors Contributors = list_people(control, c, false); -- et al not currently supported end do -- now do authors control.maximum , author_etal = get_display_authors_editors (A['DisplayAuthors'], #a, 'authors', author_etal);

last_first_list = list_people(control, a, author_etal);

if is_set (Authors) then Authors, author_etal = name_has_etal (Authors, author_etal, false); -- find and remove variations on et al. if author_etal then Authors = Authors .. ' ' .. cfg.messages['et al']; -- add et al. to authors parameter end else Authors = last_first_list; -- either an author name list or an empty string end end -- end of do

if is_set (Authors) and is_set (Collaboration) then Authors = Authors .. ' (' .. Collaboration .. ')'; -- add collaboration after et al. end

end

-- apply |[xx-]format= styling; at the end, these parameters hold correctly styled format annotation, -- an error message if the associated url is not set, or an empty string for concatenation ArchiveFormat = style_format (ArchiveFormat, ArchiveURL, 'archive-format', 'archive-url'); ConferenceFormat = style_format (ConferenceFormat, ConferenceURL, 'conference-format', 'conference-url'); Format = style_format (Format, URL, 'format', 'url'); LayFormat = style_format (LayFormat, LayURL, 'lay-format', 'lay-url'); TranscriptFormat = style_format (TranscriptFormat, TranscriptURL, 'transcript-format', 'transcripturl');

-- special case for chapter format so no error message or cat when chapter not supported if not (in_array(config.CitationClass, {'web', 'news', 'journal', 'magazine', 'pressrelease', 'podcast', 'newsgroup', 'arxiv', 'biorxiv', 'citeseerx'}) or ('citation' == config.CitationClass and is_set (Periodical) and not is_set (Encyclopedia))) then ChapterFormat = style_format (ChapterFormat, ChapterURL, 'chapter-format', 'chapter-url'); end

if not is_set(URL) then if in_array(config.CitationClass, {"web","podcast", "mailinglist"}) then -- |url= required for cite web, cite podcast, and cite mailinglist table.insert( z.message_tail, { set_error( 'cite_web_url', {}, true ) } ); end

-- do we have |accessdate= without either |url= or |chapter-url=? if is_set(AccessDate) and not is_set(ChapterURL)then -- ChapterURL may be set when URL is not set; table.insert( z.message_tail, { set_error( 'accessdate_missing_url', {}, true ) } ); AccessDate = ; end end

local OriginalURL, OriginalURLorigin, OriginalFormat, OriginalAccess; DeadURL = DeadURL:lower(); -- used later when assembling archived text if is_set( ArchiveURL ) then if is_set (ChapterURL) then -- if chapter-url is set apply archive url to it OriginalURL = ChapterURL; -- save copy of source chapter's url for archive text OriginalURLorigin = ChapterURLorigin; -- name of chapter-url parameter for error messages OriginalFormat = ChapterFormat; -- and original |chapter-format= if 'no' ~= DeadURL then ChapterURL = ArchiveURL -- swap-in the archive's url ChapterURLorigin = A:ORIGIN('ArchiveURL') -- name of archive-url parameter for error messages ChapterFormat = ArchiveFormat or ; -- swap in archive's format ChapterUrlAccess = nil; -- restricted access levels do not make sense for archived urls end elseif is_set (URL) then OriginalURL = URL; -- save copy of original source URL OriginalURLorigin = URLorigin; -- name of url parameter for error messages OriginalFormat = Format; -- and original |format= OriginalAccess = UrlAccess; if 'no' ~= DeadURL then -- if URL set then archive-url applies to it URL = ArchiveURL -- swap-in the archive's url URLorigin = A:ORIGIN('ArchiveURL') -- name of archive url parameter for error messages Format = ArchiveFormat or ; -- swap in archive's format UrlAccess = nil; -- restricted access levels do not make sense for archived urls end

		end

end

if in_array(config.CitationClass, {'web','news','journal', 'magazine', 'pressrelease', 'podcast', 'newsgroup', 'arxiv', 'biorxiv', 'citeseerx'}) or -- if any of the 'periodical' cites except encyclopedia ('citation' == config.CitationClass and is_set (Periodical) and not is_set (Encyclopedia)) then local chap_param; if is_set (Chapter) then -- get a parameter name from one of these chapter related meta-parameters chap_param = A:ORIGIN ('Chapter') elseif is_set (TransChapter) then chap_param = A:ORIGIN ('TransChapter') elseif is_set (ChapterURL) then chap_param = A:ORIGIN ('ChapterURL') elseif is_set (ScriptChapter) then chap_param = A:ORIGIN ('ScriptChapter') else is_set (ChapterFormat) chap_param = A:ORIGIN ('ChapterFormat') end

if is_set (chap_param) then -- if we found one table.insert( z.message_tail, { set_error( 'chapter_ignored', {chap_param}, true ) } ); -- add error message Chapter = ; -- and set them to empty string to be safe with concatenation TransChapter = ; ChapterURL = ; ScriptChapter = ; ChapterFormat = ; end else -- otherwise, format chapter / article title local no_quotes = false; -- default assume that we will be quoting the chapter parameter value if is_set (Contribution) and 0 < #c then -- if this is a contribution with contributor(s) if in_array (Contribution:lower(), cfg.keywords.contribution) then -- and a generic contribution title no_quotes = true; -- then render it unquoted end end

Chapter = format_chapter_title (ScriptChapter, Chapter, TransChapter, ChapterURL, ChapterURLorigin, no_quotes, ChapterUrlAccess); -- Contribution is also in Chapter if is_set (Chapter) then Chapter = Chapter .. ChapterFormat ; if 'map' == config.CitationClass and is_set (TitleType) then Chapter = Chapter .. ' ' .. TitleType; -- map annotation here; not after title end Chapter = Chapter.. sepc .. ' '; elseif is_set (ChapterFormat) then -- |chapter= not set but |chapter-format= is so ... Chapter = ChapterFormat .. sepc .. ' '; -- ... ChapterFormat has error message, we want to see it end end

-- Format main title. if is_set (ArchiveURL) and mw.ustring.match (mw.ustring.lower(Title), cfg.special_case_translation['archived_copy']) then -- if title is 'Archived copy' (place holder added by bots that can't find proper title) add_maint_cat ('archived_copy'); -- add maintenance category before we modify the content of Title end

if Title:match ('^%(%(.*%)%)$') then -- if keep as written markup: Title= Title:gsub ('^%(%((.*)%)%)$', '%1') -- remove the markup else if '...' == Title:sub (-3) then -- if elipsis is the last three characters of |title= Title = Title:gsub ('(%.%.%.)%.+$', '%1'); -- limit the number of dots to three elseif not mw.ustring.find (Title, '%.%s*%a%.$') and -- end of title is not a 'dot-(optional space-)letter-dot' initialism ... not mw.ustring.find (Title, '%s+%a%.$') then -- ...and not a 'space-letter-dot' initial (Allium canadense L.) Title = mw.ustring.gsub(Title, '%'..sepc..'$', ); -- remove any trailing separator character; sepc and ms.ustring() here for languages that use multibyte separator characters end end

if is_set(TitleLink) and is_set(Title) then Title = make_wikilink (TitleLink, Title); end

if in_array(config.CitationClass, {'web', 'news', 'journal', 'magazine', 'pressrelease', 'podcast', 'newsgroup', 'mailinglist', 'interview', 'arxiv', 'biorxiv', 'citeseerx'}) or ('citation' == config.CitationClass and is_set (Periodical) and not is_set (Encyclopedia)) or ('map' == config.CitationClass and is_set (Periodical)) then -- special case for cite map when the map is in a periodical treat as an article Title = kern_quotes (Title); -- if necessary, separate title's leading and trailing quote marks from Module provided quote marks Title = wrap_style ('quoted-title', Title); Title = script_concatenate (Title, ScriptTitle); -- tags, lang atribute, categorization, etc; must be done after title is wrapped TransTitle= wrap_style ('trans-quoted-title', TransTitle ); elseif 'report' == config.CitationClass then -- no styling for cite report Title = script_concatenate (Title, ScriptTitle); -- tags, lang atribute, categorization, etc; must be done after title is wrapped TransTitle= wrap_style ('trans-quoted-title', TransTitle ); -- for cite report, use this form for trans-title else Title = wrap_style ('italic-title', Title); Title = script_concatenate (Title, ScriptTitle); -- tags, lang atribute, categorization, etc; must be done after title is wrapped TransTitle = wrap_style ('trans-italic-title', TransTitle); end

local TransError = ""; if is_set(TransTitle) then if is_set(Title) then TransTitle = " " .. TransTitle; else TransError = " " .. set_error( 'trans_missing_title', {'title'} ); end end

if is_set(Title) then if not is_set(TitleLink) and is_set(URL) then

Title = external_link( URL, Title, URLorigin, UrlAccess ) .. TransTitle .. TransError .. Format; URL = ; -- unset these because no longer needed Format = ""; else Title = Title .. TransTitle .. TransError; end else Title = TransTitle .. TransError; end

if is_set(Place) then Place = " " .. wrap_msg ('written', Place, use_lowercase) .. sepc .. " "; end

if is_set (Conference) then if is_set (ConferenceURL) then Conference = external_link( ConferenceURL, Conference, ConferenceURLorigin, nil ); end Conference = sepc .. " " .. Conference .. ConferenceFormat; elseif is_set(ConferenceURL) then Conference = sepc .. " " .. external_link( ConferenceURL, nil, ConferenceURLorigin, nil ); end

if not is_set(Position) then local Minutes = A['Minutes']; local Time = A['Time'];

if is_set(Minutes) then if is_set (Time) then table.insert( z.message_tail, { set_error( 'redundant_parameters', {wrap_style ('parameter', 'minutes') .. ' and ' .. wrap_style ('parameter', 'time')}, true ) } ); end Position = " " .. Minutes .. " " .. cfg.messages['minutes']; else if is_set(Time) then local TimeCaption = A['TimeCaption'] if not is_set(TimeCaption) then TimeCaption = cfg.messages['event']; if sepc ~= '.' then TimeCaption = TimeCaption:lower(); end end Position = " " .. TimeCaption .. " " .. Time; end end else Position = " " .. Position; At = ; end

Page, Pages, Sheet, Sheets = format_pages_sheets (Page, Pages, Sheet, Sheets, config.CitationClass, Periodical_origin, sepc, NoPP, use_lowercase);

At = is_set(At) and (sepc .. " " .. At) or ""; Position = is_set(Position) and (sepc .. " " .. Position) or ""; if config.CitationClass == 'map' then local Section = A['Section']; local Sections = A['Sections']; local Inset = A['Inset'];

if is_set( Inset ) then Inset = sepc .. " " .. wrap_msg ('inset', Inset, use_lowercase); end

if is_set( Sections ) then Section = sepc .. " " .. wrap_msg ('sections', Sections, use_lowercase); elseif is_set( Section ) then Section = sepc .. " " .. wrap_msg ('section', Section, use_lowercase); end At = At .. Inset .. Section; end

if is_set (Language) then Language = language_parameter (Language); -- format, categories, name from ISO639-1, etc else Language=""; -- language not specified so make sure this is an empty string; --[[ TODO: need to extract the wrap_msg from language_parameter so that we can solve parentheses bunching problem with Format/Language/TitleType ]] end

Others = is_set(Others) and (sepc .. " " .. Others) or "";

if is_set (Translators) then Others = safe_join ({sepc .. ' ', wrap_msg ('translated', Translators, use_lowercase), Others}, sepc); end if is_set (Interviewers) then Others = safe_join ({sepc .. ' ', wrap_msg ('interview', Interviewers, use_lowercase), Others}, sepc); end

TitleNote = is_set(TitleNote) and (sepc .. " " .. TitleNote) or ""; if is_set (Edition) then if Edition:match ('%f[%a][Ee]d%.?$') or Edition:match ('%f[%a][Ee]dition$') then add_maint_cat ('extra_text', 'edition'); end Edition = " " .. wrap_msg ('edition', Edition); else Edition = ; end

Series = is_set(Series) and (sepc .. " " .. Series) or ""; OrigYear = is_set(OrigYear) and (" [" .. OrigYear .. "]") or ""; -- TODO: presentation

Agency = is_set(Agency) and (sepc .. " " .. Agency) or "";

Volume = format_volume_issue (Volume, Issue, config.CitationClass, Periodical_origin, sepc, use_lowercase);

------------------------------------ totally unrelated data if is_set(Via) then Via = " " .. wrap_msg ('via', Via); end

--[[ Subscription implies paywall; Registration does not. If both are used in a citation, the subscription required link note is displayed. There are no error messages for this condition.

]] if is_set (SubscriptionRequired) then SubscriptionRequired = sepc .. " " .. cfg.messages['subscription']; -- subscription required message elseif is_set (RegistrationRequired) then SubscriptionRequired = sepc .. " " .. cfg.messages['registration']; -- registration required message else SubscriptionRequired = ; -- either or both might be set to something other than yes true y end

if is_set(AccessDate) then local retrv_text = " " .. cfg.messages['retrieved']

AccessDate = nowrap_date (AccessDate); -- wrap in nowrap span if date in appropriate format if (sepc ~= ".") then retrv_text = retrv_text:lower() end -- if mode is cs2, lower case AccessDate = substitute (retrv_text, AccessDate); -- add retrieved text

AccessDate = substitute (cfg.presentation['accessdate'], {sepc, AccessDate}); -- allow editors to hide accessdates end

if is_set(ID) then ID = sepc .." ".. ID; end

  	if "thesis" == config.CitationClass and is_set(Docket) then

ID = sepc .." Docket ".. Docket .. ID; end

  	if "report" == config.CitationClass and is_set(Docket) then					-- for cite report when |docket= is set

ID = sepc .. ' ' .. Docket; -- overwrite ID even if |id= is set end

ID_list = build_id_list( ID_list, {IdAccessLevels=ID_access_levels, DoiBroken = DoiBroken, ASINTLD = ASINTLD, IgnoreISBN = IgnoreISBN, Embargo=Embargo, Class = Class} );

if is_set(URL) then URL = " " .. external_link( URL, nil, URLorigin, UrlAccess ); end

if is_set(Quote) then if Quote:sub(1,1) == '"' and Quote:sub(-1,-1) == '"' then -- if first and last characters of quote are quote marks Quote = Quote:sub(2,-2); -- strip them off end Quote = sepc .." " .. wrap_style ('quoted-text', Quote ); -- wrap in ... tags PostScript = ""; -- cs1|2 does not supply terminal punctuation when |quote= is set end

local Archived if is_set(ArchiveURL) then if not is_set(ArchiveDate) then ArchiveDate = set_error('archive_missing_date'); end if "no" == DeadURL then local arch_text = cfg.messages['archived']; if sepc ~= "." then arch_text = arch_text:lower() end Archived = sepc .. " " .. substitute( cfg.messages['archived-not-dead'], { external_link( ArchiveURL, arch_text, A:ORIGIN('ArchiveURL'), nil ) .. ArchiveFormat, ArchiveDate } ); if not is_set(OriginalURL) then Archived = Archived .. " " .. set_error('archive_missing_url'); end elseif is_set(OriginalURL) then -- DeadURL is empty, 'yes', 'true', 'y', 'unfit', 'usurped' local arch_text = cfg.messages['archived-dead']; if sepc ~= "." then arch_text = arch_text:lower() end if in_array (DeadURL, {'unfit', 'usurped', 'bot: unknown'}) then Archived = sepc .. " " .. 'Archived from the original on ' .. ArchiveDate; -- format already styled if 'bot: unknown' == DeadURL then add_maint_cat ('bot:_unknown'); -- and add a category if not already added else add_maint_cat ('unfit'); -- and add a category if not already added end else -- DeadURL is empty, 'yes', 'true', or 'y' Archived = sepc .. " " .. substitute( arch_text, { external_link( OriginalURL, cfg.messages['original'], OriginalURLorigin, OriginalAccess ) .. OriginalFormat, ArchiveDate } ); -- format already styled end else local arch_text = cfg.messages['archived-missing']; if sepc ~= "." then arch_text = arch_text:lower() end Archived = sepc .. " " .. substitute( arch_text, { set_error('archive_missing_url'), ArchiveDate } ); end elseif is_set (ArchiveFormat) then Archived = ArchiveFormat; -- if set and ArchiveURL not set ArchiveFormat has error message else Archived = "" end

local Lay = ; if is_set(LayURL) then if is_set(LayDate) then LayDate = " (" .. LayDate .. ")" end if is_set(LaySource) then LaySource = " – " .. safe_for_italics(LaySource) .. ""; else LaySource = ""; end if sepc == '.' then Lay = sepc .. " " .. external_link( LayURL, cfg.messages['lay summary'], A:ORIGIN('LayURL'), nil ) .. LayFormat .. LaySource .. LayDate else Lay = sepc .. " " .. external_link( LayURL, cfg.messages['lay summary']:lower(), A:ORIGIN('LayURL'), nil ) .. LayFormat .. LaySource .. LayDate end elseif is_set (LayFormat) then -- Test if |lay-format= is given without giving a |lay-url= Lay = sepc .. LayFormat; -- if set and LayURL not set, then LayFormat has error message end

if is_set(Transcript) then if is_set(TranscriptURL) then Transcript = external_link( TranscriptURL, Transcript, TranscriptURLorigin, nil ); end Transcript = sepc .. ' ' .. Transcript .. TranscriptFormat; elseif is_set(TranscriptURL) then Transcript = external_link( TranscriptURL, nil, TranscriptURLorigin, nil ); end

local Publisher; if is_set(PublicationDate) then PublicationDate = wrap_msg ('published', PublicationDate); end if is_set(PublisherName) then if is_set(PublicationPlace) then Publisher = sepc .. " " .. PublicationPlace .. ": " .. PublisherName .. PublicationDate; else Publisher = sepc .. " " .. PublisherName .. PublicationDate; end elseif is_set(PublicationPlace) then Publisher= sepc .. " " .. PublicationPlace .. PublicationDate; else Publisher = PublicationDate; end

-- Several of the above rely upon detecting this as nil, so do it last. if is_set(Periodical) then if is_set(Title) or is_set(TitleNote) then Periodical = sepc .. " " .. wrap_style ('italic-title', Periodical) else Periodical = wrap_style ('italic-title', Periodical) end end

--[[ Handle the oddity that is cite speech. This code overrides whatever may be the value assigned to TitleNote (through |department=) and forces it to be " (Speech)" so that the annotation directly follows the |title= parameter value in the citation rather than the |event= parameter value (if provided). ]] if "speech" == config.CitationClass then -- cite speech only TitleNote = " (Speech)"; -- annotate the citation if is_set (Periodical) then -- if Periodical, perhaps because of an included |website= or |journal= parameter if is_set (Conference) then -- and if |event= is set Conference = Conference .. sepc .. " "; -- then add appropriate punctuation to the end of the Conference variable before rendering end end end

-- Piece all bits together at last. Here, all should be non-nil. -- We build things this way because it is more efficient in LUA -- not to keep reassigning to the same string variable over and over.

local tcommon; local tcommon2; -- used for book cite when |contributor= is set

if in_array(config.CitationClass, {"journal","citation"}) and is_set(Periodical) then if is_set(Others) then Others = safe_join ({Others, sepc .. " "}, sepc) end -- add terminal punctuation & space; check for dup sepc; TODO why do we need to do this here? tcommon = safe_join( {Others, Title, TitleNote, Conference, Periodical, Format, TitleType, Series, Language, Edition, Publisher, Agency, Volume}, sepc ); elseif in_array(config.CitationClass, {"book","citation"}) and not is_set(Periodical) then -- special cases for book cites if is_set (Contributors) then -- when we are citing foreword, preface, introduction, etc tcommon = safe_join( {Title, TitleNote}, sepc ); -- author and other stuff will come after this and before tcommon2 tcommon2 = safe_join( {Conference, Periodical, Format, TitleType, Series, Language, Volume, Others, Edition, Publisher, Agency}, sepc ); else tcommon = safe_join( {Title, TitleNote, Conference, Periodical, Format, TitleType, Series, Language, Volume, Others, Edition, Publisher, Agency}, sepc ); end

elseif 'map' == config.CitationClass then -- special cases for cite map if is_set (Chapter) then -- map in a book; TitleType is part of Chapter tcommon = safe_join( {Title, Format, Edition, Scale, Series, Language, Cartography, Others, Publisher, Volume}, sepc ); elseif is_set (Periodical) then -- map in a periodical tcommon = safe_join( {Title, TitleType, Format, Periodical, Scale, Series, Language, Cartography, Others, Publisher, Volume}, sepc ); else -- a sheet or stand-alone map tcommon = safe_join( {Title, TitleType, Format, Edition, Scale, Series, Language, Cartography, Others, Publisher}, sepc ); end

elseif 'episode' == config.CitationClass then -- special case for cite episode tcommon = safe_join( {Title, TitleNote, TitleType, Series, Transcript, Language, Edition, Publisher}, sepc );

else -- all other CS1 templates tcommon = safe_join( {Title, TitleNote, Conference, Periodical, Format, TitleType, Series, Language, Volume, Others, Edition, Publisher, Agency}, sepc ); end

if #ID_list > 0 then ID_list = safe_join( { sepc .. " ", table.concat( ID_list, sepc .. " " ), ID }, sepc ); else ID_list = ID; end

local idcommon = safe_join( { ID_list, URL, Archived, AccessDate, Via, SubscriptionRequired, Lay, Quote }, sepc ); local text; local pgtext = Position .. Sheet .. Sheets .. Page .. Pages .. At;

if is_set(Date) then if is_set (Authors) or is_set (Editors) then -- date follows authors or editors when authors not set Date = " (" .. Date ..")" .. OrigYear .. sepc .. " "; -- in paranetheses else -- neither of authors and editors set if (string.sub(tcommon,-1,-1) == sepc) then -- if the last character of tcommon is sepc Date = " " .. Date .. OrigYear; -- Date does not begin with sepc else Date = sepc .. " " .. Date .. OrigYear; -- Date begins with sepc end end end if is_set(Authors) then if (not is_set (Date)) then -- when date is set it's in parentheses; no Authors termination Authors = terminate_name_list (Authors, sepc); -- when no date, terminate with 0 or 1 sepc and a space end if is_set(Editors) then local in_text = " "; local post_text = ""; if is_set(Chapter) and 0 == #c then in_text = in_text .. cfg.messages['in'] .. " " if (sepc ~= '.') then in_text = in_text:lower() -- lowercase for cs2 end else if EditorCount <= 1 then post_text = ", " .. cfg.messages['editor']; else post_text = ", " .. cfg.messages['editors']; end end Editors = terminate_name_list (in_text .. Editors .. post_text, sepc); -- terminate with 0 or 1 sepc and a space end if is_set (Contributors) then -- book cite and we're citing the intro, preface, etc local by_text = sepc .. ' ' .. cfg.messages['by'] .. ' '; if (sepc ~= '.') then by_text = by_text:lower() end -- lowercase for cs2 Authors = by_text .. Authors; -- author follows title so tweak it here if is_set (Editors) and is_set (Date) then -- when Editors make sure that Authors gets terminated Authors = terminate_name_list (Authors, sepc); -- terminate with 0 or 1 sepc and a space end if (not is_set (Date)) then -- when date is set it's in parentheses; no Contributors termination Contributors = terminate_name_list (Contributors, sepc); -- terminate with 0 or 1 sepc and a space end text = safe_join( {Contributors, Date, Chapter, tcommon, Authors, Place, Editors, tcommon2, pgtext, idcommon }, sepc ); else text = safe_join( {Authors, Date, Chapter, Place, Editors, tcommon, pgtext, idcommon }, sepc ); end elseif is_set(Editors) then if is_set(Date) then if EditorCount <= 1 then Editors = Editors .. ", " .. cfg.messages['editor']; else Editors = Editors .. ", " .. cfg.messages['editors']; end else if EditorCount <= 1 then Editors = Editors .. " (" .. cfg.messages['editor'] .. ")" .. sepc .. " " else Editors = Editors .. " (" .. cfg.messages['editors'] .. ")" .. sepc .. " " end end text = safe_join( {Editors, Date, Chapter, Place, tcommon, pgtext, idcommon}, sepc ); else if in_array(config.CitationClass, {"journal","citation"}) and is_set(Periodical) then text = safe_join( {Chapter, Place, tcommon, pgtext, Date, idcommon}, sepc ); else text = safe_join( {Chapter, Place, tcommon, Date, pgtext, idcommon}, sepc ); end end

if is_set(PostScript) and PostScript ~= sepc then text = safe_join( {text, sepc}, sepc ); --Deals with italics, spaces, etc. text = text:sub(1,-sepc:len()-1); end

text = safe_join( {text, PostScript}, sepc );

-- Now enclose the whole thing in a element local options = {};

if is_set(config.CitationClass) and config.CitationClass ~= "citation" then options.class = config.CitationClass; options.class = "citation " .. config.CitationClass; -- class=citation required for blue highlight when used with |ref= else options.class = "citation"; end

if is_set(Ref) and Ref:lower() ~= "none" then -- set reference anchor if appropriate local id = Ref if ('harv' == Ref ) then local namelist = {}; -- holds selected contributor, author, editor name list local year = first_set ({Year, anchor_year}, 2); -- Year first for legacy citations and for YMD dates that require disambiguation

if #c > 0 then -- if there is a contributor list namelist = c; -- select it elseif #a > 0 then -- or an author list namelist = a; elseif #e > 0 then -- or an editor list namelist = e; end if #namelist > 0 then -- if there are names in namelist id = anchor_id (namelist, year); -- go make the CITEREF anchor else id = ; -- unset end end options.id = id; end

if string.len(text:gsub("<span[^>/]*>(.-)", "%1"):gsub("%b<>","")) <= 2 then -- remove tags and other html-like markup; then get length of what remains z.error_categories = {}; text = set_error('empty_citation'); z.message_tail = {}; end

local render = {}; -- here we collect the final bits for concatenation into the rendered citation

if is_set(options.id) then -- here we wrap the rendered citation in ... tags table.insert (render, substitute (cfg.presentation['cite-id'], {mw.uri.anchorEncode(options.id), mw.text.nowiki(options.class), text})); -- when |ref= is set else table.insert (render, substitute (cfg.presentation['cite'], {mw.text.nowiki(options.class), text})); -- all other cases end

table.insert (render, substitute (cfg.presentation['ocins'], {OCinSoutput})); -- append metadata to the citation

if #z.message_tail ~= 0 then table.insert (render, ' '); for i,v in ipairs( z.message_tail ) do if is_set(v[1]) then if i == #z.message_tail then table.insert (render, error_comment( v[1], v[2] )); else table.insert (render, error_comment( v[1] .. "; ", v[2] )); end end end end

if #z.maintenance_cats ~= 0 then table.insert (render, ''); end

no_tracking_cats = no_tracking_cats:lower(); if in_array(no_tracking_cats, {"", "no", "false", "n"}) then for _, v in ipairs( z.error_categories ) do table.insert (render, make_wikilink ('Category:' .. v)); end for _, v in ipairs( z.maintenance_cats ) do -- append maintenance categories table.insert (render, make_wikilink ('Category:' .. v)); end for _, v in ipairs( z.properties_cats ) do -- append properties categories table.insert (render, make_wikilink ('Category:' .. v)); end end

return table.concat (render); end


--[[--------------------------< V A L I D A T E >--------------------------------------------------------------

Looks for a parameter's name in one of several whitelists.

Parameters in the whitelist can have three values: true - active, supported parameters false - deprecated, supported parameters nil - unsupported parameters

]]

local function validate (name, cite_class) local name = tostring (name); local state;

if in_array (cite_class, {'arxiv', 'biorxiv', 'citeseerx'}) then -- limited parameter sets allowed for these templates state = whitelist.limited_basic_arguments[name]; if true == state then return true; end -- valid actively supported parameter if false == state then deprecated_parameter (name); -- parameter is deprecated but still supported return true; end

state = whitelist[cite_class .. '_basic_arguments'][name]; -- look in the parameter-list for the template identified by cite_class

if true == state then return true; end -- valid actively supported parameter if false == state then deprecated_parameter (name); -- parameter is deprecated but still supported return true; end -- limited enumerated parameters list name = name:gsub("%d+", "#" ); -- replace digit(s) with # (last25 becomes last#) (mw.ustring because non-Western 'local' digits) state = whitelist.limited_numbered_arguments[name]; if true == state then return true; end -- valid actively supported parameter if false == state then deprecated_parameter (name); -- parameter is deprecated but still supported return true; end

return false; -- not supported because not found or name is set to nil end -- end limited parameter-set templates

state = whitelist.basic_arguments[name]; -- all other templates; all normal parameters allowed

if true == state then return true; end -- valid actively supported parameter if false == state then deprecated_parameter (name); -- parameter is deprecated but still supported return true; end -- all enumerated parameters allowed name = name:gsub("%d+", "#" ); -- replace digit(s) with # (last25 becomes last#) (mw.ustring because non-Western 'local' digits) state = whitelist.numbered_arguments[name];

if true == state then return true; end -- valid actively supported parameter if false == state then deprecated_parameter (name); -- parameter is deprecated but still supported return true; end

return false; -- not supported because not found or name is set to nil end


--[[--------------------------< M I S S I N G _ P I P E _ C H E C K >------------------------------------------

Look at the contents of a parameter. If the content has a string of characters and digits followed by an equal sign, compare the alphanumeric string to the list of cs1|2 parameters. If found, then the string is possibly a parameter that is missing its pipe: Template:Cite ...

cs1|2 shares some parameter names with xml/html atributes: class=, title=, etc. To prevent false positives xml/html tags are removed before the search.

If a missing pipe is detected, this function adds the missing pipe maintenance category.

]]

local function missing_pipe_check (value) local capture; value = value:gsub ('%b<>', ); -- remove xml/html tags because attributes: class=, title=, etc

capture = value:match ('%s+(%a[%a%d]+)%s*=') or value:match ('^(%a[%a%d]+)%s*='); -- find and categorize parameters with possible missing pipes if capture and validate (capture) then -- if the capture is a valid parameter name add_maint_cat ('missing_pipe'); end end


--[[--------------------------< C S 1 . C I T A T I O N >------------------------------------------------------

This is used by templates such as Template:Cite book to create the actual citation text.

]]

function cs1.citation(frame) Frame = frame; -- save a copy incase we need to display an error message in preview mode local pframe = frame:getParent() local validation, utilities, identifiers, metadata, styles;

if nil ~= string.find (frame:getTitle(), 'sandbox', 1, true) then -- did the Script error: You must specify a function to call. use sandbox version? cfg = mw.loadData ('Module:Citation/CS1/Configuration/sandbox'); -- load sandbox versions of support modules whitelist = mw.loadData ('Module:Citation/CS1/Whitelist/sandbox'); utilities = require ('Module:Citation/CS1/Utilities/sandbox'); validation = require ('Module:Citation/CS1/Date_validation/sandbox'); identifiers = require ('Module:Citation/CS1/Identifiers/sandbox'); metadata = require ('Module:Citation/CS1/COinS/sandbox'); styles = 'Module:Citation/CS1/sandbox/styles.css';

else -- otherwise cfg = mw.loadData ('Module:Citation/CS1/Configuration'); -- load live versions of support modules whitelist = mw.loadData ('Module:Citation/CS1/Whitelist'); utilities = require ('Module:Citation/CS1/Utilities'); validation = require ('Module:Citation/CS1/Date_validation'); identifiers = require ('Module:Citation/CS1/Identifiers'); metadata = require ('Module:Citation/CS1/COinS'); styles = 'Module:Citation/CS1/styles.css';

end

utilities.set_selected_modules (cfg); -- so that functions in Utilities can see the cfg tables identifiers.set_selected_modules (cfg, utilities); -- so that functions in Identifiers can see the selected cfg tables and selected Utilities module validation.set_selected_modules (cfg, utilities); -- so that functions in Date validataion can see selected cfg tables and the selected Utilities module metadata.set_selected_modules (cfg, utilities); -- so that functions in COinS can see the selected cfg tables and selected Utilities module

dates = validation.dates; -- imported functions from Module:Citation/CS1/Date validation year_date_check = validation.year_date_check; reformat_dates = validation.reformat_dates; date_hyphen_to_dash = validation.date_hyphen_to_dash; date_name_xlate = validation.date_name_xlate;

is_set = utilities.is_set; -- imported functions from Module:Citation/CS1/Utilities in_array = utilities.in_array; substitute = utilities.substitute; error_comment = utilities.error_comment; set_error = utilities.set_error; select_one = utilities.select_one; add_maint_cat = utilities.add_maint_cat; wrap_style = utilities.wrap_style; safe_for_italics = utilities.safe_for_italics; is_wikilink = utilities.is_wikilink; make_wikilink = utilities.make_wikilink;

z = utilities.z; -- table of error and category tables in Module:Citation/CS1/Utilities

extract_ids = identifiers.extract_ids; -- imported functions from Module:Citation/CS1/Identifiers build_id_list = identifiers.build_id_list; is_embargoed = identifiers.is_embargoed; extract_id_access_levels = identifiers.extract_id_access_levels;

make_coins_title = metadata.make_coins_title; -- imported functions from Module:Citation/CS1/COinS get_coins_pages = metadata.get_coins_pages; COinS = metadata.COinS;

local args = {}; -- table where we store all of the template's arguments local suggestions = {}; -- table where we store suggestions if we need to loadData them local error_text, error_state;

local config = {}; -- table to store parameters from the module Script error: You must specify a function to call. for k, v in pairs( frame.args ) do config[k] = v; -- args[k] = v; -- debug tool that allows us to render a citation from module Script error: You must specify a function to call. end

local capture; -- the single supported capture when matching unknown parameters using patterns for k, v in pairs( pframe.args ) do if v ~= then if ('string' == type (k)) then k = mw.ustring.gsub (k, '%d', cfg.date_names.local_digits); -- for enumerated parameters, translate 'local' digits to Western 0-9 end if not validate( k, config.CitationClass ) then error_text = ""; if type( k ) ~= 'string' then -- Exclude empty numbered parameters if v:match("%S+") ~= nil then error_text, error_state = set_error( 'text_ignored', {v}, true ); end elseif validate( k:lower(), config.CitationClass ) then error_text, error_state = set_error( 'parameter_ignored_suggest', {k, k:lower()}, true ); -- suggest the lowercase version of the parameter else if nil == suggestions.suggestions then -- if this table is nil then we need to load it if nil ~= string.find (frame:getTitle(), 'sandbox', 1, true) then -- did the Script error: You must specify a function to call. use sandbox version? suggestions = mw.loadData( 'Module:Citation/CS1/Suggestions/sandbox' ); -- use the sandbox version else suggestions = mw.loadData( 'Module:Citation/CS1/Suggestions' ); -- use the live version end end for pattern, param in pairs (suggestions.patterns) do -- loop through the patterns to see if we can suggest a proper parameter capture = k:match (pattern); -- the whole match if no caputre in pattern else the capture if a match if capture then -- if the pattern matches param = substitute (param, capture); -- add the capture to the suggested parameter (typically the enumerator) if validate (param, config.CitationClass) then -- validate the suggestion to make sure that the suggestion is supported by this template (necessary for limited parameter lists) error_text, error_state = set_error ('parameter_ignored_suggest', {k, param}, true); -- set the suggestion error message else error_text, error_state = set_error( 'parameter_ignored', {param}, true ); -- suggested param not supported by this template end end end if not is_set (error_text) then -- couldn't match with a pattern, is there an expicit suggestion? if suggestions.suggestions[ k:lower() ] ~= nil then error_text, error_state = set_error( 'parameter_ignored_suggest', {k, suggestions.suggestions[ k:lower() ]}, true ); else error_text, error_state = set_error( 'parameter_ignored', {k}, true ); v = ; -- unset value assigned to unrecognized parameters (this for the limited parameter lists) end end end if error_text ~= then table.insert( z.message_tail, {error_text, error_state} ); end end missing_pipe_check (v); -- do we think that there is a parameter that is missing a pipe? -- TODO: is this the best place for this translation? args[k] = v; elseif args[k] ~= nil or (k == 'postscript') then -- here when v is empty string args[k] = v; -- why do we do this? we don't support 'empty' parameters end end

for k, v in pairs( args ) do if 'string' == type (k) then -- don't evaluate positional parameters has_invisible_chars (k, v); end end return table.concat ({citation0( config, args), frame:extensionTag ('templatestyles', , {src=styles})}); end

return cs1;